Linksys Business Series Network Storage System

Administrator Guide
Models NSS4000 and 6000 Series
ADMINISTRATION
GUIDE
Product or Solution Graphic
Goes Here
© 2009 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. OL-17960-02

co nas moro lnan 200 oííicos wor|owioo. Aoorossos. pnono numbors. ano íax numbors aro |isloo on lno Cisco Wobsilo al lll#X^hXd#Xdb$\d$d[[^XZh#
6bZg^XVh=ZVYfjVgiZgh
Cisco Sysloms. lnc.
San Joso. CA
6h^VEVX^[^X=ZVYfjVgiZgh
Cisco Sysloms (USA} Plo. Llo.
Sinoaporo
:jgdeZ=ZVYfjVgiZgh
Cisco Sysloms lnlornaliona| BV
Amsloroam. Tno Ñolnor|anos
Cisco nas moro lnan 200 oííicos wor|owioo. Aoorossos. pnono numbors. ano íax numbors aro |isloo on lno Cisco Wobsilo al lll#X^hXd#Xdb$\d$d[[^XZh#
CCDE. CCEÑT. Cisco Eos. Cisco Lumin. Cisco Ñoxus. Cisco SlaoiumVision. Cisco To|oProsonco. Cisco WobEx. lno Cisco |ooo. DCE. ano Wo|como lo lno Human Ñolwork aro lraoomarks. Cnanoino lno Way Wo Work.
6bZg^XVh=ZVYfjVgiZgh
Cisco Sysloms. lnc.
San Joso. CA
6h^VEVX^[^X=ZVYfjVgiZgh
Cisco Sysloms (USA} Plo. Llo.
Sinoaporo
:jgdeZ=ZVYfjVgiZgh
Cisco Sysloms lnlornaliona| BV
Amsloroam. Tno Ñolnor|anos
Cisco nas moro lnan 200 oííicos wor|owioo. Aoorossos. pnono numbors. ano íax numbors aro |isloo on lno Cisco Wobsilo al lll#X^hXd#Xdb$\d$d[[^XZh#
CCDE. CCEÑT. Cisco Eos. Cisco Lumin. Cisco Ñoxus. Cisco SlaoiumVision. Cisco To|oProsonco. Cisco WobEx. lno Cisco |ooo. DCE. ano Wo|como lo lno Human Ñolwork aro lraoomarks. Cnanoino lno Way Wo Work.
Livo. P|ay. ano Loarn ano Cisco Sloro aro sorvico marks. ano Accoss Pooislrar. Aironol. AsyncOS. Brinoino lno Moolino To You. Cala|ysl. CCDA. CCDP. CClE. CClP. CCÑA. CCÑP. CCSP. CCVP. Cisco. lno Cisco Corliíioo
lnlornolwork Exporl |ooo. Cisco lOS. Cisco Pross. Cisco Sysloms. Cisco Sysloms Capila|. lno Cisco Sysloms |ooo. Cisco Unily. Co||aboralion Wilnoul Limilalion. ElnorFasl. ElnorSwilcn. Evonl Conlor. Fasl Slop. Fo||ow Mo
Browsino. FormSnaro. GioaDrivo. HomoLink. lnlornol Ouolionl. lOS. iPnono. iOuick Sluoy. lronPorl. lno lronPorl |ooo. LionlSlroam. Linksys. MooiaTono. MoolinoP|aco. MoolinoP|aco Cnimo Souno. MGX. Ñolworkors. Ñolworkino
Acaoomy. Ñolwork Pooislrar. PCÑow. PlX. PoworPano|s. ProConnocl. ScriplSnaro. SonoorBaso. SMAPTnol. Spoclrum Exporl. SlackWiso. Tno Faslosl Way lo lncroaso Your lnlornol Ouolionl. TransPaln. WobEx. ano lno WobEx
|ooo aro rooisloroo lraoomarks oí Cisco Sysloms. lnc. ano/or ils aííi|ialos in lno Uniloo Slalos ano corlain olnor counlrios.
A|| olnor lraoomarks monlionoo in lnis oocumonl or wobsilo aro lno proporly oí lnoir rospoclivo ownors. Tno uso oí lno woro parlnor ooos nol imp|y a parlnorsnip ro|alionsnip bolwoon Cisco ano any olnor company. (0809P}
6bZg^XVh=ZVYfjVgiZgh
Cisco Sysloms. lnc.
San Joso. CA
6h^VEVX^[^X=ZVYfjVgiZgh
Cisco Sysloms (USA} Plo. Llo.
Sinoaporo
:jgdeZ=ZVYfjVgiZgh
Cisco Sysloms lnlornaliona| BV
Amsloroam. Tno Ñolnor|anos
Contents
Linksys Business Series NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage System Administrator Guide 1
Chapter 1: Introduction 1
Benefits 1
About This Guide 2
Recommended Installation Sequence 2
Using the Help 3
Audience 3
About the NSS Configuration Interface 3
Getting Help 4
Refreshing the GUI Pages 4
Approved Vendor List for Drives 4
Chapter 2: Managing the System 5
System Alerts 6
Storage Status 6
Network Status 7
Shares Status 7
Backup and Snapshots Status 7
Power Status 8
System Status 9
Viewing the Hardware Monitor 9
Viewing and Managing the System Logs 10
Viewing the Power Status Page 13
NSS-Supported UPS Product Families 14
Chapter 3: Adding the NSS to your Network 15
Physical Interfaces 15
Virtual Interfaces 16
Viewing the Network Settings 17
Configuring the Network Link IP 18
Resetting the DHCP Lease on a Link 19
Contents
Linksys Business Series NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage System Administrator Guide 2
Viewing VLANs Configured on the NSS 20
Allowing a VLAN Access to the NSS 21
Changing a VLAN Configuration 23
Removing a VLAN’s Access to the NSS 25
Configuring the NSS Network Identification 26
Configuring DNS or WINS for Name Resolution 28
Joining the NSS to a Network Information System (NIS) Domain 30
Editing Access Control Lists (ACLs) from Windows Explorer:
Restrictions 32
Running Diagnostics of your Physical Links 32
Configuring the Network Ports 33
Setting up the Link Bonding & Advertising Modes 35
Chapter 4: Configuring your Storage 37
Disk Status Table 38
RAID Arrays Table 39
Volumes Table 40
USB Storage Status 40
Managing RAID Arrays 41
About the RAID Arrays Page 41
Choosing a RAID Array Level 42
Creating a RAID Array 44
Adding a Disk Drive to an Array 45
Deleting an Array 47
Migrating a RAID Array to another Storage Device 48
Virtualizing Storage within your Network 49
Exporting Storage to your Network 50
Creating Virtualized Storage 51
Unexporting Storage 52
Volume Management 53
Contents
Linksys Business Series NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage System Administrator Guide 3
Creating a Volume 54
Expanding a Volume 55
Deleting a Volume 58
Viewing the Snapshot Reserve Details 59
Maintaining Active Snapshots 60
Creating a Snapshot for a Volume 61
Taking a Manual Snapshot of a Volume 63
Windows End Users: Accessing a Snapshot for a Share 64
Volume Encryption Overview 65
Locking an Encrypted Volume 66
Unlocking a Locked Volume 67
Changing the Password for an Encrypted Volume 69
Storage Options 70
Chapter 5: Setting up End-User Access 73
Managing your NSS Users 73
Creating a User Profile 74
Editing a User Profile 76
Integrating Users from an ADS, NTv4, or NIS Domain 78
Logging into the NSS as a Local User 79
Deleting a User Profile 79
Working with Groups 80
Creating a Group 80
Changing the Users Assigned to a Group 83
Integrating Groups from an Active Directory, NTv4, or
NIS Domain 84
Deleting a Group 84
Managing Volume Quotas 86
Changing the User’s Primary Group 87
About the Volume Quota Page 87
Contents
Linksys Business Series NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage System Administrator Guide 4
Creating Volume Quota for a User or Group 88
Setting up the Grace Period for a Volume Quota 90
Changing a Volume Quota for a User or Group 91
Clearing a Quota 92
Network Filters Overview 93
Defining the Default Network Policy 94
Creating a Network Filter 96
Available Access Filters 97
Deleting a Network Filter 99
Configuring the User/Group Settings 99
Chapter 6: Managing the Shares 101
Creating a Share 102
Editing an Existing Share 105
Adding a DFS Shared Folder 108
Restrictions using Microsoft DFS from the NSS 111
Setting up CIFS Access 111
Setting up Network Filesystem (NFS) Access 112
Configuring the NSS for FTP Access 114
Configuring Passive Mode FTP 116
Creating or Running a Backup of a Share 120
Creating a Scheduled Backup for a Share 121
Initiating a Backup for a Share 124
Deleting Backup Images 126
Chapter 7: Managing the NSS 127
Rebooting or Shutting Down the NSS 127
Upgrading the NSS Firmware 129
Upgrading the NSS Firmware in a Virtualized Setup 131
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration 131
Contents
Linksys Business Series NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage System Administrator Guide 5
Managing the NSS Configuration 133
Saving the Current Configuration 134
Restoring a Configuration File 137
Deleting a Configuration File 139
Configuring the Timing Settings 140
Configuring the Email Alerts for a Recipient 142
Changing the Email Alerts for a Recipient 144
Deleting an Email Alert Recipient Profile 145
Configuring SNMP Alerts 145
Changing the Administrator Password 147
Chapter 8: Accessing the Storage 149
Logging into a Share 149
Logging into the CIFS Shares with Administrator Privileges 149
Windows Users: Accessing the Storage by using CIFS/SMB 150
Windows Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP 151
Mac Users: Accessing the Storage by using CIFS/SMB 151
Mac Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP 152
UNIX/Linux Users: Accessing the Storage by using NFS 153
UNIX/Linux Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP 154
Chapter A: Troubleshooting 155
NSS LEDs 155
Power LED (Front Panel) 155
System LED (Front Panel) 156
Reset Button (Front Panel) 156
LAN LED (Front Panel) 157
Hard Disk Drive LEDs 157
USB LED (Front Panel) 158
UPS LED (Back Panel) 158
Contents
Linksys Business Series NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage System Administrator Guide 6
Repairing a Degraded Array 158
Working with a Failed Array 160
Drive Error LED Remains On 161
Firmware Attempt is Unsuccessful 161
Free Bound Virtualized Storage when the Master System Fails 162
All CIFS Connections were Unexpectedly Ended 163
Hotplugging the Ethernet Link doesn’t Reset IP or Link Rate 163
Unable to Create a Share or Quota for a Volume 163
Cannot Access the NSS through FTP 164
Cannot Rename a Folder through FTP 165
Configuration Page Does not Appear in Internet Explorer 165
Handling an Unexpected (Unclean) Shutdown 165
Boosting the Performance of NFS Transfers 166
Rejoining the ADS Domain after a Failed to Join 167
Appendix B: Specifications 168
Appendix C: Where to Go From Here 169
Chapter D: Glossary of Storage-related Terms
and Acronyms 170
1
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 1
Introduction
Thank you for choosing the Linksys Business Series Network Storage
System (NSS).
Administering a network can be a difficult job. Finding low-cost ways to simplify
your data-management tasks means that you have more resources to dedicate
elsewhere. The NSS is a Network Attached Storage (NAS) unit that appears as a
native file server for the various clients within your network, including Windows,
Apple Macintosh, UNIX, and Linux platforms. The biggest benefit to your users is
that they can now access data that might be stored across different physical
platforms as simply as if it were on their own computers. The NSS provides a
single repository that is completely dedicated to storage, ensuring the integrity,
reliability, and accessibility of your data for a relatively low cost.
The NSS lets you install up to four physical disk drives and virtualize your storage
into one or more logical, redundant storage units or RAID arrays. The NSS uses the
most common file-based protocols such as NFS, CIFS, and FTP for file sharing.
Benefits
The NSS offers these main advantages to your business:
• Cross-platform File Sharing: Share files easily and inexpensively across
different platforms over a cost-effective Ethernet and IP network.
• Easy Installation and Administration: With a basic understanding of
networking, the NSS is easily configured, managed and made available to
all of your users on the network.
• Data Consolidation: Centralize data to reduce management costs and
maximize your investment in existing hardware. This also means better
data security.
Introduction
About This Guide
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 2
1
About This Guide
The Linksys Business Series Network Storage System Administrator Guide
describes the Administrative features that are available for you to configure and
optimize your NSS. If you are setting up your system for the first time, refer to the
Linksys Business Series Network Storage System Getting Started Guide.
Recommended Installation Sequence
Installing the NSS system involves a series of steps, from setting up the hardware
to configuring the device. Certain activities must take place before others may be
attempted (for example, you must set the User and Group ID ranges must be set
before you join the NSS to the domain.
STEP 1 Set up the hardware:
a. Install the disk drive. Skip this step if you have an NSS4100 or NSS6100 as
they are already equipped with disk drives.
b. Connect the Ethernet link(s).
c. Connect the power.
STEP 2 Configure the NSS:
a. Log into the Configuration Interface.
b. Configure the time setting (options include NTP or manual).
c. Configure RAID(s). You can choose to skip this step if you have an NSS4100 or
NSS6100 as it is preconfigured with a RAID5 array.
d. Create the volume(s).
e. If you have multiple NSS units (one of which is a NSS6000 series unit), and you
want to virtualize your storage, set the export/Import of the virtualized arrays.
f. Configure the Network Domain Identification (NT4, Active Directory, NIS, etc.).
g. Set up the User and Group ID ranges (this enables the import of groups/users
from Domain Controllers)
h. Set up the users’ Home Directory Location (this enables you to set up local
users).
Introduction
Using the Help
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 3
1
i. Add any locally defined groups or users. (Optional)
STEP 3 Create Shares. Enable CIFS, NFS, FTP access to specific shares.
a. Setup DFS access. (Optional)
b. If you have an NSS6000 series unit, configure the volume snapshots. (Optional)
c. Configure the share backups as required. (Optional).
d. Go through the rest of the configuration options to set up quotas, edit groups,
set up email and SNMP alerts, and so forth. For more detailed information, refer
to the Online Help.
STEP 4 Instruct your users how to access the NSS.
Using the Help
The NSS help file provides information about using the configuration interface to
configure the NSS.
Audience
The information contained in these help pages is intended for use by network
administrators. It assumes a basic understanding of storage-related concepts,
including RAID, filesystems, and networking.
About the NSS Configuration Interface
The NSS Configuration Interface contains some basic navigation features to help
you as you configure the NSS.
• Manager Menu: The Manager Menu forms the left side of the configuration
interface window. It contains the menu options that represent the major
configuration areas for the NSS. For example, System, Network, Share,
Storage, and so on. When you click an option, a sub-menu of related options
appears. Clicking a subtopic opens the associated topic in the Topic page
in the right side of the window.
• Topic Page: When you select a topic from the Manager Menu, the
configuration page for that topic appears in the right side of the window.
Introduction
Approved Vendor List for Drives
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 4
1
Getting Help
There are two buttons on the NSS configuration interface window that you can
click to access help:
• From the Manager Menu click Help to display the full online Administrator
Guide. Use the navigation tools within the help to find information for your
chosen topic.
• A context-sensitive help button appears in the upper-right corner of the
topic page. Click it to display help on the specific configuration area. For
example, if the current configuration topic is about the status of your disk
drives, click the Help button for information about the details that appear on
the status page.
Refreshing the GUI Pages
Although certain GUI pages automatically refresh at a preselected time interval,
some pages do not refresh until they are reselected. The best way to manually
refresh a GUI page is to reselect it through the options in the Manager Menu on
the left side of the GUI window. For example, to refresh the NTP Configuration
page, from the Manager Menu, click Admin and then click Time. Do not use the
Refresh button on the Web browser toolbar as this can cause data issues.
Approved Vendor List for Drives
If you are purchasing disk drives to install in the NSS, see the Approved Vendor
List at http://www.cisco.com/support for a list of recommended disk drives.
When you select a disk drive, consider the type of RAID levels required to service
your business needs. For example, if you are creating a RAID (versus a JBOD),
make sure that each of the disks used in the array have the same disk capacity.
The RAID is built using the capacity of the smallest disk in the array.
2
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 5
Managing the System
The System Status page provides an overview of the current operating condition
of the NSS. For example, you can view system alert messages if a disk drive is
failing or has failed, if a volume is approaching its full capacity, if an array rebuild is
complete, and so on. You can also view the current status of any of the following:
storage, shares, backups, volume snapshots, network, power, and system details.
The System Status page automatically refreshes on a regular interval and is
helpful for monitoring the progress of certain processes such as building a RAID.
These sections provide a detailed explanation of the information that appears on
the System Status page.
Managing the System
System Alerts
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 6
2
System Alerts
The System Alerts section shows any system messages issued since the last
time they were cleared. Messages can range in severity from informational to
immediate action required.
There are three type of system alerts:
• Error: Indicates the most severe types of problems with the NSS. They are
color-coded red and require immediate action. For example, if a disk drive
or RAID array is in a failed condition.
• Warning: Indicates that there is a problem with the NSS that requires
eventual action. They are color-coded orange. For example, if the amount of
storage used for a volume is
over 90%.
• Notification: Shows the recent changes to the NSS. They do not require
action and are color-coded green. For example, the RAID rebuild is
complete.
Storage Status
The Storage area displays these details about the configured storage on the NSS:
• Drives: The number of physical disk drives installed.
• RAID Arrays: The number of configured RAID arrays.
• Volumes: The number of configured volumes.
• Total Configured Capacity: The total aggregate size of all configured
volumes.
• Percent Used: The total amount of the configured capacity used. The
percentage is color-coded according to the current percentage used:
- Green: 0 to 74%
- Orange: 75 to 89%
- Red: 90 to 100%
Managing the System
Network Status
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 7
2
Network Status
The Network area displays the following:
• Link 1 & 2: The current status of the physical links. The status of the link can
be up (color-coded green) or down (color-coded red). If the link is not
present, the status appears
as “down.”
• Bonding Mode: Displays how the bonding mode for the physical links is
configured on the Network Properties page. See “Setting up the Link
Bonding & Advertising Modes,” on page 35 for more information.
• VLANs: The number of VLANs configured on the NSS.
• Link 1 IP: The IP address of the first Ethernet link.
• Link 2 IP: The IP address of the second Ethernet link (if installed). If the
bonding mode is set to “active backup” or “802.3ad”, the two links appear
as a single entity (i.e., “Link 1+2 IP”).
Shares Status
The Shares area displays the following:
• Shares: The number of configured shares.
• Connected Users: The total number of user sessions currently connected
to the NSS.
- FTP: The FTP access state (enabled or disabled).
- NFS: The NFS access state (enabled or disabled).
Backup and Snapshots Status
• The Backup and Snapshots area displays the following:
• Snapshots: The total number of volume snapshots configured.
• Last Backup: The date and time of the last backup run. If a backup has
never been run on the system, the word “never” appears.
Managing the System
Power Status
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 8
2
Power Status
The Power area displays the following:
• UPS: These options are available depending on the current operating
condition of the UPS.
- No Connection: A UPS is not currently connected to the NSS.
- On Mains: A UPS is connected to the NSS but is not currently being
used to power the unit. The NSS is deriving power from the mains
power.
- On Battery (%): The NSS is currently deriving its power from the UPS
battery. The percentage of power still available is also listed and is
color-coded according to the amount of battery remaining.
For more information about how the UPS functions, refer to the UPS
documentation.
• RPSU: These options are available depending on the current operating
condition of the RPSU.
- No Connection: There is no RPSU installed.
- Ready: An RPSU is installed and is currently available as a backup
power source.
- Standby/Fault: An RPSU is installed but is in standby mode, or, the
RPSU is installed and has a fault condition. For example, the RPSU is
connected to the NSS but is powered off.
- Active: The RPSU is currently being used to provide backup power to
the NSS.
- Unavailable: The RPSU is currently providing backup power to another
device and is not available to provide backup power to the NSS.
For more information about how the RPSU functions, refer to the RPSU
documentation.
Managing the System
System Status
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 9
2
System Status
The System area displays the following:
• Serial Number: The serial number of the NSS.
• Firmware Version: The current version and date of the firmware installed on
the NSS.
• Uptime: The number of days the NSS has been running since it was last
rebooted.
• Last Boot: The date when the NSS was last rebooted.
Viewing the Hardware Monitor
The Hardware Monitor page displays these details about the physical conditions
related to the NSS:
Managing the System
Viewing and Managing the System Logs
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 10
2
• Voltages: The current voltage reading for all voltage rails in the system. The
reading is color-coded depending on if the voltage level is within
specification (green) or out of specification and in need of attention (red).
• Fans: The fan speed for each chassis fan. Normal fan operation is color-
coded green. If the fan has stalled, the reading is color-coded red.
• Temperatures: The NSS has temperature sensors located at various parts
of the chassis. Temperature readings are performed from these sensors as
well as from any installed disks (if the disk has an internal temperature
sensor). If a disk does not have a temperature sensor, the reading appears
as “unavailable.” If the temperature of the system or disks is over or under
the ideal temperature, the temperature is color-coded red. When the
temperature is within the normal range the color-coding is green.
Viewing and Managing the System Logs
The NSS captures various types of information into log files, such as user access
details. You can store the logs locally or on a remote server on the network. Since
local space allocated for log files is limited, the logs are overwritten once the
space is filled. Each new event overwrites the oldest event recorded in the file.
To work with the log files:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click System Logs.
2
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 11
The System Logs page appears.
STEP 2 You can view, download, or delete these types of log files:
• Admin: A full list of time-stamped actions that were initiated through the
NSS configuration interface.
• Web Access: This log displays IP addresses of the systems that accessed
the NSS configuration interface and the date and time of the authentication
requests. This information helps you detect unauthorized attempts to
access the configuration interface.
• CIFS Sharing: A time-stamped event log of events initiated by users
accessing shares through CIFS.
• FTP Access: A time-stamped log of FTP actions, including user logins, file
transfers, and
user logouts.
• All Logs: A list of all the log files. You can download and save this file.
Managing the System
Viewing and Managing the System Logs
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 12
2
This is an example of the Administrator Log:
STEP 3 Choose where you want to store the log files:
• Locally: To store the log files on the NSS, select Store Logs Locally, and
then select the volume to which you want to store the logs from the options
in the Store Logs to drop-down menu.
• Remotely: To store the log files on a remote server, select Forward Log
Messages, and then enter the name or IP address of the server in one or
both of the Remote Log Host fields. (If you set up two remote hosts, the log
file is sent to both servers.) Note that the remote server must be running a
syslog server.
STEP 4 Click Update.
Managing the System
Viewing the Power Status Page
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 13
2
Viewing the Power Status Page
The Power Status page provides an overview of the current power condition of
the NSS. It is also where you can configure an attached UPS.
NOTE When the UPS power goes to low battery, a signal is sent through the USB port on
the NSS and a shutdown of the NSS is initiated. Make sure that the UPS has enough
reserve power to sustain the NSS through the shutdown (approximately 5 minutes).
The Power area displays the following:
• UPS: These options are available depending on the current operating
condition of the UPS.
- No Connection: A UPS is not currently connected to the NSS.
- On Mains: A UPS is connected to the NSS but is not currently being
used to power the unit. The NSS is deriving power from the main power.
- On Battery (%): The NSS is currently deriving its power from the UPS
battery. The percentage of power still available is also listed and is
color-coded according to the amount of battery remaining.
For more information about the functioning of the UPS, refer to the UPS
documentation.
Managing the System
NSS-Supported UPS Product Families
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 14
2
• RPSU: These options are available depending on the current operating
condition of the RPSU.
- No Connection: There is no RPSU installed.
- Ready: An RPSU is installed and is currently available as a backup
power source.
• Standby/Fault: An RPSU is installed but is in Standby mode, or, the RPSU is
installed and has some sort of fault condition. For example, the RPSU is
connected to the NSS but is powered off.
• Active: The RPSU is currently being used to provide backup power to
the NSS.
• Unavailable: The RPSU is currently providing backup power to another
device and is not available to provide backup power to the NSS.
For more information about the functioning of the RPSU, refer to the
RPSU documentation.
NSS-Supported UPS Product Families
The NSS supports these UPS product families:
• APC Back-UPS Pro USB
• APC Back-UPS RS USB
• APC Back-UPS USB
• APC Back-UPS LS USB
• APC Back-UPS ES/CyberFort 350
• APC Smart-UPS USB
3
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 15
Adding the NSS to your Network
The Network Device Status page displays the current status of the NSS physical
and virtual network interfaces.
Physical Interfaces
The Network Device Status table displays the current status of the physical
Ethernet links connected to the NSS.
• Status: The status of the physical link. Options include:
- Up: The link is up (color-coded green) and is operational.
- Down: The link is down (color-coded red) and not operational.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Physical Interfaces
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 16
3
• Link: The number that appears in this column identifies the link attached to
the NSS. It can be either 1 or 2.
If a cable is connected to the Ethernet port, check the cable integrity and
the status of the device (switch, router, or computer) at the other end of the
cable. You can use the NSS cable diagnostic feature (see to assist you. (see
”Running Diagnostics of your Physical Links” section on page 32)
• Speed: The configured speed, in Mbps, of the physical link. Options include:
10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 1000 Mbps.
• MAC Address: The Ethernet MAC address for the link.
• MTU: The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) in bytes defined for the link.
This is set either manually from the Network Properties page or via the
DHCP server.
• Rx Pkts: The total number of IP packets received since the last boot.
• Tx Pkts: The total number of IP packets transmitted since the last boot.
• Dropped Pkts: The total number of IP packets dropped since the last boot.
Virtual Interfaces
The VLAN Status area of the Network Status page displays the current status
and details about each configured VLAN.
• Link: The number that appears in this column identifies the physical link on
which the VLAN is configured. If there are two physical links, the link
appears as either “1” or “2.” If the two links are bonded, the number appears
as “1+2.”
• VLAN: The VLAN number.
• Priority: The 802.1p priority set for the VLAN. Options include 0 through 7 (0
being best effort data and 7 being network critical data).
• Label: The text description defined for the VLAN.
• Rx Pkts: The total number of IP packets received on the VLAN interface
since the last boot.
• Tx Pkts: The total number of IP packets transmitted on the VLAN interface
since the last boot.
• Dropped Pkts: The total number of IP packets dropped on the VLAN
interface since the last boot.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Viewing the Network Settings
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 17
3
Viewing the Network Settings
The Network Device Settings page displays information about the physical and
virtual interfaces currently configured on the NSS.
NOTE If you hotplug the Ethernet link after the initial installation of the NSS, make sure you
that you wait 15 seconds between the time you unplug the cable and then plug it
back in. The NSS displays the correct new settings within 10 seconds.
To display the Network Device Settings page, from the Manager Menu, click
Network IP. The Network Device Settings table displays the following:
• Link: “1+ 2” appears in this column.
• VLAN: The ID assigned to the virtual interface. For physical interfaces, this
column is blank.
• Assign Via: The method used to assign an IP configuration to the physical or
virtual interface. Options include:
• DHCP: The IP configuration was assigned by a DHCP server.
• Manual: A static IP configuration was manually entered through the NSS
configuration interface.
• AutoIP: The interface was configured to use DHCP for IP configuration but
no DHCP server was found. Instead the IP address was assigned by the
AutoIP protocol.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Configuring the Network Link IP
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 18
3
• IP Address: The IP address for the physical or virtual interface.
• Netmask: The netmask for the physical or virtual interface.
• Gateway: The address of the gateway for the physical or virtual interface.
Configuring the Network Link IP
You need to configure the method for assigning an IP configuration to each
interface connected to the NSS.
NOTE If you hotplug the Ethernet link after the initial installation of the NSS, make sure you
that you wait 15 seconds between the time you unplug the cable and then plug it
back in. The NSS displays the correct new settings within 10 seconds.
To set the IP address allocation method for an interface:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network IP.
The Network IP page appears listing each interface.
STEP 2 Click Edit on the row of the interface you want to configure.
The Network Link Configuration page appears.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Resetting the DHCP Lease on a Link
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 19
3
STEP 3 Select one of the following:
• Obtain IP Address Automatically: Use a DHCP server to retrieve the IP
address, netmask, and gateway address for the interface.
• Use the Following IP Address: Enter the IP configuration details manually,
in dotted-quad notation.
STEP 4 Click Update.
Resetting the DHCP Lease on a Link
You can force a renewal of the DHCP lease on a physical link or VLAN that is
configured for DHCP:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network IP.
The Network IP page appears listing each physical and virtual interface.
STEP 2 Click Edit on the row of the link IP that you want to reset.
The Network Link Configuration page appears.
STEP 3 Click Update.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Viewing VLANs Configured on the NSS
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 20
3
Viewing VLANs Configured on the NSS
When you first display the Network VLAN page, the currently configured VLANs
appear. Configuring a VLAN to connect to the NSS depends if it is trunk-based or
port-based. To configure a trunk-based VLAN, follow the steps provided next. To
configure a port-based VLAN, configure the switch to assign the port to which the
NSS is connected to the desired VLAN. In this case, no NSS configuration changes
are required.
To view the VLANs currently configured on the NSS:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network VLAN.
The VLAN Configuration page appears.
STEP 2 View the following details for each existing VLAN that appears in the VLAN
Configuration table:
• Link: The link on which the VLAN is configured. The status appears as “1+2.”
• VLAN: The ID of the VLAN. This is configured when the VLAN is added to
the NSS and should match the ID of the VLAN as it is configured in your
network. The range of valid VLAN IDs is from 0 to 4095.
• Priority: The quality of service (QoS) as defined in the IEEE 802.1p standard
for the VLAN traffic. VLAN Ethernet frames contain a three-bit priority tag
ranging from 0 to 7 (where 0 is best effort and 7 is network-critical traffic).
Adding the NSS to your Network
Allowing a VLAN Access to the NSS
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 21
3
• Label: A text description for the VLAN (for example, “Data,” “Voice,” “Video,”
and so on). This description is used solely as a reference within the NSS
interface and does not affect
its operation.
Allowing a VLAN Access to the NSS
To set up a network VLAN to access the NSS:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network VLAN.
The VLAN Configuration page appears.
STEP 2 In the New VLAN area of the page, set up the following fields:
• Link: Select the Ethernet link on which you want the VLAN to connect to the
NSS. Available options depend on the configuration of your Ethernet link(s).
• VLAN: Enter the ID of the VLAN as it is defined within your network. The
range of valid VLAN IDs is from 0 to 4095.
• Priority: Select the QoS priority for the VLAN traffic as it is defined for your
network. Valid options range from 0 to 7 (as defined by the IEEE 802.1p
standard). VLAN Ethernet frames contain a three-bit priority tag ranging
from 0 to 7 (where 0 is best effort and 7 is network-critical traffic).
Adding the NSS to your Network
Allowing a VLAN Access to the NSS
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 22
3
• Label: Enter a text description for the VLAN (for example, “Data”, “Voice”,
“Video”, etc.). It can be made up of alphanumeric characters. Note that this
description is used solely as a reference within the NSS interface and does
not affect its operation.
STEP 3 Click Add.
The newly added VLAN appears in the VLAN Configuration table. A message
appears to advise that the VLAN does not take effect until you configure the IP
address.
STEP 4 Click OK.
The Network Device Settings page appears. The newly added VLAN
appears in the list.
STEP 5 Click Edit for the VLAN you need to configure.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Changing a VLAN Configuration
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 23
3
The Network Configuration page appears.
STEP 6 Click one of the following, depending on how you want to assign the VLAN IP
addressing:
• Obtain IP Address Automatically: Use a DHCP server to retrieve the IP
address, netmask address, and gateway address for the VLAN.
• Use the Following IP address: Enter the IP configuration details manually.
STEP 7 Click Update.
Changing a VLAN Configuration
After you set up a VLAN to access the NSS, you can change the VLAN
configuration.
To edit a VLAN configuration:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network VLAN.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Changing a VLAN Configuration
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 24
3
The VLAN Configuration page appears.
STEP 2 Click Edit for the VLAN you want to change.
The Edit VLAN page appears.
STEP 3 Make changes to any of the VLAN configuration fields as required.
STEP 4 Click Update.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Removing a VLAN’s Access to the NSS
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 25
3
Removing a VLAN’s Access to the NSS
All connected VLANs appear when you first display the VLAN Configuration page.
You can delete the connection between a VLAN and the NSS. Note that deleting
the VLAN only affects the VLAN’s ability to access the NSS. It does not impact the
VLANs operation within your network.
To disconnect a VLAN’s access to the NSS:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network VLAN.
The VLAN Configuration page appears.
STEP 2 From the VLAN Configuration table, click Delete for the VLAN that you want
to remove.
The VLAN disappears from the VLAN Configuration table and can no longer
access the NSS.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Configuring the NSS Network Identification
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 26
3
Configuring the NSS Network Identification
The Network Identification page is where you configure the network identity of
the NSS, including the hostname and domain membership.
Before you join the NSS to an NTv4 or Active Directory Service (ADS) domain, do
the following:
• Configure the IP and DNS information.
From the Manager Menu, click Network DNS/WINS to configure the
DNS sever information. See “Configuring DNS or WINS for Name
Resolution,” on page 28.
• Configure the NTP Server to synchronize with the ADS server. See
“Configuring the Timing Settings,” on page140.T
• Set up the Home Directory Location on the User/Group Settings page.
This is used for both domain users and local users. See “Configuring the
User/Group Settings,” on page 99.
From the Manager Menu, click Access Time.
To configure the NSS network identity:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network Identification.
The Network Identification page appears.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Configuring the NSS Network Identification
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 27
3
STEP 2 In the Hostname field, enter the name you want to use for the NSS. Note any
special naming restrictions or conventions enforced by the domain(s) into which
the NSS is being joined.
!
CAUTION If you change the hostname, any current CIFS connections to shares on the NSS are
disconnected.
STEP 3 To assign the hostname for the NSS using the DHCP server, select Assign
automatically via DHCP. If the DHCP server is not available or if it is not configured
to supply a hostname, the NSS hostname is assigned using the information
entered in the Hostname field.
STEP 4 In the Description field, enter the textual description for the NSS as you want it to
appear in the file manager window for your users.
STEP 5 Select the type of network into which you are making the NSS a member from the
following options:
• Workgroup: Make the NSS part of a peer-to-peer network.
• NTv4 Domain: Make the NSS a part of a pre-Windows 2000 domain. If you
select this option, set up the following fields:
- NTv4 Domain: Enter the domain name.
- Domain Controller: Enter the hostname or IP address of the domain
controller.
- Username: Enter the username of an account that has administrator
privileges for this domain. Note: The username cannot contain the “%”
character.
- Password: Enter the password for the administrator account.
- Enable Support for Large ADS Domains: Check this option to connect
the NSS to an ADS domain that has more than 1000 users and groups.
(This is the sum of the individual users and individual groups.)
It can take up from 2 to 5 minutes to complete the domain join for large ADS
domains. When the NSS initially joins the domain, there might be a delay of
several minutes until the domain users and groups appear in the graphical
user interface (GUI). This delay only occurs after a successful join. Any
changes that you make to the users and groups on the domain controller
(additions or deletions) can take up to 20 minutes to appear in the GUI
Adding the NSS to your Network
Configuring DNS or WINS for Name Resolution
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 28
3
NOTE The NSS supports ADS domains of up to 8,000 users for the NSS4000 and 16,000
users for the NSS6000. If you need to connect the NSS to a domain larger than this,
you might have problems making CIFS connections to the NSS.
- System Volume Location: If you checked the Enable Support for Large
ADS Domains field, you must then select the RAID array on which to
store the system cache files associated with the ADS domain join. The
RAID array that you choose must have at least 512 MB of available
space. If you delete the RAID array on which the system volume is
located, leave the domain by switching to workgroup mode, and then
delete the RAID array.
STEP 6 Click Update.
If you configured the NSS to join a domain, when you click Update, the domain join
occurs. The NSS configuration interface displays the status of the domain join
(successful or not successful).
NOTE If you are joined to a domain and make changes to the fields on this page, make sure
that you re-enter the domain password as the NSS automatically rejoins the domain
when you click Update.
Configuring DNS or WINS for Name Resolution
Within a network, DNS and WINS are used to translate hostnames into IP
addresses. For example, the hostname “myserver” might translate to 172.1.135.6.
Configuring how the NSS works with name resolution depends on what type of
servers exist within your network. To configure the DNS or WINS server addresses
for your network:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network DNS/WINS.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Configuring DNS or WINS for Name Resolution
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 29
3
The Network Name Resolution page appears.
STEP 2 Based on your network setup, configure the following fields:
• Search Domain: Enter the address of the DNS search domain accessible
by the NSS. If you are joined to a domain, enter the controller name into this
field.
• Primary DNS Server: Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server on
your network. If you are joined to a domain, enter the IP address into this
field.
• Alternate DNS Server: Enter the IP address of a second DNS server to be
used should the primary DNS server become unavailable. This field
is optional.
• Assign automatically via DHCP: Select this to assign the IP address for the
DNS server using the DHCP server. If the DHCP server cannot be found or
times out, the DNS server IP address is assigned the IP address manually
entered in the Primary or Alternate DNS Server fields.
• Primary WINS server: If your network has a WINS server, enter its address.
This field is optional.
• Alternate WINS server: If your network has a secondary WINS server,
enter its address. This field is optional.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Joining the NSS to a Network Information System (NIS) Domain
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 30
3
• Assign automatically via DHCP: Select this to assign the IP address for the
WINS server using the DHCP server. If the DHCP server cannot be found or
times out, the DNS server IP address is assigned the IP address manually
entered in the Primary or Alternate WINS Server fields.
STEP 3 Click Update.
Joining the NSS to a Network Information System (NIS)
Domain
To join the NSS to a NIS domain, you need to configure and enable it.
NOTE Before you join a NIS domain, make sure that you set up or make changes to the NIS
domain users and groups ID range on the User/Groups Settings page. This
minimizes the risk of collisions of user or group IDs within your network.
To configure the NSS for NIS:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network NIS.
The NIS Configuration page appears.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Joining the NSS to a Network Information System (NIS) Domain
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 31
3
STEP 2 Select Enable NIS.
STEP 3 Enter the NIS domain name in the NIS Domain Name field.
STEP 4 Set the bind state by clicking one of the following:
• Broadcast for NIS Server: Click this option to have the NSS search until it
finds the NIS server on the network.
• Use the following NIS Servers: To manually identify the NIS server you
want the NSS to use, click this option, and then enter the address of up to
three different NIS servers.
The Bind State field shows the current bind status of the NSS.
STEP 5 Click Update.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Editing Access Control Lists (ACLs) from Windows Explorer: Restrictions
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 32
3
Editing Access Control Lists (ACLs) from Windows Explorer:
Restrictions
Access Control Lists (ACLs) are used to set user and group access privileges for
specific files and folders stored on the NSS. When editing ACLs through Windows
Explorer these restrictions apply
• Group versus User ACLs: You can only set up an ACL for individual users.
You cannot set up a group ACL.
• NIS domain: You cannot create or edit ACLs for NIS domain users; they do
not appear in the Security tab in Windows Explorer.
Running Diagnostics of your Physical Links
The NSS lets you test the physical network cables attached to Ethernet links 1 and
2 for certain fault conditions. You must manually initiate a test to update the results
shown on the Network Diagnostics page.
NOTE When you initiate a test on an Ethernet link, you take down the link for the duration
of the test. Any current user connections on the link are dropped. If you have two
links installed, any connections through the untested link remain unaffected.
To test the physical link:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network Diagnostics.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Configuring the Network Ports
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 33
3
The Network Diagnostics page appears.
STEP 2 Click Test for the cable you want to test.
After the test completes, the test results appear in the Link Status area. The test
results also appear on the System Status page. If the cable is in good working
condition, the link is again accessible to your users.
Configuring the Network Ports
By default the NSS runs network services on their well known (IETF defined) port
numbers. You can change the port on which any particular service runs. When you
disable WAN access for a given service, only hosts on the same subnet as the
NSS may connect to that service. This is a shortcut to manually defining an
equivalent network filter.
To set up the network services:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network Ports.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Configuring the Network Ports
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 34
3
The Network Ports Configuration page appears.
STEP 2 Change the port assignment for any of the following service types:
• FTP/FTPS Port: The well-known port setting is 21. Select Disable WAN
Access to disallow FTP and FTPS protocol access to the NSS from a WAN.
• Web Server Port: The well-known port setting is 80. To access the NSS
configuration interface, you must have either the HTTP port or HTTPS port
enabled. Select Disable WAN Access to disallow HTTP protocol access to
the NSS from a WAN.
• SSL Web Server Port: The well-known port setting is 443. Select Disable
WAN Access to disallow HTTPS protocol access to the NSS from a WAN.
STEP 3 Click Update.
Adding the NSS to your Network
Setting up the Link Bonding & Advertising Modes
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 35
3
Setting up the Link Bonding & Advertising Modes
The Network Properties page is where you configure the bonding mode for the
physical Ethernet link(s) attached to the NSS. It also lets you determine how you
want to advertise the presence of the NSS within your network.
To configure the network properties:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network Properties.
The Network Properties page appears.
STEP 2 To set the bonding mode of your physical links, click one of the following:
• 802.3ad Link Aggregation (failover and load sharing): Select this option
to aggregate the two Ethernet connections using the IEEE 802.3ad standard.
This technology is also known as trunking or bonding.
• Active backup (failover): This is the default option when you first install the
NSS or when you restore the factory default settings by resetting the NSS.
Select this option to define one link as the active link and one link as the
backup. Should the active link become unusable (either disconnected or
significantly degraded), the backup link automatically becomes the
active link.
STEP 3 Set the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU), in bytes, in the MTU field. This is the
largest Ethernet frame that your network can handle. The default MTU size is 1500
bytes. MTU sizes greater than 1500 bytes are considered “jumbo frames.”
Adding the NSS to your Network
Setting up the Link Bonding & Advertising Modes
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 36
3
STEP 4 To assign the link MTU size automatically using the DHCP server, click Assign
automatically via DHCP. In this case, the value entered in the MTU field is used as
a backup if the DHCP server does not provide an MTU value or if the server cannot
be reached.
STEP 5 Based on your network requirements, enable any of the following:
• Advertise using UPnP: The NSS is advertised within the network
using UPnP.
• Advertise using Zeroconf/Bonjour: The NSS is advertised within the
network using Zeroconf/Bonjour.
STEP 6 Click Update.
4
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 37
Configuring your Storage
The Storage Status page shows the current state of the disk drives, arrays, and
volumes currently installed or exported to the NSS. You can also view the
S.M.A.R.T. health report for each physical disk. To display the Storage Status
page, from the Manager Menu, click Storage Status. The Storage Status page
automatically refreshes on a regular interval and is helpful for monitoring the
progress of certain processes such as checking the condition of a drive.
Configuring your Storage
Disk Status Table
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 38
4
Disk Status Table
The Disk Status table lists each of the physical disks installed in the NSS. The
table has these columns:
• Port: The port number on the NSS in which the disk is installed.
• Model: The model of the disk drive. This information is read from the disk
drive.
• Capacity: The size of the disk drive.
• Health: The system monitors each disk drive and reports the condition of
the disk drive.
- Passed: The disk drive passed the S.M.A.R.T. test and is considered fully
operational. The Error LED on the disk drive is off.
- Failing: The disk drive failed the S.M.A.R.T. test and is predicated to fail.
The red Error LED on the disk drive is blinking.
- Failed: The disk drive is not operational (has failed). The red Error LED on
the disk drive is on solid.
• Status: The state of use for the disk drive.
- Online: The disk drive is spun up.
- Standby: The disk drive is idle and is spun down.
- Offline: The disk drive is failed.
• Action: There are available action buttons associated with each installed
disk drive:
- Get Details: View the current, detailed S.M.A.R.T. report for the disk
drive.
- Locate: Send a locate request to the applicable disk drive. The white
disk drive LED on the front of the NSS chassis blinks for the targeted disk
drive.You can only send one locate request at a time. Disk drives are
numbered from 1 to 4 from left to right on the chassis (when facing the
chassis front panel) and correspond with the port number.
- Cancel Locate: There is a locate request set up for a disk drive. Click
Cancel Locate to cancel the locate request. This lets you send a locate
request for another disk drive.
Configuring your Storage
RAID Arrays Table
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 39
4
RAID Arrays Table
The RAID Arrays table lists each array (either RAID or JBOD) currently configured.
The table includes the following:
• Label: The name assigned to the array.
• RAID Level: The configured RAID level.
• Size: The size allocated for the array. The amount of available storage for an
array depends on the number of drives in the array, the size of the smallest
drive, as well as the RAID level assigned. The calculation for an array,
according to RAID level, is as follows (where “n” = the number of drives in
the array and “s” = the size of the smallest drive in the array):
- JBOD = sum (size of each drive)
- RAID0 = n * s
- RAID1 = s
- RAID5 = (n-1) * s
- RAID10 = n * s /2
• Status: The current condition of the RAID array.
- Clean: The array is in a normal state. This status is color-coded green.
- Degraded: For RAID arrays with redundancy (i.e., RAID levels 1, 5, 10),
one or more of the redundant disk drives is removed from the system or
is failed. In this state, the array is fully recoverable. This status is color-
coded orange.
- Failed: One or more disk drives were removed or are unrecoverable
from a RAID0 or a JBOD array. For RAID levels 1, 5, 10, it indicates a loss
of all the redundant disks in the array plus at least one more drive. In this
state, the array is unrecoverable.
- Rebuilding: A RAID level with redundancy is being rebuilt. Note that
during a rebuild, the RAID array is still fully usable. This status is color-
coded orange. During the rebuild, the disk drive LED slowly blinks green.
- Stopped: A RAID array has been stopped by the system (through
degraded mode management) due to it being in degraded mode for the
amount of time configured in the Storage Options page. Volumes
associated with a stopped array are unmounted and unusable. To start
the RAID array, click the Start button.
Configuring your Storage
Volumes Table
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 40
4
Volumes Table
The Volumes table provides a list of the existing volumes. The table is made up of
the following:
• Location: The name of the RAID array on which the volume is configured.
• Volume: The name assigned to the volume.
• Total Space: The amount of space configured for the volume.
• Used Space: The amount of space used on the volume.
• Avail. Space: The amount of unused space on the volume.
• % Used: The percentage of available space that is used.
• Encrypted: Whether the volume is encrypted or unencrypted.
• Locked: The encrypted volume is locked and is not accessible. To make the
volume accessible, the volume must be unlocked.
USB Storage Status
If you mount a USB flash device by inserting it into the AUX-1 port on the front of
the chassis, the USB Storage Status table appears. If there is no USB flash device
mounted, the USB Storage Status table does not appear. You can use the USB
flash device to save a backup of the configuration file (see ”Saving the Current
Configuration” section on page134). When you finish using the USB flash device,
click Unmount before you remove it from the AUX-1 port. (The AUX-1 LED on the
front of the chassis must be off before you can safely remove the USB flash
device.) If you remove the USB flash device in a mounted state, you risk corrupting
the files or filesystem.
The USB Storage Status table provides these details about the mounted USB
flash device:
• Disk: The type of disk in this case is the USB flash.
• Total Space: The total amount of space (both used and available) on the
USB flash device.
• Used Space: The amount of space taken up on the USB flash device.
• Available Space: The amount of unused space on the USB flash device.
Configuring your Storage
Managing RAID Arrays
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 41
4
• %Used: The percentage of space used on the USB flash device.
• Action: The Unmount button unmounts the USB flash device so that it can
be safely removed from the AUX-1 port.
Managing RAID Arrays
RAID is an acronym for Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks. In storage
environments, a RAID array uses multiple physical disk drives to create a single
logical unit from which data can be shared or replicated between the drives. A
RAID array also simplifies the data management as the data appears in one logical
unit. Choosing to store your data using a RAID array gives you the benefit of speed
and performance; storage capacity; decreased downtime costs and increased
availability; fault tolerance; and higher data security.
About the RAID Arrays Page
Use the RAID Arrays page to manage the local RAID and JBOD arrays. To display
the RAID Arrays page, from the Manager Menu, click Storage RAID.
Configuring your Storage
Choosing a RAID Array Level
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 42
4
Choosing a RAID Array Level
RAID (Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks) is a technology that enables multiple
low-cost hard drives to be used together in a way that increases performance
and/or reliability compared to that of a single drive. The component devices in a
RAID array appear as a single logical storage device. There are various types of
RAID, referred to as RAID levels. Some RAID levels increase the performance of
the array, some increase the reliability, and others do a mixture of both. The NSS
supports the following RAID levels: 0, 1, 5 and 10. The NSS also supports JBOD
(Just a Bunch of Disks), which is not technically a RAID level.
These variables are used in formulas used to calculate the total capacity of each
RAID level:
• m – capacity of the smallest disk in the array
• n – number of disks in the array
RAID0: RAID0 stripes the data written to the array across the component disks.
The data is broken into chunks and each chunk is written to a different disk. Reads
and writes to each disk occur in parallel, speeding up the total read and write
performance of the array.
• Minimum Number of Disks: 2
• Total capacity: m x n
• Advantages: Increased read and write performance.
• Disadvantages: Decreased reliability. A failure of any component disk in the
array causes the entire array to fail.
RAID1: RAID1 writes the same data to each disk in the array. The disks are referred
to as “mirrors” because each one mirrors the data stored on the others. As long as
one disk in the array is intact, all data can be read back from the array. If a disk fails
in the array and is then replaced, the array must copy the entire contents of a good
disk to the new disk. This process is referred to as “resyncing.” During a resync,
the array continues to be available for reads and writes. When an array contains a
failed disk, it is said to be operating in degraded mode. This reflects the
decreased performance and reliability of the array when it is missing disks.
• Minimum Number of Disks: 2
• Total capacity: m
• Advantages: Increased reliability. The array can sustain the loss of all but
one disk without any data loss. Each mirror disk added to the array
Configuring your Storage
Choosing a RAID Array Level
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 43
4
increases the reliability (for example, a two-disk RAID1 is half as likely to fail,
a three-disk RAID1 is one-third as likely to fail, and so on). Increased read
performance.
• Disadvantages: Decreased aggregate storage capacity (each mirror disk
does not contribute to the total capacity of the array). Decreased write
performance. I/O intensive when resyncing mirrors.
RAID5: RAID5 stripes data written to the array like RAID0, except that, unlike
RAID0, RAID5 generates parity information that also gets striped across the array.
This parity information is used during the reconstruction of the lost data when a
drive fails in the array. When a failed disk is then replaced, the array must
regenerate and rewrite the parity information of the array. This process is referred
to as “rebuilding”. During a rebuild, the array continues to be available for reads
and writes. If the parity information in the array gets out of sync with the data in the
array, usually as the result of an unexpected loss of power to the system, the array
must be rebuilt. Like RAID1, if a disk is missing from the array, the array is said to be
operating in “degraded” mode.
• Minimum Number of Disks: 3
• Total capacity: m x (n-1)
• Advantages: Increased reliability. The RAID array can sustain the loss of any
single disk without any data loss. Increased read and write performance.
• Disadvantages: Decreased aggregate storage capacity (you lose the
equivalent capacity of a single disk). CPU intensive calculation of parity,
especially during rebuild operation. I/O intensive during rebuild operation.
RAID10: RAID10 is a combination of RAID1 and RAID0. The NSS implements
RAID10 as two, 2-disk RAID1 mirrors, which are then used to build a RAID0 array.
RAID10 can be thought of as “mirror then stripe”.
• Minimum Number of Disks: 4
• Total capacity: 2 x m
• Advantages: Increased read and write performance; increased reliability.
The RAID array can sustain the loss of any single disk without data loss.
Depending on which disks fail, the array can lose up to two disks without
data loss.
• Disadvantages: Decreased aggregate storage capacity (you lose half of
the storage space).
Configuring your Storage
Creating a RAID Array
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 44
4
JBOD: JBOD lets you combine multiple disks of mixed capacities into a single
logical storage device. The capacity of the JBOD array is the sum of the total
capacities of the individual component disks (that is, it does not have the limitation
of RAID0 where you lose some capacity when using mixed sized disks). JBOD
offers no performance increase compared to the component disks. It has lower
reliability than the component disks, as the failure of a single disk results, in
general, in the failure of the whole array. Depending on how you create volumes on
the JBOD array, you may be able to recover data when one or more disks in the
JBOD fail. This, however, is not guaranteed.
• Minimum Number of Disks: 1
• Total capacity: sum of capacities of component disks.
• Advantages: Maximal storage capacity, especially when using mixed size
disks.
• Disadvantages: Decreased reliability.
Creating a RAID Array
To create an array:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Storage RAID.
The RAID page appears:
Configuring your Storage
Adding a Disk Drive to an Array
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 45
4
STEP 2 The available disks appear in the New RAID Device table. Select each disk that
you want to include in the array.
STEP 3 From the RAID Level drop-down menu, click the RAID level of the RAID array you
want to create.
STEP 4 Click Add.
STEP 5 The RAID creation can take some time to complete (depending on the size of the
disks and the selected RAID level). You can monitor the progress of the RAID build
from the Storage Status page. When the build is finished, the array appears in the
RAID Arrays table. The disks used in the array are no longer available for creating
additional arrays.
Adding a Disk Drive to an Array
You can add additional disks to an existing RAID1 or RAID5. As long as the array is
clean, these disks then become spares.
Configuring your Storage
Adding a Disk Drive to an Array
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 46
4
NOTE When adding disks to an array, we recommend that you use the same model
of disk with the same capacity. The new disk must have at least the same
capacity of the smallest disk currently in the array. With the exception of a
JBOD, RAIDs are configured to use the maximum of the smallest disk
capacity in the array for each additional disk in the array. For example, if you
install two, 250 GB disks and one 500 GB disk, the total capacity is 750 GB.
To add a disk to an array:
STEP 1 If not already installed in the chassis, insert the disk in the NSS.
STEP 2 From the Manager Menu, click Storage RAID.
The RAID page appears.
STEP 3 In the RAID Arrays table, click Edit for the applicable RAID array.
Configuring your Storage
Deleting an Array
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 47
4
The RAID Configuration page appears.
STEP 4 Available disk drives appear in the listing. Click Add to add the disk drive to
the array.
If the disk drive is added to a functional array, the disk drive becomes a hot spare.
If the disk drive is added to a degraded array, the RAID array is rebuilt. While the
rebuild continues, the array can still be used. After the rebuild process completes,
the disk becomes part of the redundant storage. You can monitor the progress of
the rebuild through the System Status page.
Deleting an Array
You can remove an existing array and release the disks used in the array back into
available storage. Note that deleting an array also deletes any existing data on the
array (including the volumes, shares, and quotas). If you delete an array that you
must assign a new volume as the Home Directory location.
To delete an existing array:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Storage RAID.
Configuring your Storage
Migrating a RAID Array to another Storage Device
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 48
4
The RAID page appears.
STEP 2 Click Delete in the row of the RAID array that you want to delete.
A warning message appears.
STEP 3 To continue, click OK.
The deleted array disappears from the list of existing arrays. The disks used in
the array are released back into available storage and appear in the New RAID
Device table.
Migrating a RAID Array to another Storage Device
If you are migrating a RAID array from the NSS to another network NSS, make sure
that you coldplug the RAID array (instead of hotplugging it) into the new system by
following these steps:
STEP 1 Power down the NSS (from which you are removing the RAID array).
STEP 2 Remove each of the disk drives that make up the RAID array to be moved.
STEP 3 Power down the NSS to which you are migrating the RAID array.
STEP 4 Insert each of the disk drives in the RAID array into the new NSS.
Configuring your Storage
Virtualizing Storage within your Network
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 49
4
NOTE You can install the drives into the new NSS in any order. You do not need to install
them in the same order or slots that they were installed in the original NSS.
STEP 5 When all the disk drives are installed, power up the NSS.
Virtualizing Storage within your Network
The NSS virtualization feature lets you create storage physically located on other
network NSS units into one logical storage unit. The recommended network
configuration for using virtualization is to use an NSS6000 series to operate as the
“master” storage device (the “slave” devices can either be NSS6000, NSS4000,
NSS3000, or NSS2000 series devices). This configuration setup means that you
can export storage (must be an unused disk drive or configured array) from a slave
NSS and then import the storage into the master NSS. The supported RAID level
for virtualized storage is JBOD (although the JBOD can consist of concatenated
exported arrays).
NOTE After you configure a virtual RAID, you cannot migrate the disks used for that RAID
to another NSS. You also cannot export storage from a device that uses
imported storage.
Configuring your Storage
Exporting Storage to your Network
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 50
4
Exporting Storage to your Network
To export storage to the network:
STEP 1 Log into the configuration interface for the device from which you are exporting
storage.
STEP 2 From the Manager Menu, click Storage Virtualization.
The Storage Virtualization page appears.
STEP 3 From the Export a device area, select each device that you want to export from
the list of available devices.
STEP 4 From the Link field, select the physical link that you want to use to export
the storage.
STEP 5 Click Export.
STEP 6 The selected disk(s) disappear from the available list of arrays and appear in the
Currently Exported Storage table at the top of the page. Follow the steps to create
a JBOD from virtualized storage to use the exported storage. (see Creating
Virtualized Storage, page 51)
Configuring your Storage
Creating Virtualized Storage
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 51
4
Creating Virtualized Storage
To create a JBOD with exported disks:
STEP 1 Log in to the configuration interface from the master unit.
STEP 2 From the Manager Menu, click Storage RAID.
The RAID page appears.
Exported disks from other NSS units in the network appear in the table.
STEP 3 From the New RAID Device table, click the disks or arrays that you want to include
in the JBOD.
STEP 4 Select JBOD as the RAID level.
STEP 5 Click Add.
The JBOD appears in the RAID Arrays listing. You can now create volumes
from the virtualized JBOD.
Configuring your Storage
Unexporting Storage
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 52
4
Unexporting Storage
You can choose to unexport pieces of the storage currently exported to the
network. Note that you can only unexport storage that has not yet been used.
To unexport a piece of storage:
STEP 1 From the Master device, delete any RAID arrays associated with the storage you
want to unexport. (see Deleting an Array, page 47)
STEP 2 Display the Configuration Interface for the slave device that contains the storage
you want to unexport.
STEP 3 From the Manager Menu, click Storage Virtualization.
The Storage Virtualization page appears.
STEP 4 Click Unexport for the device you want to release from the network.
The disk drive(s) or array no longer appears in the Currently Exported Storage
list. It now appears in the Export a device list and is again available for use.
Configuring your Storage
Volume Management
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 53
4
Volume Management
A volume is a way to partition storage space available on an array. The Storage
Volumes page shows the following details about configured volumes or create
additional volumes.
The Volumes table displays the following:
• Volume: The name of the volume.
• Location: The array on which the volume is located.
• Total Space: The amount of space allocated for the volume (in MB or GB).
• % Used: The amount of space, as a percentage, that is currently used.
• Crypto: Whether the volume is encrypted or not. Note that file transfer
performance to encrypted volumes is generally lower than to non-
encrypted volumes.
• Action: Click Edit to make changes to the current volume. Click Delete to
remove the volume (and any saved data on the volume) from the array. If the
volume is encrypted, you can either click Unlock to unlock it and make it
usable, or click Lock to manually lock it.
Configuring your Storage
Creating a Volume
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 54
4
Creating a Volume
After you define at least one RAID array, you can create a volume. You need to
create at least one volume before you can create users, groups, or shares.
To create a volume:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Storage Volumes.
The Storage Volumes page appears.
STEP 2 From the New Volume area, set up these fields:
• Array: Click the drop-down menu to select the array on which you want to
create the volume.
• Name: Enter the name you want to give the volume. The volume name must
consist of at least one alphanumeric character, must begin with a letter, but
cannot contain any spaces.
• Size (in MB): Enter the size for the volume, and then select the unit from the
drop-down menu. The final size of the shared volume is less than the size
you enter in this field due to filesystem overhead. The minimum volume size
is 32 MB. Volume sizes are rounded down to the nearest 32 MB increment.
Configuring your Storage
Expanding a Volume
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 55
4
NOTE Once the volume is created, you can expand the volume but you cannot reduce
its size.
STEP 3 To encrypt the volume, select Encrypted. To create an unencrypted volume, go to
Step 6.
NOTE You can encrypt the volume only when the volume is first created. After a volume is
created, you cannot change whether it is encrypted or unencrypted. File transfer
performance to encrypted volumes is generally lower than to non-encrypted
volumes.
STEP 4 Enter a password in the Password field using a minimum of eight alphanumeric
characters. The password must consist of at least three of the following: lower-
case character, upper-case character, number (0-9), or a special character (such as
#@*&^). The password must be entered to unlock an encrypted volume when the
NSS is started up following a power interruption, shutdown, or rebooted, or, if the
volume was manually locked through the NSS configuration interface.
!
CAUTION Because you need the password to decrypt a locked volume, keep a secure
backup of the password to ensure that it is accessible when required. There is no
way to unlock the volume without the password. If you forget the password, the
only way to retrieve is if the password was saved in a configuration file. See
Restoring a Configuration File, page 137.
STEP 5 Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field.
STEP 6 Click Add.
Expanding a Volume
After a volume is created, you can increase its size, provided there is available
space on the array. Note: You cannot grow a volume if it is the target of a snapshot.
If you want to grow such a volume, delete the snapshots first and then expand the
volume.
Configuring your Storage
Expanding a Volume
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 56
4
To increase the size of a volume:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Storage Volumes.
The Volumes page appears.
STEP 2 Click Edit for the volume you want to expand.
Configuring your Storage
Expanding a Volume
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 57
4
The Grow File System page appears for the selected volume.
STEP 3 In the Resize by field, select one of the following:
• Grow By: Select this option to add the space allocated in the Size field to
the existing space for the volume. For example, if the volume currently has
224 MB of space and you want to add another 224 MB, select Grow By,
then enter 224 in the Size field and set the unit field to MB. The system
rounds up the total space to the nearest 32 MB boundary.
• Resulting Size: Select this option to resize the volume to the space entered
in the Size field. For example, if the volume currently has 224 MB of space
and you want it to have 928 MB, select Resulting Size and then enter 928 in
the Size field. The system rounds up the total space to the nearest 32 MB
boundary.
STEP 4 Depending on your choice in the previous step, enter the new number in the Size
field and then select the unit from the drop-down menu. If you selected Grow By,
the new number is added to the existing volume size. If you selected Resulting
Size, the new number becomes the total size for the volume.
STEP 5 Click OK.
Configuring your Storage
Deleting a Volume
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 58
4
Deleting a Volume
You can choose to delete a volume at any time.
!
CAUTION Deleting the volume removes any shares or data currently saved to that volume. If
the volume was assigned as the users’ Home Directory Location, you must
reassign the Home Directory Location to another volume
To delete a volume:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Storage Volumes.
The Storage Volumes page appears.
STEP 2 From the Volumes area, click Delete for the volume you want to delete.
Configuring your Storage
Viewing the Snapshot Reserve Details
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 59
4
Viewing the Snapshot Reserve Details
You can configure the NSS6000 series NAS to take snapshots of the data on an
existing volume. When you create a snapshot, a backup of each of the shares on
the volume is created and is available within the system’s file directory to which
end users of those shares have access. The advantage of a snapshot over a
backup is that a snapshot is user-accessible and can be used for quick file
recovery resulting from end-user error (such as an accidentally deleted file). A
backup is only accessible to the administrator through the NSS configuration
interface. Restoring data from a backup is generally a task that is scheduled with
the IT administration staff. Backups are usually used to restore the system from a
major system failure.
Snapshots can be taken at various time intervals (such as hourly, daily, and so on).
Each time a snapshot is taken, the previous snapshot is overwritten. You can also
configure multiple snapshot sequences for the same volume. This is typically done
to have snapshots occur at different time intervals. For example, you might want to
capture a snapshot sequence for each hour, a separate sequence for weekly
snapshots, and one for bi-weekly snapshots. In this case, the volume has three
separate snapshot sequences. Each snapshot is overwritten when the next
snapshot of the same frequency is taken. To ensure data integrity, during the
creation of the snapshot (the duration is approximately a few seconds), no writes
can occur to the share.
The snapshot reserve is the amount of space that you want to allocate to the
snapshot on the associated array. Once set, this space is not available for other
storage use. The recommended amount of a reserve is generally between 10 to
20% of the total volume size. Note that if the period of time between snapshots is
greater, the amount of the reserve should be greater. Or, if there is a heavy amount
of activity on the volume, set a higher reserve. This is due to the snapshot reserve
being used to store the changes to the volume contents since the last time the
snapshot was taken.
NOTE This feature is only available on the NSS6000. You cannot grow a volume if it is the
target of a snapshot. If you want to grow such a volume, delete the snapshots first
and then expand the volume.
Configuring your Storage
Viewing the Snapshot Reserve Details
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 60
4
Maintaining Active Snapshots
You can view the list of configured snapshots by displaying the Storage
Snapshots page. The Currently Active Snapshots area lists each snapshot set
up for all the volumes on your NSS6000,
These column headings provide details about the snapshot:
• Volume: The name of the volume for which the snapshot is set up.
• Frequency: The time interval of the snapshot. If the time interval is set up to
occur at a certain time of the week, day, or hour, it is also listed. For example,
daily @ 10:30 means that the snapshot occurs each day at 10:30 a.m.
• Size: The size of the snapshot reserve.
• Current Usage: The percent of the space allocated for the snapshot
currently taken up by the snapshot.
Configuring your Storage
Creating a Snapshot for a Volume
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 61
4
Creating a Snapshot for a Volume
As part of your backup strategy, you can configure the NSS6000 to capture
snapshots of the data stored on a volume. You can define a snapshot to occur at
various frequencies (such as hourly, daily, weekly, and so on). Individual snapshots
are overwritten by the subsequent snapshot for the same interval. For example, if
you set up an hourly snapshot, the 10:00 a.m. snapshot is replaced by the 11:00
a.m. snapshot (and so on).
You can also configure multiple snapshots for the same volume. For example, you
might set up an hourly snapshot, another snapshot to occur every four hours, and a
daily snapshot. Each of these three snapshots is maintained separately and is only
overwritten by the subsequent snapshot of its own frequency type. The
snapshot(s) reside in the reserve area allocated for each snapshot. When you
create a snapshot, the end user can access it by logging into the NSS with their
username and password. Each snapshot appears as a copy of the share
accessible by the end user.
The snapshot reserve is the amount of space that you want to allocate on the array
to the snapshot. Once set, this space is not available for other storage use. The
recommended amount of a reserve is generally between 10 to 20% of the total
volume size. If the period of time between snapshots is greater, the amount of the
reserve should be greater. Or, if there is a heavy amount of activity on the volume,
set a higher reserve.
NOTE This feature is only available on NSS6000 series NAS units.
To create a snapshot for a volume:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Storage Snapshots.
Configuring your Storage
Creating a Snapshot for a Volume
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 62
4
The Storage Snapshots page appears.
STEP 2 From the New Snapshot table, click the volume for which you are creating the
snapshot.
STEP 3 Depending on the frequency, use the first part of the Every field to enter a unit of
time. Tab to the second part of the Every field, and then click the snapshot
frequency (hours or days). For example, set the first part of the field to “7,” and the
second part to “Days” to take a snapshot once every week.
STEP 4 Use the At: fields to set up the timing for the snapshot. For example, if the
frequency is set to Days, set the hour and minute of the day at which you want the
snapshot to be taken. When entering the hour, use the 24-hour clock. For example,
3 p.m. should be entered as 15:00. When the frequency is set to Hours, you can
only edit the minutes part of the At: field.
STEP 5 In the Reserve Size field, enter the amount of space that you want to allocate to
the snapshot. This space becomes unavailable for any other storage on the array.
You must enter a minimum of 32 MB in this field.
Configuring your Storage
Taking a Manual Snapshot of a Volume
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 63
4
NOTE The snapshot is built at the array level. The Volume column currently shows the
amount of space left on the array on which the volume is located. To calculate the
reserve size, refer to the applicable volume size listed on the Volume page.
STEP 6 Click Add to save the snapshot. Clicking Add saves the first snapshot. Each
subsequent snapshot occurs based on the defined schedule.
The snapshot details appear in the Currently Active Snapshots area at the top of
the page.
Taking a Manual Snapshot of a Volume
There might be times when you want to take a snapshot of a volume that falls
outside of the regularly scheduled snapshot times. When you take a snapshot of a
volume using the resnap function, the new snapshot overwrites the previously
existing one for the specified interval. For example, if you have a snapshot set up to
occur hourly and then click Resnap, a new snapshot is built that overwrites the
existing hourly snapshot.
NOTE This feature is only available on NSS6000 series NAS units.
To take a manual snapshot:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Storage Snapshots.
Configuring your Storage
Windows End Users: Accessing a Snapshot for a Share
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 64
4
The Storage Snapshots page appears.
STEP 2 Click Resnap next to the volume for which you want to take a snapshot.
The snapshot takes seconds to complete. To ensure data integrity, no writes can
occur to the share until the snapshot is complete.
Windows End Users: Accessing a Snapshot for a Share
After a snapshot is created for a volume, a file folder appears in the end user’s file
directory for each share to which the end user has access. Snapshots are saved
with the name of the share followed by an underscore and then the term “snap.”
Each file folder contains a subfolder for each snapshot interval (for example, hourly,
daily, and so on).
To access a snapshot for a share:
Configuring your Storage
Volume Encryption Overview
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 65
4
STEP 1 There are a variety of ways to access the NSS:
• From the My Computer window, type \\<hostname> or IP address in the
Address bar (where the <hostname> refers to your NSS hostname. For
example, \\NAS).
• Browse for the NSS from the My Network Places window.
• Map the NSS to a network drive.
The Log In window appears.
STEP 2 Enter your user name and password.
STEP 3 Click OK.
STEP 4 The Windows Explorer window opens with a directory listing of the folders for the
shares available on the user’s home directory
STEP 5 Snapshots are read-only. To work with a snapshot, locate it, take a copy of it, and
then place the copy in a working directory.
Volume Encryption Overview
The Volumes page lists both the encrypted and unencrypted volumes and lets
you create a volume, and lock, unlock, or change the password for
encrypted volumes.
NOTE File transfer performance to encrypted volumes is generally lower than non-
encrypted volumes.
Configuring your Storage
Locking an Encrypted Volume
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 66
4
Locking an Encrypted Volume
You can manually lock an encrypted volume at any time. Locking a volume means
that it becomes unmounted and is unusable (you cannot create or use shares
stored on the locked volume). This provides an extra layer of security against the
theft of data.
To lock a volume:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Storage Volumes.
Configuring your Storage
Unlocking a Locked Volume
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 67
4
The Volumes page appears.
The Crypto column displays whether the volume is encrypted (Yes) or not
encrypted (No).
STEP 2 Click Lock to lock the volume.
Unlocking a Locked Volume
When an encrypted volume is locked, either automatically as a result of the NSS
being rebooted or manually locked through the configuration interface, you must
unlock it before it can be used for tasks such as creating shares or quotas.
To unlock a volume:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Storage Volumes.
Configuring your Storage
Unlocking a Locked Volume
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 68
4
The Volumes page appears.
STEP 2 Click Unlock for the volume you want to unlock.
The Unlock Volume page appears.
STEP 3 Enter the password for the volume in the Password field.
STEP 4 Click OK.
The Volume Encryption page appears. The volume is now unlocked.
Configuring your Storage
Changing the Password for an Encrypted Volume
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 69
4
Changing the Password for an Encrypted Volume
A password must be set up when you create an encrypted volume (see “Creating
a Volume,” on page 54). After the volume is created, you can change the password
at any time. The password must be entered when the NSS is started up after a
power interruption, or, the volume has been manually locked.
!
CAUTION Because the password is required to de-crypt a locked volume, keep a backup of
the password so that you can access it when required. There is no way to unlock
the volume without the password. If you forget the password, the only way to
retrieve it is if the password was saved in a configuration file. See “Restoring a
Configuration File,” on page137.
To change the password on an existing encrypted volume:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Storage Volumes.
The Volumes page appears.
STEP 2 Click Edit for the volume you want to change.
Configuring your Storage
Storage Options
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 70
4
The Edit Volume page appears.
• In Current Password field, enter the password.
• In the New Password field, enter the new password.
• Re-enter the new password in the Confirm Password field.
• Click Update.
Storage Options
The Storage Options page lets you define the following:
• Idle Drive Spin Down: Configure the NSS to spin down the disk drives after
a predefined time of inactivity. Select the period of time that the disk drive
must be idle before it is spun down. (Select Never to ensure that the drives
are never spun down.)
• RAID Rebuild Priority: During normal operation, the CPU switches
between tasks to service all active tasks on the system. Creating a RAID
array or rebuilding an existing array can take up a significant amount of the
available percentage of CPU processing power. You can control how the
system prioritizes the rebuild and allocates the system’s resources based
on your system’s current workload and need for responsiveness. To set the
Configuring your Storage
Storage Options
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 71
4
RAID rebuild priority, choose one of the following from the RAID Rebuild
Priority field:
• High: The CPU focuses on the RAID rebuilding process. This setting allows
for the fastest possible RAID rebuild at the expense of other system tasks.
File-sharing throughput is adversely affected during a RAID rebuild when
this setting is chosen.
- Medium: This option gives a balance between the rebuild process and
other system tasks. The rebuild process takes longer than if it was set to
High.
- Low: The CPU focuses on other tasks versus the RAID rebuild process.
This results in a longer rebuild time on a busy system. However, if the
workload on the system is low, the CPU services the rebuild process
well. Note that if you are repairing an array, this option leaves the array
vulnerable until the rebuild is complete.
• Degraded Mode Grace Period: Set the period of time after which the
system automatically shuts down degraded arrays. You can manually
restart RAID arrays automatically stopped by using degraded mode
management. Warning messages are sent out periodically while the RAID
array is degraded.
• Enable Global Spares: Allow RAID arrays defined in the system to share
spare drives. If this option is disabled, a RAID array can only use a spare that
has been added to that particular array. If this option is enabled, spare
drives added to one RAID array may be reallocated by the NSS to another
RAID array.
For example, if RAID A is a two-drive RAID1 that is not degraded and RAID B
is a degraded two-drive RAID1, if you add a spare drive to RAID A, the NSS
automatically gives the spare drive to RAID B to enable RAID B to resync.
This option is only relevant when you use network disks (via storage
virtualization). A system limited to local disks lets you only build up to two,
two-disk RAID arrays, but have no spares.
Configuring your Storage
Storage Options
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 72
4
If you make changes to any of the storage options, click Update.
5
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 73
Setting up End-User Access
The Access Status page shows the current end-user connections to the NSS,
grouped by the file-sharing protocol used. The page displays the username, the
name of the host from which the user is currently connected, and the share or path
that the user is accessing. The Access Status page automatically refreshes on a
regular interval and is helpful for monitoring the progress of certain processes
such as the current end-user connections to the NSS.
Managing your NSS Users
You can create, view, and maintain the list of users who can access the NSS. The
Configured Users page displays the Configured Users table. This table lists
each defined user whether the user was created locally through the NSS
configuration interface or imported from an NTv4, Active Directory, or NIS domain.
Setting up End-User Access
Creating a User Profile
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 74
5
Users that are not created locally through the NSS are read-only. Once a user
profile is created, you cannot rename the username. To rename an existing user
profile, delete the user profile and then create a new one. User profiles are
maintained by the administrator. Users cannot make changes to their passwords.
To limit the entries in the User list, perform a substring search by entering the
desired search string in the User List Filter field, and then click Filter. (For
example, enter "ea" to display any list items that contain "ea" such as "Sean" or
"BillyJean".) To clear the filter, delete the contents of the User List Filter field, and
then click Filter.
Creating a User Profile
Depending on your network setup, you might administer users and groups locally
or through the domain controller. The NSS configuration interface gives you read-
only access to users and groups provided by NTv4, Active Directory, or NIS
domains. You can also create and manage local users from the NSS configuration
interface. Before you can create a user profile, you must configure the volume you
want to use as the home directory location for your users on the Access Options
page (from the Manager Menu, click Access Options).
Setting up End-User Access
Creating a User Profile
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 75
5
To add a local user:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Users.
The Configured Users page appears. Users created from the NSS
configuration interface and provided by the ADS, NTv4, or NIS domain appear
in the Configured Users table.
STEP 2 Click Add to create a user.
The New User page appears.
STEP 3 In the Username field, type the username. The name must be made up of
alphanumeric characters (that is, a-z, 0-9), any case, to a maximum of 32
characters. This field is required.
STEP 4 Select the group you want to assign as the user’s primary group from the Primary
Group field. If there are no groups configured, the only available choice is the
default group “nasusers”. This field is required.
NOTE Although you can assign the user to multiple groups (through the Add Group or Edit
Group page), the primary group is the group against which quota charges for the
user’s storage usage are made and is the group that defines the group ownership
for all files created by the user. The primary group applies to users set up locally on
the NSS. A domain user’s primary group is set up from the domain and is not
derived from the Primary Group field in the NSS user profile
Setting up End-User Access
Editing a User Profile
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 76
5
STEP 5 Assign a password by entering any valid (ASCII table) characters in the Password
field. The password is required.
STEP 6 To verify the password, re-enter it in the Confirm Password field.
NOTE All password changes to end-user accounts set up through the NSS configuration
pages must be made by the administrator.
STEP 7 To record the user’s full name, enter it in the Real Name field. This field is optional.
You cannot enter the “/” character in this field.
STEP 8 To record the user’s email address, enter it in the Email Address field. This field
is optional.
STEP 9 Click OK to create the user and exit the New User page. Click Apply to create the
user and then add another new user.
Editing a User Profile
You can change certain aspects of the user’s profile. Note that once you create a
username, the only way to “rename” that user is to delete the existing user profile
and then create a new one. If the user profile resides on an ADS, NTv4, or NIS
domain, you need to edit the profile from the applicable domain manager. All
password changes for end-user accounts set up directly through the NSS
configuration pages must be done by the Administrator.
To edit an existing user profile:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Users.
Setting up End-User Access
Editing a User Profile
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 77
5
The Configured Users page appears.
The existing users appear in the Configured Users table.
STEP 2 Select the user from the list, and then click Edit. To limit the entries in the User list,
perform a substring search by entering the desired search string in the User List
Filter field, and then clicking Filter. (For example, enter "ea" to display any list items
that contain "ea" such as "Sean" or "BillyJean".)
The end user’s profile appears in the Edit User page.
Setting up End-User Access
Integrating Users from an ADS, NTv4, or NIS Domain
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 78
5
STEP 3 The username is read-only. You can make changes to any of the other fields in the
user’s profile.
STEP 4 Click Update.
Integrating Users from an ADS, NTv4, or NIS Domain
When the NSS is joined to an ADS, NTv4, or NIS domain, a list of existing domain
users is imported into the Configured Users list. You can view the entire user list
from the Configured Users page but can only edit or delete locally created users
(not domain users). The naming conventions use the NetBIOS format with the
domain name as a prefix of the username. The primary group for users set up
within the ADS, NTv4 or NIS domain is taken from the user’s domain profile versus
the Primary Group field in the NSS user profile.
NOTE Make sure that you set up your User and Group ID ranges before you join the NSS
to an ADS, NTv4, or NIS domain. After you join the NSS to a domain, you should not
make changes to the range as this might lead to an ID collision.
Setting up End-User Access
Deleting a User Profile
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 79
5
Logging into the NSS as a Local User
When the NSS is joined to an NTv4 or ADS domain, local users must prefix their
username with the hostname of the NSS. Users who log in without the hostname
prefix are automatically assumed to be domain users. For example, if the NSS
hostname is “NASadmin” and the local username is “bob”, the user would need to
log in as “NASadmin\bob” in the login dialog.
Deleting a User Profile
You can delete user profiles that were created through the NSS. When you delete
a user profile, the user’s home directory and any files or folders created by the
user on the various shares are not deleted. As an administrator, you can log into
CIFS using the administrator account to delete the user’s data as required.
To delete an existing user profile:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Users.
The Configured Users page appears.
Setting up End-User Access
Working with Groups
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 80
5
STEP 2 Click the username and then click Delete. To delete multiple users, use the
following mouse-key combinations:
• Shift-click: To select a contiguous group of users that you want to delete,
hold down the Shift key, then click the first user, and then the last user in the
series. Click Delete to delete the highlighted users.
• Ctrl-click: To select a non-contiguous group of users that you want to
delete, hold down the Ctrl key, and then click each user from the list. Click
Delete to delete the highlighted users.
The selected user(s) disappear from the list of available users.
Working with Groups
Groups are an easy way to manage users with the same storage needs and
privileges. A group consists of one or more users. You can add or remove users
from a group at any time. The user’s primary group (the group to which quota
charges for storage usage are applied) is set up in the Primary Group field of the
user’s profile.
A group called “nasusers” is automatically created when you first install the NSS.
This group is the default primary group when you create new users.
To limit the entries in the Group list, perform a substring search by entering the
desired search string in the Group List Filter field, and then clicking Filter. (For
example, enter "ea" to display any list items that contain "ea" such as "Sean" or
"BillyJean".) To clear the filter, delete the contents of the Group List Filter field, and
then click Filter.
Creating a Group
Groups let you specify the share access privileges for a set of users. After you
create a group, you can define the group’s access privileges on a per-share basis.
You can also add or remove users to and from the group at any time. Users are
assigned a primary group within their user profile. When users create a file, the
group ownership is automatically set to their primary group. The storage usage is
charged to their primary group for the purposes of volume quota accounting.
Group membership, other than the primary group, is defined in either the Add
Group or Edit Group page and is used only to control access to shares and files.
Setting up End-User Access
Creating a Group
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 81
5
NOTE You cannot grant security privileges to a group for a CIFS share through an ACL.
To create a group:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Groups.
The Configured Groups page appears.
STEP 2 Click Add.
Setting up End-User Access
Creating a Group
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 82
5
The New Group page appears.
STEP 3 In the Group Name field, type the name you want to assign to the group. The name
can only contain lower-case alphanumeric characters and underscores (i.e., a-z, 0-
9, _) to a maximum of 32 characters.
STEP 4 Move the users you want to assign to the group from the Users Available list to the
Users in Group list. Note that a user can be assigned to multiple groups. (The
single angled bracket “<“ or “>” moves the selection in the direction of the bracket.
The double angled bracket “<<“ or “>>” moves the entire list in the direction of
the bracket.)
To limit the entries in the Users Available list, perform a substring search by
entering the desired search string in the User List Filter field, and then clicking
Filter. (For example, enter "ea" to display any list items that contain "ea" such as
"Sean" or "BillyJean".)
STEP 5 Click OK to save the current group and display the Configured Groups page. Click
Apply to save the current group and remain in the New Group page to add
another group.
Setting up End-User Access
Changing the Users Assigned to a Group
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 83
5
Changing the Users Assigned to a Group
After you create a group, you can delete or add to the list of users that belong to
that group.
NOTE When you delete an end user from a group, the end user must log out of their client
machine before the change takes effect. This means that users no longer assigned
to a group maintain full group privileges (i.e., access to shares) until they log off/log
on to their computer.
To change the group membership:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Groups.
The Configured Groups page appears.
STEP 2 From the list of configured groups, select the group that you want to change.
STEP 3 Click Edit.
The Edit Group page appears.
Setting up End-User Access
Integrating Groups from an Active Directory, NTv4, or NIS Domain
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 84
5
STEP 4 Set up the Users in Group list as required. (The single angled bracket “<“ or “>”
moves the selection in the direction of the bracket. The double angled bracket
“<<“ or “>>” moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket.)
STEP 5 Click Update.
Integrating Groups from an Active Directory, NTv4, or
NIS Domain
When the NSS is joined to an Active Directory, NTv4, or NIS domain, domain
groups are imported into the Configured Groups list. Group membership for
imported domain groups are read-only. The naming conventions use the NetBIOS
format with the domain name as a prefix of the group name. For example,
“DOMAINNAME\GroupName”
NOTE Make sure that you set up your User and Group ID ranges before you join the NSS
to an ADS, NTv4, or NIS domain. After you join the NSS to a domain, you should not
make changes to the range as this might lead to an ID collision.
Deleting a Group
When you delete a group, the group is automatically removed from having access
to any configured shares.
To delete a group:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Groups.
Setting up End-User Access
Deleting a Group
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 85
5
The Configured Groups page appears.
STEP 2 Before you can delete a group, you must remove any assigned users.
STEP 3 You can delete a group from two locations in the NSS configuration interface:
• Groups page: Highlight the group you want to delete from the Configured
Groups table, and then click Delete. To delete multiple groups, use the
following key-mouse combination:
- Shift-click: To select a contiguous list of groups that you want to delete,
hold down the Shift key, then click the first group, and then the last group
in the series. Click Delete to delete the highlighted groups.
- Ctrl-click: To select a non-contiguous set of groups that you want to
delete, hold down the Ctrl key, and then click each group from the list.
Click Delete to delete the highlighted groups.
• Edit Groups page: Select the group you want to edit, and then click Edit.
The Edit Groups page appears. Click Delete to remove the group.
Setting up End-User Access
Managing Volume Quotas
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 86
5
Managing Volume Quotas
You can set up specific space limits for each user or group who has write access
to a volume. Defining a user or group’s quota means that you can set a space limit
(referred to as a soft quota) that, when reached, sends a warning to the
administrator and initiates a countdown of the defined grace period. The user has
the amount of time in the grace period to reduce the amount of space used to
under the soft quota limit. Users who do not reduce the space in the allotted grace
period, or who reach their hard quota limit, no longer have write access to the
volume until they reduce their usage to under their soft quota limit.
When a user creates, modifies or deletes a file on a volume, note that there is a
small delay before the usage is updated on the Quota page. This delay is due to
the caching in the filesystem used to provide high performance
NOTE Before you create or edit a quota located on an encrypted volume, make sure that
the volume is unlocked. You also need to set up the Warn For time for each volume
from the Volume Quota page. The Warn For time only affects individual quota that
was created after the Warn For time was set.
Setting up End-User Access
Managing Volume Quotas
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 87
5
Changing the User’s Primary Group
Quotas are charged to the group assigned as the user’s primary group at the time
of file creation. If the user’s primary group changes, files created under the
previous group continue to be charged against that group. If the user’s primary
group changes while the user is connected to the NSS, the previous primary group
continues to be the group charged until the user’s connection is closed. The new
primary group becomes the group charged only after the connection is
reopened.
NOTE If you create a user within a domain, the primary group defined is in the user profile
from the domain, not from the Primary Group field in the NSS user profile.
About the Volume Quota Page
Use the Volume Quota page to manage user and group quotas for each volume. To
display the Volume Quota page, from the Manager Menu, click Access Quota.
Setting up End-User Access
Creating Volume Quota for a User or Group
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 88
5
Creating Volume Quota for a User or Group
You can set up a quota on a volume for each user or group. This quota limits the
user or group to the allocated amount of space within the volume. To give certain
users or groups assigned to a volume full access to the space on the volume, do
not create a quota for that user or group.
NOTE Before you can create quota on an encrypted volume, make sure that it is unlocked.
You also need to set up the Warn For time for each volume from the Volume Quota
page. The Warn For time only affects individual quota that was created after the
Warn For time was set.
To create a quota for a user or group:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Quota.
The Filesystem Quota page appears.
STEP 2 Click Create Quota.
Setting up End-User Access
Creating Volume Quota for a User or Group
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 89
5
The New Filesystem Quota page appears.
STEP 3 Select the volume on which you want to set the quota from the New Quota on
drop-down list. To limit the entries in the User/Group list, perform a substring
search by entering the desired search string in the User/Group List Filter field,
and then clicking Filter. (For example, enter "ea" to display any list items that
contain "ea" such as "Sean" or "BillyJean".)
STEP 4 Select the user or group for which you are creating the quota from the For User/
Group drop-down list.
STEP 5 In the Warning at field, enter the threshold of space that, when exceeded, triggers
a warning that the quota is close to being used up. When the threshold is
exceeded, the grace period set up for the volume begins. The user has the amount
of time set in the grace period to reduce the amount of space used to under the
space set in the Warning at field or they are not allowed to write further data to
the volume. This is also referred to as a “soft quota.”
STEP 6 In the Space Limit field, enter the amount of space that the user or group has
available to use, and then select the size unit from the drop-down menu. This is
also referred to as a “hard quota.” If the user reaches the space limit, the user can
no longer write data to the volume until they either reduce the amount of space
used to under the limit by deleting files or have the quota increased.
STEP 7 Click Update.
Setting up End-User Access
Setting up the Grace Period for a Volume Quota
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 90
5
Setting up the Grace Period for a Volume Quota
You can set up a limit on the amount of space available to your users or groups.
This limit can be set as a soft quota and hard quota. When the users reach their
“soft quota,” a warning is issued and the grace period begins. Users then have the
amount of time set in the grace period to either reduce the amount of spaced used
by deleting files, or have the quota increased. If the amount of space is not
reduced before the grace period expires or the user reaches the hard quota, the
user is automatically denied write access to the volume.
NOTE Before you create quotas for a user or group, make sure that you set up the Warn
For time for each volume from the Filesystem Quota page. The Warn For time only
affects individual quota that was created after the Warn For time was set.
To set up the grace period for a volume:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Quota.
The Filesystem Quota page appears.
Setting up End-User Access
Changing a Volume Quota for a User or Group
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 91
5
STEP 2 To set up the grace period, after which if the soft limit set for the user or group is
still exceeded, the user or group is denied write access, enter the time period in
the Warn for <time period> before denying access field. Enter the number in the
first part of the field, and the time unit in the second part of the field.
For example, to warn the user or group that they have reached their soft limit and
have three days to reduce it, enter “3” and then select “days”. Normally, when the
quota is under the limit, it appears in black type. When a user reaches their soft
quota limit, the amount listed on Filesystem Quota page turns red.
STEP 3 Click Update.
STEP 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each applicable volume.
Changing a Volume Quota for a User or Group
After a quota is created, you can increase or decrease it. You can also change the
limit at which the user or group receives a warning message and the grace
period begins.
To change the quota limit or warning limit:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Quota.
The Filesystem Quota page appears.
Setting up End-User Access
Clearing a Quota
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 92
5
STEP 2 Click Edit for the user or group for which you want to change the quota.
The Edit Quota page appears.
STEP 3 Make the required changes to the soft (warning) or hard quota (space limit) limits.
STEP 4 Click Update.
Clearing a Quota
After a quota has been set up, you can clear it. Clearing a quota means that the
user or group no longer has a space limitation on their use of the associated
volume (other than the actual unused storage space on the volume).
To clear a quota for a user or group:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Quota.
Setting up End-User Access
Network Filters Overview
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 93
5
The Filesystem Quota page appears.
Quotas are displayed according to their associated volume.
STEP 2 Click Clear for the user or group whose quota you want to remove.
Network Filters Overview
In addition to providing storage for your data, the NSS provides a firewall that you
can configure to protect that data. Defining network filters lets you specify which
network hosts have access to the NSS through the various supported protocols.
To view the network filters:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Network.
Setting up End-User Access
Defining the Default Network Policy
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 94
5
The Network Filters page appears.
STEP 2 You can do any of the following:
• Set the default network policy to control what happens to traffic not
explicitly covered by defined filters. (see “Defining the Default Network
Policy,” on page 94)
• View or delete the existing filters defined for the NSS from the Active
Network Access Filters table.(see “Network Filters Overview,” on page 93)
• Create a new filter based on an IP or MAC address or a range of IP
addresses. (see “Creating a Network Filter,” on page 96)
Defining the Default Network Policy
The default network policy is the overarching policy that defines the gateway for
communication to the NSS. It specifies how traffic that is not covered by defined
filters is handled. The default policy can be defined to either accept or reject
such traffic.
To define the default network policy:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Network.
Setting up End-User Access
Defining the Default Network Policy
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 95
5
The Network Filters page appears.
STEP 2 From the Default Network Policy drop-down menu, click one of the following:
• Accept Traffic: Allow the NSS to communicate with all initiating hosts.
Select this option if you have a limited number of systems that you want to
disallow. When you set up your individual filters, select those filters that
“disallow” (i.e., drop or reject) certain types of connections. For example,
you might want to disallow CIFS connections but allow all other types.
• Drop Traffic: Disallow the NSS from communicating with any initiating
systems. Select this option if you have a limited number of systems that you
want to allow to communicate with the NSS. When you set up your filters,
select those filters that “allow” certain types of connections. For example,
you might only want to allow FTP connections.
NOTE If you set the default policy to Drop and you want to enable FTP connections, make
sure that you set the FTP connection type on the host to active. (If you set the
connection type to passive you can connect to the NSS but are not able to list,
transfer the data, and so on.)
STEP 3 Click Change Policy.
Setting up End-User Access
Creating a Network Filter
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 96
5
Creating a Network Filter
The Active Network Access Filters table on the Network Filters page displays
currently defined filters. These filters control if access to the NSS from specified
hosts is granted or denied on a per-protocol basis. Each device in your network is
assigned a fixed 48-bit MAC address and changeable 32-bit IP address. When
you define a filter, it grants or denies access through the specified protocol from
the specified IP/MAC address or range of IP addresses.
NOTE When you define a new filter, any existing connections that would normally be
denied by this rule remain intact. These connections are denied during the next
attempt to connect to the NSS.
To add a network filter:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Network.
The Network Filters page appears.
STEP 2 From the New Network Access Filter table, type the IP/MAC address to which
you are applying the filter, in the IP/MAC address field. You can also enter
addresses for the following:
• IP Address Range: Type the range according to the following format: first
address-last address. (Where the first IP address in the range is entered
first, followed by a hyphen, and then the last IP address in the range.)
Setting up End-User Access
Available Access Filters
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 97
5
• Subnet: Enter the subnet to set a filter for all the addresses within the
subnet. The format should appear as shown in the following example:
192.168.1.0/24 (where the digits following the slash represent the number of
bits in the network portion of the IP address).
STEP 3 From the Filter drop-down menu, select the type of filter you want to apply to the
IP/MAC address.
STEP 4 Click Add.
Any connections that apply to the new filter rule are affected by the rule during
the next connection attempt.
Available Access Filters
When you configure network filters, determine which protocols can or cannot
access the NSS. To display the list of available filters, click the drop-down arrow
next to the Filter field on the Network Filters page.
Setting up End-User Access
Available Access Filters
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 98
5
NOTE Rejecting versus Dropping Traffic: When incoming traffic matches a reject filter,
the NSS drops the traffic and then sends a notice to the initiating system of the
denial of service. When incoming traffic matches a drop filter, the NSS drops the
traffic but no notice is sent to the initiating system.
• Allow All: This is the default filter. It tells the NSS to accept traffic via all
supported protocols.
• Allow CIFS: Allow CIFS filesharing access.
• Allow FTP: Allow FTP and FTPS access.
• Allow HTTP: Allow access to the NSS configuration interface through a
Web browser.
• Allow NFS: Allow NFS access.
• Reject CIFS: Do not allow CIFS filesharing access. The NSS informs the
system initiating the connection about the denial of service.
• Reject FTP: Do not allow FTP or FTPS traffic. The NSS informs the system
initiating the connection about the denial of service.
• Reject HTTP: Do not allow access to the NSS configuration interface via a
Web browser. The NSS informs the system initiating the connection about
the denial of service.
• Reject NFS: Do not allow NFS filesharing access. The NSS informs the
system initiating the connection about the denial of service.
• Drop CIFS: Do not allow CIFS filesharing access. The NSS does not inform
the system initiating the connection about the denial of service.
• Drop FTP: Do not allow FTP or FTPS traffic. The NSS does not inform the
system initiating the connection about the denial of service.
• Drop HTTP: Do not allow access to the NSS configuration interface via a
Web browser. The NSS does not inform the system initiating the connection
about the denial of service.
• Drop NFS: Do not allow NFS filesharing access. The NSS does not inform
the system initiating the connection about the denial of service.
Setting up End-User Access
Deleting a Network Filter
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 99
5
Deleting a Network Filter
To delete a network filter:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Network.
The Network Filters page appears.
STEP 2 The Active Network Access Filters table lists the existing filters. To delete a filter,
click Delete for the filter you want to remove.
The filter disappears from the list. The filter is no longer active.
Configuring the User/Group Settings
To avoid conflicts between your user and group IDs, it is important to set up the
ranges for the various types of users and groups (i.e., local, NIS domain, and
Windows domain). The ID range should be set up before you create any local
users or join a NIS, NTv4, or ADS domain as you should not change the range after
the domain has been joined. In addition to setting the ID ranges, you also need to
define which volume you are using to store your users’ home directories.
To set up the ID ranges and home directory location:
Setting up End-User Access
Configuring the User/Group Settings
Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 100
5
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Access Options.
The User/Group Settings page appears.
STEP 2 Set up the following ID Ranges:
• Local Users and Groups ID Range: This ID range applies to any users or
groups created from the NSS configuration interface. When you create a
user or group, the ID assigned is in this range. Make sure the range you set
does not conflict with the NIS or Windows
domain ranges.
• NIS Domain Users and Groups ID Range: This ID range should match the
range of IDs defined in your NIS domain and not conflict with the local or
Windows ID range. Set this range before you join the NSS to the NIS
domain.
• Windows Domain Users and Groups ID Range: This ID range must be at
least 10,000 in size. Users and groups from your NTv4 and ADS domain are
mapped to local user or group IDs within this range. It is important to set this
range before you join the NTv4 or ADS domain. After you join the NTv4 or
ADS domain, the ID range should not change.
STEP 3 Set the volume that you want to assign as the home directory location for your
users through the Home Directory Location field.
STEP 4 Click Update.
6
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 101
Managing the Shares
To display a list of your defined file shares, from the Manager Menu, click
Shares Shares. The File Shares page appears. This page displays read-only
details about the shares that are currently defined on the NSS. You can add new
shares by clicking the Create Share button.
There is a limit of 21 users and groups (the combined total) that you can assign
access privileges to a share. If you have a number of users that exceeds the
limitation, assign the applicable users to a group or groups and then assign the
group to the share. There is no limit to the number of users that you can assign to
an individual group.
Managing the Shares
Creating a Share
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 102
6
Creating a Share
After you define at least one volume, you can create the shares that can be
accessed by your users when they log into the NSS. There is a limit of 21 users
and groups (the combined total) that you can assign access privileges to a share. If
you have a number of users that exceeds the limitation, assign the applicable
users to a group or groups and then assign the group to the share. There is no limit
to the number of users that you can assign to an individual group.
NOTE You cannot create a share on a locked volume. If the volume is locked, go to the
Volume page, and unlock the volume.
To add a share:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Shares Shares.
STEP 2 Click Create Share.
The New Share page appears.
Managing the Shares
Creating a Share
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 103
6
STEP 3 In the Share field, enter a name for the share.
STEP 4 From the Location field, select the volume on which you want to configure
the share.
STEP 5 Add a description or comment about the share in the Comment field. This
comment appears when you browse the NSS from My Network Places (as the
tooltip when you hover over the share, or if you select the Details viewing mode).
This field is optional.
STEP 6 Click the Share Attributes options to configure the share as public and if public,
read-only. (These settings are optional.)
• Public: Enable all users to access the share. To make an NFS share world
readable/writable, select this checkbox, and ensure the Read-Only
checkbox is also deselected. To make an NFS share world readable, select
this checkbox, and ensure the Read-Only checkbox is also selected.
• Read-Only: If the share is configured as a public share, allow the users
read-only access to the share. Users can access and view the share but
cannot write to the share. (For NFS shares, refer to the information stated in
the Public field.)
• DFS Root: Set the share to be a Microsoft DFS root. The share must be set
as a DFS root when it is created. You cannot set it as a DFS root after it is
created or revert a DFS root share to be a regular share. When you set this
option, the CIFS Default File Creation Attributes and Protocol checkboxes
are greyed out as they are not relevant. Follow the steps in “Adding a DFS
Shared Folder,” on page108“to add shared folder links to the root.
STEP 7 Set the Allow users to delete or rename other users’ files and folders field as
required. This field determines whether users who are assigned to a share can
delete or rename files or folders within that share that they do not own.
It is important to consider interoperability with applications such as MS Word
2007 and Photoshop. For example, if this field is not selected and you gave a user
write permissions to a file and that user tried to open, edit, and save the file, the
save would fail due to the fact that Word sets up a temporary file and then
attempts to delete it and replace it with the new version. Not all applications work
this way. Always consider the applications used by your users to determine how
you want to set this field.
• Select this field: By selecting this field, users with write permissions can
rename or delete files or folders within the assigned share even though they
are not the owners of the files or folders.
Managing the Shares
Creating a Share
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 104
6
• Deselect this field: Users cannot rename or delete a file or folder within the
assigned share unless they are the owners of the file or folder.
NOTE Any subfolders created through CIFS behave according to the current setting of the
Allow users to delete or rename other users’ files or folders field. If a subfolder
is created through NFS or FTP, it behaves as though this field is selected until this
field is changed. These subfolders then behave according to the current setting.
STEP 8 Set up the defaults for how file permissions are set when a file is created using
CIFS via the following CIFS File Creation Attributes checkboxes:
• Group Readable: Members of the group assigned to the file have read
permission. The group is assigned during file creation.When creating files
by using NFS, the owner can manually set the group permissions when the
file is created and can edit them at a later time. For files created by using
CIFS, the group is automatically assigned as the owner’s default group. This
group cannot be edited at a later time.
• Group Writable: Members of the group assigned to the file have write
permission. The group is assigned during file creation. When creating files
by using NFS, the owner can manually set the group permissions when the
file is created and can edit them at a later time. When creating files by using
CIFS, the group is automatically assigned as the owner’s default group. This
group cannot be edited at a later time.
• Everyone Readable: All authenticated users can view the file.
• Everyone Writable: All authenticated users have write permission to
the file.
STEP 9 From the Protocol field, click the checkboxes to select the protocols that can be
used to access the share:
• CIFS: Enable CIFS access to the share.
• NFS: Enable NFS access to the share. To allow NFS access to the share, the
NSS must also be configured to allow NFS access.
• FTP: Enable FTP access to the share. To allow FTP access to the share, the
NSS must also be configured to allow FTP access.
Managing the Shares
Editing an Existing Share
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 105
6
STEP 10 To assign users access to the share, move the users into one of the following
boxes. (The single angled bracket "<" or ">" moves the selection in the direction of
the bracket. The double angled bracket "<<" or ">>" moves the entire list in the
direction of the bracket.)
NOTE Setting individual user and group permissions on NFS shares only works when
joined to an NIS domain.
• Read-Only Users: These users have read-only access to the share.
• Read-Write Users: These users have full read-write access to the share.
STEP 11 To assign a group access to the share, move the users into one of the following
boxes. (The single angled bracket "<" or ">" moves the selection in the direction of
the bracket. The double angled bracket "<<" or ">>" moves the entire list in the
direction of the bracket.)
• Read-Only Groups: These groups have read-only access to the share.
• Read-Write Groups: These groups have full read-write access to the share.
STEP 12 Click OK.
Editing an Existing Share
After a share is created, you can make changes to it, such as changing user or
group permissions, changing the share attributes, and adding a DFS shared folder
for shares set up to be a DFS root. There is a limit of 21 users and groups (the
combined total) that you can assign access privileges to a share. If you have a
number of users that exceeds the limitation, assign the applicable users to a group
or groups and then assign the group to the share. There is no limit to the number of
users that you can assign to an individual group.
To edit a share:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Shares Shares.
STEP 2 Click Edit for the share you want to change.
Managing the Shares
Editing an Existing Share
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 106
6
The Edit Share page appears.
STEP 3 You can change the comment from the Comment field as required. This comment
appears when you browse the NSS from My Network Places (as the tooltip when
you hover over the share, or if you select the Details viewing mode).
STEP 4 Change the setting for the Allow users to delete or rename other users’ files and
folders field as required. This field determines whether users who are assigned to
a share can delete or rename files or folders within that share that they do not own.
It is important to consider interoperability with applications such as MS Word
2007 and Photoshop. For example, if this field is not selected and you gave a user
write permissions to a file and that user tried to open, edit, and save the file, the
save would fail due to the fact that Word sets up a temporary file and then
attempts to delete it and replace it with the new version. Not all applications work
this way. Always consider the applications used by your users to determine how
you want to set this field.
• Select this field: By selecting this field, users with write permissions can
rename or delete files or folders within the assigned share even though they
are not the owners of the files or folders.
• Deselect this field: Users cannot rename or delete a file or folder within the
assigned share unless they are the owners of the file or folder.
Managing the Shares
Editing an Existing Share
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 107
6
NOTE Any subfolders you create by using CIFS, behave according to the current setting
of the Allow users to delete or rename other users’ files or folders field. If a subfolder
is created via NFS or FTP, it behaves as though this field is selected until this field is
changed. These subfolders then behave according to the current setting.
STEP 5 The Share attributes checkbox determines if the share is read-only or if users can
write to the share:
• Public: All users can write to the share.
• Read-Only: Users can view the share as read-only.
STEP 6 Set up the defaults for how file permissions are set when the file is created in the
following CIFS File Creation Attributes checkboxes:
• Group Readable: Members of the group assigned to the file have read-only
permissions. The group is assigned during file creation. For NFS files, the
owner can manually set the group permissions when the file is created and
can edit them at a later time. For CIFS files, the group is automatically
assigned as the owner’s default group. This group cannot be edited at a
later time.
• Group Writable: Members of the group assigned to the file have read-write
permissions. The group is assigned during file creation. For NFS files, the
owner can edit the group ownership of a file. For files created via CIFS, the
group is automatically assigned as the owner’s default group. This group
cannot be edited at a later time.
• Everyone Readable: All authenticated users can view the file.
• Everyone Writable: All authenticated users have read-write permissions for
the file.
STEP 7 From the Protocol field, click the checkboxes to select the protocols that can be
used to access the share:
• CIFS: Enable CIFS access the share.
• NFS: Enable NFS access the share. To allow NFS access to the share, the
NSS must also be configured to allow NFS access.
• FTP: Enable FTP access to the share. To allow FTP access to the share, the
NSS must also be configured to allow NFS access.
Managing the Shares
Adding a DFS Shared Folder
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 108
6
STEP 8 Move any usernames that you want to have access to the share from the User list
into one of the following boxes. (The single angled bracket "<" or ">" moves the
selection in the direction of the bracket. The double angled bracket "<<" or ">>"
moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket.)
• Read-Only Users: Usernames that appear in this list have read-only access
to the share.
• Read-Write Users: Usernames that appear in this list have read-write
access to the share.
STEP 9 Use the last two tables in the window to set up your group permissions for the
share. Move any groups that you want to have access to the share from the left
side of the page into one of the following. (The single angled bracket "<" or ">"
moves the selection in the direction of the bracket. The double angled bracket "<<"
or ">>" moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket.)
• Read-Only Groups: Groups that appear in this list have read-only access to
the share.
• Read-Write Groups: Groups that appear in this list have full read-write
access to the share.
STEP 10 Click OK.
Adding a DFS Shared Folder
Microsoft DFS lets users within your network easily access data stored on multiple
remote computers. Through DFS, your users can view and access shares through
a familiar, unified folder hierarchy, even when those resources are located on
different servers. The NSS can act as a DFS root or leaf. When acting as a root, the
share on the NSS contains subfolders that link to the various shares on remote
systems, referred to as "DFS shared folders." When you create a DFS shared folder
from a share, note that the user must have privileges set up to access that share on
the remote system. After the user accesses the DFS shared folder through the
NSS DFS root share, the user’s rights to the DFS shared folder are those assigned
to the corresponding target share on the remote system.
To add a DFS root directory to a share on the NSS:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Shares Shares.
Managing the Shares
Adding a DFS Shared Folder
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 109
6
The File Shares page appears.
STEP 2 Click Edit for the share to which you want to add a folder.
The Edit Share page appears.
STEP 3 Click Add Shared Folder.
Managing the Shares
Adding a DFS Shared Folder
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 110
6
The Add Folder page appears.
STEP 4 Select one of the following:
• Add a Folder to DFS: Select this option to create a single DFS shared folder.
Fill in the following fields from the Add DFS Shared Folder table:
- Link Name: This is the name of the link that appears as a folder within
the share. When users click this link, they are redirected to the target
share on the remote server. Enter any name of up to 255 characters.
- Server Name: Enter the name of the remote server on which the target
share is located.
- Share: Enter the name of the target share.
• Import an Entire Remote Server: Select this option to automatically create
links for all shares on the remote server. Fill in the following fields from the
Import Remote Server table:
- Server Name: Enter the name of the remote server.
- Username: Enter the username of the account with access to the server.
- Password: Enter the password for the above account.
STEP 5 If you are adding a folder to DFS, click OK. If you are importing a remote server,
click Import.
Managing the Shares
Restrictions using Microsoft DFS from the NSS
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 111
6
NOTE Make sure you review the restrictions and recommendations for using Microsoft
DFS from the NSS.
Restrictions using Microsoft DFS from the NSS
To use DFS folders from the NSS, it is important to understand the limitations or
restrictions involved and how to best configure your system:
• User Credentials must be Recognized by the Remote Server: Re-
direction to a remote file-server is only successful if the current user
credentials (i.e., the user’s NSS username and password) are recognized by
the remote server. Microsoft DFS (MSDFS) operates optimally if the PC-
user’s login username and password are recognized as valid on all file
servers being accessed. Otherwise, an authentication error occurs and the
user may not be able to re-authenticate with different user credentials.
As a workaround in a non-domain (workgroup) environment, pre-map a file-
share to each file server that needs special user credentials (other than the
logged-in username and password). In this case, the MSDFS redirect
proceeds smoothly because the PC-client already has an established
session with the target file-server. When the user’s login is different on the
DFS leaf than the DFS root, they can pre-login to the leaf. When they then
login to the root, they can access the linked DFS share.
• Windows Operating System Version: MSDFS is not supported by
Windows 98 clients.
• Windows Clients must be Restarted: After you set up a DFS root, any
Windows clients that were connected must be restarted.
Setting up CIFS Access
Although you cannot globally disable CIFS as you can for NFS and FTP, you can
allow or disallow CIFS access on a per-share basis. The CIFS Networking
Configuration page lets you specify the length of time CIFS connections to the
NSS can be idle before being automatically disconnected.
To set up the idle disconnect time for a CIFS connection to the NSS:
Managing the Shares
Setting up Network Filesystem (NFS) Access
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 112
6
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Shares CIFS Setup.
The CIFS Networking Configuration page appears.
STEP 2 From the dropdown box, select the amount of time that the CIFS connection can
be idle, after which it is disconnected.
STEP 3 Click Update.
Setting up Network Filesystem (NFS) Access
The first step to enable NFS access to the NSS is to enable it globally. You then
need to enable it on a per-share basis.
NOTE The NSS only supports NFSv3.
To set up global NFS access to the NSS:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Shares NFS Setup.
Managing the Shares
Setting up Network Filesystem (NFS) Access
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 113
6
The NFS Setup page appears.
STEP 2 To enable NFS support, click Enable NFS support. This checkbox activates the
other NFS configuration options on this page.
STEP 3 To enable the optional asynchronous write option, click Use Asynchronous
Writes. Asynchronous writes allow applications running on the NFS client to not
block until write requests are complete on the NSS as they normally would.
Instead they continue immediately after committing the write. This can improve
performance if the NSS is heavily used.
STEP 4 If asynchronous writes is enabled, you can enable aggregate write requests by
selecting the Aggregate Write Requests checkbox.
• When enabled, NFS write requests are “bulked” and sent in a batch. The
benefit of enabling this feature is that it is more efficient.
• When disabled, the write requests are sent immediately. The downside of
enabling this feature is that there is a potential for permanent data loss
should the NSS suffer an unexpected power loss or if the NFS
client crashes.
STEP 5 Click Update.
Managing the Shares
Configuring the NSS for FTP Access
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 114
6
Configuring the NSS for FTP Access
You can configure the NSS to allow the FTP protocol to be used for file transfers
between the NSS over the Internet. The NSS supports both FTP (faster but not as
secure) and FTPS (not as fast as FTP but more secure). The NSS only supports
Explicit FTPS (versus Implicit FTPS). The NSS does not support SFTP. After you
globally enable FTP access, you can allow or disallow FTP access on a
per-share basis.
NOTE FTP is disabled by default. You must enable FTP access before your users can
access the NSS storage through FTP regardless of their per-share settings.
To set up the FTP protocol:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Shares FTP Setup.
The FTP Setup page appears.
STEP 2 To enable FTP, click Enable FTP.
This enables both FTP and FTPS access and activates the remaining FTP
configuration settings on this page.
Managing the Shares
Configuring the NSS for FTP Access
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 115
6
STEP 3 In the Banner Message box, enter a message that appears when a user first
connects to the NSS.
STEP 4 To allow only file transfers using FTPS (FTP over SSL), click Allow only FTPS
Connections. Also make sure that the Allow Anonymous Access checkbox is
deselected.
STEP 5 To allow anonymous FTP access, click Allow Anonymous Access.
a. If you allow anonymous access, select the volume that you want to set as the
anonymous root directory from the Anonymous Root Directory
drop-down menu.
b. To allow anonymous users to have write access to the NSS, click Anonymous
Upload.
c. To allow anonymous users to download files that have been uploaded by other
anonymous users, make sure that the Allow Download of Uploaded Files
checkbox is selected.
d. To set a maximum transfer rate for anonymous users, enter it in KB/s in the
Maximum Anonymous Transfer Rate field. For no maximum, set the rate as 0.
STEP 6 To disconnect the FTP connection after a period of time when the connection is
idle, select the number of minutes in the Disconnect Idle Sessions drop-down
menu.
STEP 7 To disconnect an FTP connection after a certain length of time has passed during
a file transfer, select the number of minutes in the Disconnect Stalled Transfers
drop-down menu.
STEP 8 To set the maximum number of FTP connections that can be made from a single
client IP address, enter the number in the Max Connections per IP Address field.
STEP 9 To leave this as an unlimited number of connections, leave this field blank.
STEP 10 Set up the defaults for how file permissions are set when a file is created using
FTP through the following Default File Creation Attributes checkboxes. Unlike
CIFS permissions which are set on a share-by-share basis, the FTP permissions
are global to all files and folders created through FTP regardless of the share to
which they are assigned.
• Group Readable: Members of the user who created the file or folder’s
primary group have read permission.
• Group Writable: Members of the user who created the file or folder’s
primary group have write permission.
Managing the Shares
Configuring the NSS for FTP Access
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 116
6
• Everyone Readable: All authenticated users can view the file.
• Everyone Writable: All authenticated users have write permission to
the file.
• Set the Allow users to delete or rename other users’ files and folders
field as required.
This field determines if users who have write permission to a share can delete
or rename files or folders within that share that they do not own.
Consider the applications used by your users to determine how you want to set
this field such as interoperability with applications such as MS Word 2007 and
Photoshop. For example, if this field is not selected and you gave a user write
permissions to a file and that user tried to open, edit, and save the file, the save
would fail due to the fact that Word sets up a temporary file and then attempts
to delete it and replace it with the new version. Not all applications work this
way.
• Select this field: By selecting this field, users with write permissions can
rename or delete files or folders within the assigned share even though they
are not the owners of the files or folders.
• Deselect this field: Users cannot rename or delete a file or folder within the
assigned share unless they are the owners of the file or folder
NOTE Unlike the setting on the Shares Setup page, this setting is global, not per share. All
files within folders created through FTP act according to this setting, regardless of
the share they are created in.
STEP 11 If the NSS is located behind a firewall and/or router, continue to the next section,
Configuring Passive Mode FTP
Configuring Passive Mode FTP
Passive Mode FTP is an alternative way of establishing FTP connections that is
used for FTP clients or servers that are located behind a router/and or firewall (in
this case, the NSS acts as an FTP server). Passive Mode allows for a more secure
form of data transfer and ensures that the intended network client establishes all
connections and maintains session control for FTP server requests within local
and external network environments.
Managing the Shares
Configuring the NSS for FTP Access
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 117
6
Select this option if the NSS is located behind a firewall and/or router. By default,
the FTP server sets the NSS IP address to passive mode.
NOTE Passive Mode FTP through a router and/or firewall only works on a single interface.
If you have VLANs defined, you must choose which interface to access through FTP.
To configure Passive Mode FTP, follow these steps:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Network Ports.
The Network Port Configuration page appears.
STEP 2 Verify the FTP port number on the NSS (port number 21 is the default setting).
To use a non-default port number, enter the new port number in the FTP/FTPS
Server Port field (For example: 8028) and then click Update. You must also
specify this port number in your router configuration software.
Managing the Shares
Configuring the NSS for FTP Access
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 118
6
In this example, port 8028 is specified in the FTP client program Filezilla:
STEP 3 From the Manager Menu, click Shares FTP Setup.
The FTP Setup page appears.
Managing the Shares
Configuring the NSS for FTP Access
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 119
6
STEP 4 Enter the router's WAN IP address in the PASV IP address field.
STEP 5 Enter the minimum and maximum port range for passive FTP port connections
for each simultaneous FTP client connection that the NSS expects and then
click Update.
• Minimum port for passive mode (PASV) connections: If your network has
FTP connections that pass through a firewall, set the minimum port for the
port range. The default is 1025. The minimum port range can be as low as
one (for each expected FTP connection).
• Maximum port for passive mode (PASV) connections: Set the maximum
port number for the port range. The default is 4000.
If you are using a non-default port number, enter the minimum and maximum port
range for your router (such as 9031 to 9040).
You must also enter these ranges in your router configuration software
as follows:
a. Set the port forwarding for the FTP port.
Enter the port number (For example: 8028) in both the External and Internal Port
FTP fields and then click Save Settings. This is the same port number that you
entered in the FTP/FTPS Server Port field in Step 2.
Managing the Shares
Configuring the NSS for FTP Access
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 120
6
b. Set the port forwarding ranges for passive FTP connections and then click
Save Settings. These are the same minimum and maximum port ranges that
you entered in Step 5.
The Passive Mode FTP configuration is complete.
Creating or Running a Backup of a Share
The Scheduled Backup page displays any backups that have been configured. It
lets you schedule further backups or initiate a manual backup.
Managing the Shares
Creating a Scheduled Backup for a Share
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 121
6
Creating a Scheduled Backup for a Share
You can quickly configure a backup to run at a scheduled time interval for a share
or group of shares. The backup can be saved to a remote CIFS server or to another
share on the NSS.
To set up a scheduled backup:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Shares Backup.
STEP 2 Click Schedule Backup.
Managing the Shares
Creating a Scheduled Backup for a Share
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 122
6
The Scheduled Backups page appears.
STEP 3 Move the shares you want to include in the backup from the Available Shares list
to the Shares to Backup list. (The single angled bracket "<" or ">" moves the
selection in the direction of the bracket. The double angled bracket "<<" or ">>"
moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket.)
STEP 4 Click one of the following to determine the destination for the backup:
• Remote CIFS Filer: To save the backup on a remote CIFS server, click this
option and then configure the hostname of the remote server, the remote
share, as well as the login credentials to that share.
• Local File System: Select the share on which you want to store the backup.
STEP 5 To create a compressed backup, check Compress backup image.
NOTE Compressed backup images are smaller than non-compressed images but take
longer to create.
STEP 6 Click Next.
Managing the Shares
Creating a Scheduled Backup for a Share
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 123
6
The Select Backup Schedule page appears.
STEP 7 Select the backup frequency as one of the following:
• Daily: Select each day on which you want the backup to occur.
• Weekly: Select the day of the week on which you want the backup to occur.
• Monthly: Select the day of the month on which you want the backup to
occur. Make sure you select a day that is 28 or less. If you select the 29th,
30th or 31st day, the backup does not run during months that do not contain
that day.
STEP 8 In the Run Backup at field, set up the specific time (hour:minute) at which time the
backup occurs. When setting the hour, use the 24-hour clock.
STEP 9 To set up a backup that backs up just the changes made to the share since the last
backup, click Incremental Backups. Leave it unchecked to take a full backup of
the share each time the backup is run.
STEP 10 Click OK.
Managing the Shares
Initiating a Backup for a Share
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 124
6
Initiating a Backup for a Share
You can initiate a backup on a share or group of shares at any time. You can save
the backup to a remote CIFS server or to another share on the NSS.
To initiate a backup manually:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Shares Backup.
The Scheduled Backups page appears.
STEP 2 Click Run Backup.
Managing the Shares
Initiating a Backup for a Share
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 125
6
The Run a Backup page appears.
STEP 3 Move the shares you want to include in the backup from the Available Shares list
to the Shares to Backup list. (The single angled bracket "<" or ">" moves the
selection in the direction of the bracket. The double angled bracket "<<" or ">>"
moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket.)
STEP 4 Click one of the following to determine the destination for the backup:
• Remote CIFS Filer: To save the backup on a remote CIFS server, click this
option and then configure the hostname of the remote server, the remote
share, as well as the login information to that share.
• Local File System: Select the share on which you want to store the backup.
STEP 5 To create a compressed backup, check Compress backup image. Compressed
backup images are smaller than non-compressed images but take longer to
create.
STEP 6 Click OK to initiate the backup. A message appears when the backup is complete.
Managing the Shares
Deleting Backup Images
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 126
6
Deleting Backup Images
Each time the backup job runs for a CIFS share or group of CIFS shares, the
backup image is saved to the local share (if configured for backups). To remove
these images, you must have administrator privileges.
To delete a backup image from a local CIFS share:
STEP 1 Login to the share using the “admin” username together with the password
configured for the administrator.
The share’s contents appear.
STEP 2 Go to the “backup” folder and delete the backup images as required (the images
appear as .tar.gz files).
7
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 127
Managing the NSS
You can perform these maintenance tasks from the System Details page.
• Reboot or Shut down the system. See “Rebooting or Shutting Down the
NSS,” on page127.
• Upgrade the firmware. See “Upgrading the NSS Firmware,” on page129
• Restore the configuration settings to the factory defaults. See “Restoring
the Factory Default Configuration,” on page131.
Rebooting or Shutting Down the NSS
If you need to reboot or shut down the NSS. doing so disconnects all active user
sessions. If the power to the NSS is interrupted unexpectedly (such as an unclean
shutdown), your system settings might become corrupted.
Managing the NSS
Rebooting or Shutting Down the NSS
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 128
7
We recommend that you use a UPS (and optionally an RPSU) to ensure that power
to the NSS is never interrupted. See “Handling an Unexpected (Unclean)
Shutdown,” on page165 for more information.
During a reboot or shutdown of the NSS, the color and blink rate of the Power LED
on the front of the chassis indicates the status of the currently selected process.
The LEDs on the front and back of the NSS chassis help you troubleshoot a variety
of conditions on the NSS. The Reset button lets you restore the network defaults
in situations where you can no longer log into the configuration interface.
To reboot or shut down the NSS:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Admin Maintenance.
The System Details page appears.
STEP 2 Click one of the following:
• Reboot System: Power down and power up the system.
Make sure that you close the Web browser when the system is rebooting. If
you refresh the configuration interface Web page during the reboot
process, the system initiates another reboot.
• Shut Down System: This does a “clean” shutdown of the NSS. You can also
shut down the NSS to do the following:
- Restore the network setting system defaults: You need to do this if the
configuration interface becomes inaccessible. To reset the network
setting system defaults, shut down the NSS, power it off, hold down the
Managing the NSS
Upgrading the NSS Firmware
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 129
7
Reset button, and then power up the NSS. When you see the Power LED
blink yellow rapidly, release the Reset button. The network settings are
restored to factory defaults.
- Reset the box: Press and hold the Reset button while the system is
running until the Power LED begins to blink green. Release the button.
A warning message appears.
STEP 3 Click OK to continue.
You can view the Power LED on the front of the chassis during the reboot or
shutdown process. It changes to indicate the current status of the process. When
the NSS is fully powered up, the Power LED is solid green. When the shutdown is
complete, the Power LED is off. You need to unlock any encrypted volumes
following any reboot or power up of the NSS.
Upgrading the NSS Firmware
Before you start the firmware upgrade, note the following:
• The firmware must be upgraded from an external source to the NSS. You
cannot install firmware that is saved to a disk on the NSS. If a copy of the
firmware is saved to a disk on the NSS, make sure you that you copy it to
another location (such as onto a PC) before you attempt to upgrade it.
• The firmware must be compatible with the NSS platform.
• The firmware must be newer than the version currently installed. The
system does not support downgrades.
• The firmware must be installed in a specific order if upgrading within a
virtualized setup (see “Upgrading the NSS Firmware in a Virtualized Setup,”
on page131).
!
CAUTION When you upgrade the firmware, avoid using a wireless connection to the NSS as
wireless connections can be unreliable and cause image corruption. Do not
interrupt the power during the firmware upgrade. The system reboots after the
firmware upgrade is completed. Wait until the Power LED goes back to solid green
before you log in and use the configuration interface.
Managing the NSS
Upgrading the NSS Firmware
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 130
7
To upgrade the firmware:
STEP 1 Back up the system configuration file on a USB flash device before you upgrade
the firmware. It is advisable to back up the configuration file daily.
STEP 2 Download the latest image from the support website to your local computer.
STEP 3 From the Manager Menu, click Admin Maintenance.
The System Details page appears.
STEP 4 In the Firmware image file: field, either enter the location of the firmware file, or
click Browse to locate it.
STEP 5 Click Upgrade Firmware to initiate the upgrade process. During the upgrade, the
Power LED alternates from yellow to green.
STEP 6 When the firmware upgrade completes, the system automatically reboots. Wait
until the Power LED is solid green before you log back into the configuration
interface. If the upgrade is not successful, a message appears. (The Power LED
appears solid yellow until you click OK after which the system reboots with the
current version of the firmware.)
For more information about the Power and System Error LEDs, see the “NSS LEDs,”
on page155.
STEP 7 After the firmware upgrade is complete, we recommend that you clear your
browser cache before you reconnect to the administrator interface.
Managing the NSS
Upgrading the NSS Firmware in a Virtualized Setup
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 131
7
Upgrading the NSS Firmware in a Virtualized Setup
To upgrade the firmware when you have virtualized storage:
STEP 1 Power down the Master device.
STEP 2 Upgrade the firmware for each slave (one-by-one or in parallel).
STEP 3 Power up the Master device.
STEP 4 Upgrade the firmware for the Master device.
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration
There are two ways to restore configuration settings when you run into a problem
with the NSS: preserve the specific storage configuration but restore everything
else to factory defaults, or reset just the network settings so that you can log into
the NSS configuration interface.
!
CAUTION If you restore the full factory defaults to an NSS in a virtualized setup, you will break
any virtualized RAIDs.
To reset the NSS:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Admin Maintenance.
STEP 2 Depending on the nature of the problem, choose one of the following ways to reset
the configuration:
• Delete the entire configuration with the exception of the storage details:
When you reset the configuration through the configuration interface, the
RAID, volume, share, and quota configuration is maintained. All other
configuration details are restored to factory defaults. Click Restore All
Settings to Factory Defaults.
Managing the NSS
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 132
7
• Reset the Network Settings to Enable you to Access the Configuration
Interface: If there is a problem with the NSS that results in your not being
able to access the NSS configuration interface, you might need to reset the
network settings. This lets you access the interface and make the changes
required to resolve the problem.
To reset the network settings, first shut down the system and power it off.
Press and hold the recessed Reset button on the front panel of the chassis,
and then apply power to the system. Wait until you see the Power LED on
the front of the chassis flash yellow rapidly, and then release the Reset
button.
These settings are reset to their default:
- Link Addressing: DHCP
- Link Bonding Mode: Active Backup
- NSS Hostname: nas<MAC address of primary link> For example,
“nas0123456789ab”
- Network Ports: The network ports are reset to their default as described
in “Configuring the Network Ports,” on page 33.
- VLANs: All configured VLANs are deleted.
- ADS Server: ADS server settings are cleared.
- DNS: DNS settings are cleared.
- Administrator Password: admin
Managing the NSS
Managing the NSS Configuration
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 133
7
- Network Filters: cleared
- Network Default Policy: Accept All
- MTU Size: 1500
Managing the NSS Configuration
You can save the current configuration settings within a configuration file that can
be used to restore the settings at a later time. You can choose to save the
configuration file to a volume on the NSS or you can save the file to a USB flash
device that is inserted into the AUX-1 port on the front of the chassis. When you
save the configuration file, it is time and date stamped and becomes available in
the list of available configuration files when you click the Restore button from the
Configuration Manager page. After you mount the USB flash device by inserting it
into the AUX-1 port, make sure you unmount the USB flash device before you
remove it. (To unmount the USB flash device, display the Storage Status page and
then click Unmount.
NOTE f you restore a configuration file that was saved in an older version of the NSS
firmware than the current version, check the settings after you restore the file to
make sure that they were updated correctly.
To display the Configuration Manager page, from the Manager Menu, click
Admin Configuration.
Managing the NSS
Saving the Current Configuration
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 134
7
The Configuration Manager page appears.
Saving the Current Configuration
You can save a copy of the NSS configuration if you need to restore the settings at
a later time. When you save the configuration file, it saves a date-stamped version
of the current configuration settings to the specified volume on the NSS. You can
save the current configuration settings to a specified volume on the NSS or you
can save the file to a USB flash device inserted into the AUX-1 port.
NOTE If you restore a configuration file that was saved in an older version of the NSS
firmware than the current version, check the settings after you restore the file to
ensure they were updated correctly.
To save the current configuration:
STEP 1 If you are saving the configuration file to a USB flash device, insert a USB flash
device into the AUX-1 port on the NSS chassis.
STEP 2 From the Manager Menu, click Admin Configuration.
Managing the NSS
Saving the Current Configuration
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 135
7
The Configuration Manager page appears.
STEP 3 Select the location where the backup is saved from the Stored Configuration
Location drop-down menu. To save the configuration file to a USB flash device,
select the AUX-1port as the location. You can then copy the configuration file from
the USB flash device to another location on your network.
STEP 4 Click Update.
STEP 5 Click Save to save the configuration settings. If the configuration file does not
successfully save to the specified volume, check the volume and make sure that it
is not locked.
STEP 6 If you saved the file to the USB flash device, display the Storage Status page.
Managing the NSS
Saving the Current Configuration
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 136
7
STEP 7 Click Unmount.
NOTE Removing the USB flash device in a mounted state can cause file or filesystem
corruption.
STEP 8 When the AUX-1 LED on the front of the chassis is off, you can safely remove the
unmounted USB flash device from the AUX-1 port.
Managing the NSS
Restoring a Configuration File
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 137
7
Restoring a Configuration File
You can easily overwrite the current configuration settings with the configuration
settings in a saved configuration file.
NOTE If you restore a configuration file that was saved in an older version of the NSS
firmware than the current version, check the settings after you restore the file to
ensure they were updated correctly.
To restore a configuration file:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Admin Configuration.
The Configuration Manager page appears.
STEP 2 If the configuration file is not located on a volume in the NSS, copy it onto a USB
flash device and then insert the USB flash device into the AUX-1 port.
STEP 3 From the Stored Configuration Location field, select the location of the saved
configuration file.
STEP 4 Click Update.
STEP 5 Click Restore.
Managing the NSS
Restoring a Configuration File
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 138
7
A list of saved configuration files appear. Each saved configuration file is
named according to the time and date it was saved. The naming format is:
HH.MM.SS.NN.DD.YY.tar.gz where HH = hour, MM=minute, SS=second,
NN=month, DD=day, and YY=year.
STEP 6 Set Restore Volume Encryption Password depending on whether you want to
include the encryption keys for the encrypted volumes in the restore.
The NSS configuration backup includes a backup of the encryption header for all
the encrypted volumes (the encryption header contains an encrypted version of
the encryption key used to encrypt the volume data. Including it in the
configuration backup does not decrease the security of the encryption because
this same header would be available to any attacker with physical access to the
system). You can choose to restore these keys or not, depending on the reason
you are doing the restore. If the encryption header on an encrypted volume
becomes corrupted, restoring the header may allow you to unlock the volume.
Also, if you have forgotten the password, you can restore the encryption header.
This lets you revert to the volume password as it was when the configuration file
was saved.
STEP 7 Click Full Restore for the configuration file you want to restore.
STEP 8 Close the Web browser.
STEP 9 After a few minutes the system reboots.
STEP 10 Check the Power LED on the front of the chassis. The Power LED goes to a solid
green when the reboot completes. See the “Power LED (Front Panel),” on
page155 for more information.
STEP 11 Log back into the configuration interface. You need to unlock any encrypted
volumes to make them available for storage purposes.
STEP 12 If you saved the file to the USB flash device, display the Storage Status page.
Managing the NSS
Deleting a Configuration File
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 139
7
STEP 13 Click Unmount.
NOTE Removing the USB flash device in a mounted state can cause file or filesystem
corruption.
STEP 14 When the AUX-1 LED on the front of the chassis is off, you can safely remove the
unmounted USB flash device from the AUX-1 port.
Deleting a Configuration File
Each time you save a configuration file, a copy of it is time and date stamped and
saved to the specified location. You can choose to delete a configuration file.
To delete a configuration file:
Managing the NSS
Configuring the Timing Settings
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 140
7
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Admin Configuration.
The Configuration Manager page appears.
STEP 2 If the configuration file is located in a location on your network, install it onto a USB
flash device and then insert the USB flash device into the AUX-1 port on the front of
the NSS chassis.
STEP 3 Click Restore.
A list of saved configuration files appear.
STEP 4 Click Delete for each configuration file you want to remove.
Configuring the Timing Settings
If you are installing the NSS within the Linksys One environment, the NSS time is
automatically set via the Linksys NTP server.
When you first configure the NSS, ensure that the NSS has successfully
synchronized the time with the NTP server. When the NSS is synchronizing with
the NTP time server, the “Synchronizing time with NTP server” message appears
and the Update button is grayed out. After the synchronization is complete, you
can manually refresh the page by reselecting the NTP Configuration page from
the Manager Menu.
Managing the NSS
Configuring the Timing Settings
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 141
7
If the synchronization failed, the following occurs:
• An error message stating “Could not synchronize with NTP server(s)”
appears in the NTP Configuration page.
• The system alert message “Could not synchronize with NTP server(s)”
appears in the System Status page.
• If the SNMP traps are configured, an SNMP trap message is sent.
To configure the time settings for the NSS:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Admin Time.
The NTP Configuration page appears.
STEP 2 To use an NTP server to maintain the NSS time, click Automatically (via NTP). To
assign the time manually, skip to step 4.
NOTE If the NSS joins to the ADS domain, you must enter the IP address of the domain
controller into the NTP server field and uncheck Assign automatically via DHCP.
Otherwise, the NSS will not join the domain.
Managing the NSS
Configuring the Email Alerts for a Recipient
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 142
7
STEP 3 If your DHCP server is configured to provide NTP settings, select Assign
automatically via DHCP. If not, manually configure the NTP settings. In the NTP
Server fields, enter the IP address or hostname for the NTP servers you wish to
synchronize. The settings in these fields are also used as a fallback if you chose to
get NTP settings from your DHCP server. The NTP servers can be located on your
network or can be public NTP servers located on the Internet. Skip to step 6.
STEP 4 Click Manually.
STEP 5 Enter the date and time in the Date and Time fields.
STEP 6 Select your time zone from the Time Zone drop-down menu.
STEP 7 Click Update.
Configuring the Email Alerts for a Recipient
You can create a list of users that will receive email alerts when changes occur to
the NSS. Changes can include configuration changes (such as the addition of a
volume), physical changes (such as the removal or insertion of a disk), and changes
of state (such as a loss of power). You can customize the user’s email profile to suit
the user’s specific need-to-know requirements.
To configure the NSS for email alerts:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Admin Email Alerts.
Managing the NSS
Configuring the Email Alerts for a Recipient
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 143
7
The Email Alerts page appears.
STEP 2 Enter the SMTP server IP address or name in the SMTP Server field.
STEP 3 Click Update.
STEP 4 To add a new email account, define the following fields in the Alert Recipients &
Types area:
• Email Address: Enter the user’s email address.
• Disk: Check this option to notify the user when a change occurs to the disks
that are installed in the NSS.
• RAID: Check this option to notify the user when a change occurs to a RAID
array.
• Quota: Check this option to notify the user when a change occurs to a
quota.
• Backup: Check this option to notify the user when a backup is run.
• Power: Check this option to notify the user when there is a change of state
of the UPS or RPSU.
STEP 5 Click Add. Click Test All to send a test notification for all checked options to the
defined recipients.
Managing the NSS
Changing the Email Alerts for a Recipient
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 144
7
Changing the Email Alerts for a Recipient
After you define a recipient to receive email alerts, you can only edit the alert
profile by first deleting the existing profile and then recreating it.
To edit the email alerts:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Admin Email Alerts.
The Email Alerts page appears.
STEP 2 Click Delete for the applicable email recipient.
STEP 3 Recreate the email recipient.
STEP 4 Click Add. Click Test All to send a test notification for all checked options to the
defined recipients.
Managing the NSS
Deleting an Email Alert Recipient Profile
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 145
7
Deleting an Email Alert Recipient Profile
To stop sending all email alerts to a user, you can delete the profile at any time. This
is also one of the steps you must take if you want to make changes to the types of
email alerts the user receives.
To delete the email alerts:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Admin Email Alerts.
The Email Alerts page appears.
STEP 2 Click Delete for the applicable email recipient.
Configuring SNMP Alerts
The NSS can send SNMP traps to alert you of various system events. If you
download and install the NSS SNMP MIB, you get a more human readable version
of alerts displayed on your SNMP management station.
To define SNMP Trapsinks:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Admin SNMP.
Managing the NSS
Configuring SNMP Alerts
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 146
7
The SNMP Trapsinks page appears.
STEP 2 To install the NSS MIB on your management station, click Download.
STEP 3 Save and install the MIB to your management station. For more information on
installing and integrating the NSS MIB into your management station, refer to the
management station documentation.
STEP 4 Enter the IP address or hostname for the management station to which you want to
send the alerts.
STEP 5 Select the checkbox for each type of trap sink for which you want to send alerts to
the SNMP server. You can set up an alert for any of the following:
• Disk: When the following occurs: 1) a drive is predicted to fail by S.M.A.R.T.,
2) a drive is above temperature threshold, 3) a volume is more than 90% full.
• RAID: When any of the following occurs: 1) a RAID goes into a degraded
state, 2) a RAID is in a degraded state and will be deactivated (the alert
advises the time at which the RAID will be deactivated), 3) a RAID goes into
a failed state, 4) a RAID is deactivated, 5) a RAID is rebuilt, 6) a RAID is
created.
• Snapshot: When a snapshot reserve is more than 90% full.
• Quota: When a user or group is over their quota.
• Backup: When a backup job completes.
• UPS: When any of the following occurs: 1) the UPS goes online, 2) the UPS
goes on battery, 3) the battery is low, 4) the NSS establishes contact with
Managing the NSS
Changing the Administrator Password
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 147
7
the UPS, 5) the NSS loses contact with the UPS (after communication was
successfully established), 6) the UPS is about to shut down the system, 7)
the UPS battery needs to be replaced, 8) the NSS cannot talk to the UPS.
STEP 6 Click Add.
The management station appears in the Existing SNMP Trapsinks list.
STEP 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each SNMP server address to which you want to
send alerts.
STEP 8 To send a test alert for each of the selected conditions to all configured trapsinks,
click Test All. To delete an existing SNMP Trapsink, click Delete.
Changing the Administrator Password
You should change the administrator password from the default to ensure that only
authorized individuals can access the NSS configuration interface. If you forget the
administrator password, you can only reset it by pressing the Reset button on the
NSS chassis and restoring the factory defaults. The default password is “admin.”
To set up the administrator password:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Admin Password.
The Admin Password Configuration page appears.
Managing the NSS
Changing the Administrator Password
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 148
7
STEP 2 Enter the current password in the Current Password field.
STEP 3 Enter the new password in the New Password field.
STEP 4 Re-enter the new password in the Confirm Password field.
STEP 5 Click Update.
The new password takes effect immediately. The next configuration interface
page that you access prompts you for the new password.
8
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 149
Accessing the Storage
Logging into a Share
End users, using a Windows, UNIX, Linux, or Mac computer can easily access the
NSS storage. Once the end user logs into the NSS using their username and
password, the shares to which the end user has read or read-write privileges
appear. The NSS supports three file-sharing protocols: CIFS, NFS, and FTP. The
steps to access the NSS storage depend on which file-sharing protocol the end
user chooses to use: CIFS, NFS, or FTP as well as the end user’s operating system.
Logging into the CIFS Shares with Administrator Privileges
To log into CIFS shares with administrator privileges:
STEP 1 There are a variety of ways to access the CIFS shares on the NSS. As the
administrator, you also have read-write access to a hidden share called "storage".
This share gives access to all data on the system (including user home directories).
As the administrator, you can read, write, and delete all files and folders regardless
of who owns them. For this reason, make sure that you change the default
administrator password.
• From the My Computer window, type the NSS \\<hostname> or <IP
address > in the Address bar. (Where the <hostname> refers to your NSS
hostname and <IP address > refers to the IP address of your NSS. For
example, "\\NAS0123456789ab" or "\\192.168.1.2".) To access the hidden
storage folder, type the hostname or IP address followed by "\storage". For
example, "\\NAS0123456789ab\storage".
• Browse for the NSS from the My Network Places window. To access the
hidden storage folder, make sure that you add "\storage" to the address.
• Map the NSS to a network drive. To access the hidden storage folder, make
sure that you add "\storage" to the address.
Accessing the Storage
Windows Users: Accessing the Storage by using CIFS/SMB
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 150
8
STEP 2 From the Login window, enter the user name "admin" and then enter your
administrator password.
STEP 3 Click OK.
Windows Users: Accessing the Storage by using CIFS/SMB
Windows users who have a user profile set up can access any shares to which
they have privileges on the NSS storage using CIFS/SMB.
To access the NSS storage using CIFS/SMB:
STEP 1 Choose one of these options to access the NSS.
• From the My Computer window, type \\<hostname> or \\<IP address> in
the Address bar. (Where the <hostname> refers to your NSS hostname and
<IP address> refers to your NSS IP address. For example,
"\\NAS0123456789ab or \\192.168.1.2".)
• Browse for the NSS from the My Network Places window.
• Map the NSS to a network drive.
The Login window appears.
STEP 2 If your user profile is set up locally (that is, through the NSS configuration interface)
and the NSS is part of a Windows domain, in the User name field, enter the
following: <NSS hostname>\<username>. If your user profile is set up through the
domain or the NSS is not joined to a domain, you do not need to enter the NSS
hostname before your user name. (Just enter your user name and then your
password.)
STEP 3 Click OK.
The Windows Explorer window opens with a directory listing of the available
shares.
STEP 4 Depending on your share privileges, you can begin using the NSS storage.
Accessing the Storage
Windows Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 151
8
Windows Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP
Windows users who have a user profile set up can access any shares to which
they have privileges on the NSS storage using CIFS/SMB or FTP. Note that when
using FTP to access the NSS storage, users cannot rename folders. To rename a
folder, use CIFS or NFS if enabled on the share.
NOTE Before your end users can access the shares on the NSS using FTP, the NSS must
have FTP access enabled and the individual share must be set up to allow FTP
access.
To access the NSS storage using FTP:
STEP 1 From your FTP client application, connect to the NSS. Enter the IP address or
hostname of the NSS. For more information about using your FTP client
application, refer to its documentation.
STEP 2 Enter your username and password when prompted by your FTP client.
When your FTP client has logged in, a list of accessible shares appears as
individual directories.
STEP 3 Depending on your share privileges, you can begin using the NSS storage.
Mac Users: Accessing the Storage by using CIFS/SMB
Mac users who have a user profile can access any shares to which they have
privileges on the NSS storage using CIFS/SMB.
To access the NSS storage through CIFS/SMB:
STEP 1 From the Finder’s Go menu, click Connect to Server.
STEP 2 Enter "smb://<hostname or IP address of the NSS>/<sharename>. (Where the
information in the brackets is meant to be replaced with the applicable information.
Do not type the brackets.)
Click the "+" sign to save the NSS address to the Favorite Servers list so that the
next time you log in you just need to select the address from the list.
Accessing the Storage
Mac Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 152
8
STEP 3 Click Connect.
STEP 4 When the Login window appears, enter your username and password. If your user
profile is set up locally (that is, through the NSS configuration interface and not
through the ADS or NTv4 domain) and the NSS is joined to a domain, you need to
enter the following: <NSS hostname>\<user name>. If the NSS is not joined to a
domain, just enter the username.
STEP 5 Depending on your share privileges, you can begin using the NSS storage.
Mac Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP
Mac users who have a user profile can access any shares to which they have
privileges on the NSS storage using FTP. However, they cannot rename folders
when using FTP to access the NSS storage. To rename a folder, use CIFS or NFS if
it is enabled on the share.
NOTE Before your end users can access the shares on the NSS using FTP, the NSS must
have FTP access enabled and the individual share must be set up to allow FTP
access.
To access the NSS storage using FTP:
STEP 1 Open your FTP client application.
STEP 2 Click Connect.
STEP 3 From your FTP client application, connect to the NSS. Enter the IP address or
hostname of the NSS. For more information about using your FTP client
application, refer to its documentation.
STEP 4 Enter your username and password when prompted by your FTP client.
When your FTP client has logged in, a list of accessible shares appears as
individual directories.
STEP 5 Depending on your share privileges, you can begin using the NSS storage.
Accessing the Storage
UNIX/Linux Users: Accessing the Storage by using NFS
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 153
8
UNIX/Linux Users: Accessing the Storage by using NFS
UNIX and Linux users can access shares on the NSS through NFS. Due to the way
that the NSS implements NFS file access privileges, only NFSv3 is supported. In
order for NFS access privileges to work correctly, you must have the NSS joined to
an NIS domain.
NOTE You must have root privileges to your client system to create an NFS mount. Before
an end user can access the shares on the NSS through NFS, NFS must be enabled
on the NSS and the individual share set up to allow NFS access.
To access the NSS storage through FTP:
STEP 1 Log into the client system as root.
STEP 2 Create a mount point directory for the mount if you do not already have one (e.g.,
mkdir /mnt/nas_share1).
STEP 3 Mount the NFS share by typing "mount -v -t nfs -o
nfsvers=3,rsize=32768,wsize=32768 <IP address/hostname>:<mount point path
on NSS> <mount point path on client>". The mount point path on the NSS appears
in the Shares page.
STEP 4 Log out of the root account.
STEP 5 Log into the user account on the client system.
You can now access the share though the mount point directory on your client.
You have the share privileges as are defined for the NSS.
Accessing the Storage
UNIX/Linux Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 154
8
UNIX/Linux Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP
UNIX and Linux users who have a user profile set up can access any shares to
which they have privileges on the NSS storage using NFS or FTP. Note that when
using FTP to access the NSS storage, users cannot rename folders. To rename a
folder, use CIFS or NFS if enabled on the share.
NOTE Before your end users can access the shares on the NSS using FTP, the NSS
network filters must be set up to allow FTP access. The individual share must be
also be set up to allow FTP access.
To access the NSS storage using FTP:
STEP 1 Open your FTP client application.
STEP 2 Enter the NSS hostname/IP address.
STEP 3 Enter any other required settings. If using FTPS, ensure that the client is set to use
Explicit FTPS. For more help using the FTP client, refer to the FTP client
documentation.
STEP 4 Enter your username and password when prompted by the FTP client.
STEP 5 Depending on your share privileges, you can begin using the NSS storage.
A
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 155
Troubleshooting
NSS LEDs
The LEDs on the front and the back of the NSS chassis help you troubleshoot a
variety of conditions on the NSS, from normal operating conditions, alerts, to
serious error conditions. The Reset button lets you restore the network defaults in
situations where you can no longer log into the configuration interface.
Power LED (Front Panel)
The Power LED shows whether the NSS is receiving power and is functioning
properly. These are the LED colors and their meanings:
• Solid Yellow: The NSS is powered on and the boot loader is currently
running. The boot loader runs for approximately 10 seconds when the NSS
first starts up, and then the LED blinks green.
This condition also occurs if the firmware upgarde fails (although in this
case, the LED remains in a solid yellow condition until the user clicks OK
from the System Details page following an unsuccessful upload. After the
user clicks OK, the system reboots using the current version of the
firmware.
• Blinking Yellow: The network configuration factory defaults are being reset.
When resetting the network defaults, hold down the Reset button until you
see the Power LED flash yellow rapidly.
• Solid Green: The NSS is powered up and finished booting.
• Blinking Green: The NSS is either booting up or shutting down.
• Alternating Yellow & Green: The firmware update is currently in progress.
• Off: The NSS is either disconnected from a power source or has finished
the shutdown process and can be safely disconnected from a
power source.
Troubleshooting
NSS LEDs
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 156
A
System LED (Front Panel)
The System (SYS) LED indicates that a system error has occurred on the NSS.
These are the LED colors and their meanings:
• Solid Yellow: Indicates one of these error conditions. You can view the error
through the NSS configuration interface.
- A volume is more than 90% full.
- A disk drive has failed or is about to fail.
- A fan has stalled.
- The system temperature is above the maximum threshold.
- The temperature of a disk drive is above the maximum threshold.
- A voltage rail is above or below specification.
- The NSS is running on UPS due to a mains power failure.
• Solid Red: Indicates a critical system failure. The system could not boot due
to a corrupted firmware image.
• Off: There are no system-related problems
Reset Button (Front Panel)
The Reset button lets you restore the network setting system defaults or reset
the box.
• To restore the network setting system defaults: You need to do this if the
configuration interface becomes inaccessible. To reset the network setting
system defaults, shut down the NSS, power it off, hold down the Reset
button, and then power up the NSS. When you see the Power LED blink
yellow rapidly, release the Reset button. The network settings are restored
to factory defaults.
• To reset the box: Press and hold the Reset button while the system is
running until the Power LED begins to blink green. Release the Reset button.
Troubleshooting
Hard Disk Drive LEDs
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 157
A
LAN LED (Front Panel)
The LAN LED shows the status of the Ethernet link. These are the LED colors and
their meanings:
• Solid Green: The LAN link is up and running at 1000 link speed, but is
currently idle.
• Flickering Green: The LAN link is up and running at 1000 link speed and is
currently active. The LED flickers off with activity.
• Solid Yellow: The LAN link is up and running at 10/100 link speed, but is
currently idle.
• Flickering Yellow: The LAN link is up and running at 10/100 link speed and
is currently active. The LED flickers off with activity.
• Off: No LAN link is detected.
Hard Disk Drive LEDs
These LEDs shows the disk-drive activity, the error conditions, and locate statte of
the .installed disk drives.
The green LED indicates drive activity. These are the LED colors and their
meanings.
• Solid Green: The disk drive is configured but is currently idle.
• Flickering Green: The disk drive is configured, active, and not rebuilding.
Flickers off with activity.
• Blinking Green: The disk drive is configured and a RAID array is currently
rebuilding to the disk drive.
• Off: The disk drive is not configured (not part of a RAID or JBOD array and
not exported).
The red LED means that the drive is in an error condition. These are the LED colors
and their meanings
• Solid Red: The drive is in a failed state.
• Blinking Red: The drive is predicated to fail (via S.M.A.R.T.). We recommend
that you replace the drive to avoid the loss of data.
Troubleshooting
Repairing a Degraded Array
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 158
A
• Off: The drive is OK.
The white LED means that that there is a locate request currently on the disk drive:
• Blinking White: There is a locate request currently on the disk drive (see
“Storage Status,” on page 6 page on the configuration interface). There can
only be one locate request set for a disk drive at one time.
• Off: The disk drive is not marked by a locate request.
USB LED (Front Panel)
• Solid Green: The USB hard/flash drive is connected and is not safe to
remove.
• Blinking Green: The USB hard/flash drive is connected and is being
mounted or unmounted.
• Off: There is either no USB hard/flash drive connected to the NSS, or, if
connected, the USB hard/flash drive is safe to remove.
UPS LED (Back Panel)
• Off: There is either no UPS attached to the NSS or the UPS function has
been disabled in the System Power page in the configuration interface.
• On: A UPS is attached to the NSS and the UPS function is enabled in the
System Power page in the configuration interface.
For more information about the UPS, refer to the UPS documentation.
Repairing a Degraded Array
If a RAID level 1, 5, or 10 is in a degraded state (that is, a redundant disk drive has
failed), you can replace the failed disk drive(s). (You might be able to use some of
the data on a JBOD if there are volumes that do not span across the failed disk.
Otherwise, you must rebuild the JBOD after you replace the disk.) If an array with
no redundancy has a failed disk drive, you must delete the array, replace the disk
drive, and then recreate the array.
Troubleshooting
Repairing a Degraded Array
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 159
A
NOTE When adding disks to an array, we recommend you use the same model of disk with
the same capacity. The new disk must have at least the same capacity of the
smallest disk currently in the array. With the exception of a JBOD, RAIDs are
configured to use the maximum of the smallest disk capacity in the array for each
additional disk in the array. For example, if you install two, 250 GB disks and one 500
GB disk, the total capacity is 750 GB.
To add a disk to a degraded array:
STEP 1 If you are replacing a disk, remove the failed drive from the NSS and install the
replacement disk.
STEP 2 From the Manager Menu, click Storage RAID.
The RAID page appears.
STEP 3 In the RAID Arrays table, click Edit for the applicable RAID array.
Troubleshooting
Working with a Failed Array
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 160
A
The RAID Configuration page appears.
STEP 4 Available disk drives appear in the listing. Click Add to add the disk drive to
the array.
The RAID array is rebuilt for the added or changed redundant disk drive. While
the rebuild continues, the array can still be used. After the rebuild process
completes, the disk becomes part of the redundant storage. You can monitor
the progress of the rebuild through the System Status page.
Working with a Failed Array
If a RAID is in a failed state, the data on the array is not recoverable. You need to
delete the array, replace the disk drive, and then configure a new array.
To create an array when an array fails:
STEP 1 Remove the failed drive from the NSS and install the replacement disk. (This step
can be done out of order as long as it is installed before you configure the new
array.)
STEP 2 Reboot the NSS. Make sure that you do a safe reboot using the Reboot function.
See ”Rebooting or Shutting Down the NSS” on page 127.
STEP 3 When the system reboots, log back into the configuration interface.
Troubleshooting
Drive Error LED Remains On
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 161
A
STEP 4 From the Manager Menu, click Storage RAID.
The RAID page appears. The failed array appears with a status of "Stopped".
STEP 5 Click Delete.
The disk drives used in the failed array become part of the available storage.
STEP 6 Create a new array as required.
Once built, you can set up the volumes, shares, and quotas for the array. If the
failed array contained the volume used as the Home Directory Location, set the
location to the volume you want to use.
Drive Error LED Remains On
If a drive that is part of a RAID array is accidentally removed and is then
subsequently reinserted into the chassis, the drive Error LED might will become lit.
This means that the drive was rejected from the array.
To resolve the problem:
STEP 1 Remove the drive from the chassis, and then reinsert it.
The Error LED for that drive clears.
STEP 2 If the array did not fail as a result of the original removal of the drive, add the drive
back into the array. If the array failed, follow the steps to recreate the failed array.
Firmware Attempt is Unsuccessful
If a problem occurs when updating the firmware, check the following:
• If a copy of the firmware is saved to a disk on the NSS, make sure that you
copied it to another location (such as onto a PC). You cannot install firmware
that is saved to a disk on the NSS.
• Verify that the firmware is compatible with the NSS platform.
• Verify that the firmware is newer than the version that is currently installed.
The system does not support downgrades.
Troubleshooting
Free Bound Virtualized Storage when the Master System Fails
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 162
A
• If you are upgrading within a virtualized setup, make sure that you installed
the firmware in the order described in ”Upgrading the NSS Firmware” on
page 129.
To update the firmware after a failed attempt:
STEP 1 Click OK when the message appears from the System Details page that the
firmware upgrade was not successful.
The system automatically reboots using the current firmware version. The
Power LED blinks green and then goes solid green when the reboot
completes.
STEP 2 Go through the steps to upgrade the firmware.
Free Bound Virtualized Storage when the Master System Fails
A storage system is bound to a failed storage system and rejects any bind
requests from other systems.
Follow these steps to recreate the problem:
STEP 1 Export storage from System A.
STEP 2 Import storage from System A to System B.
STEP 3 System B crashes and cannot be recovered.
STEP 4 System A is "bound" to System B and rejects any new bind requests from other
systems.
To resolve the problem:
STEP 1 Unexport the bound storage system (in our example, System A).
STEP 2 Re-export the storage system.
The storage system is now available to be used by another system.
Troubleshooting
All CIFS Connections were Unexpectedly Ended
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 163
A
All CIFS Connections were Unexpectedly Ended
If all current CIFS connections to the NSS were unexpectedly severed, check to
see if the the hostname the Network Identification page was changed. Changing
the hostname severs any current CIFS connections to the NSS.
To resolve the problem, change the name back to the original hostname.
Hotplugging the Ethernet Link doesn’t Reset IP or Link Rate
When you disconnect the Ethernet link and reconnect it, the IP address and link
rate does not reset. For example, if you unplug a cable from the NSS to a 100
Mbps switch and then reconnect the NSS to a 1 Gps switch, the link is
not restored.
To resolve the problem:
STEP 1 Unplug the Ethernet link.
STEP 2 Wait at least 15 seconds.
STEP 3 Reconnect the link.
STEP 4 Wait 10 seconds.
The link is re-established. You can view the status from the System Status page
on the configuration interface.
Unable to Create a Share or Quota for a Volume
When you attempt to create a share, the volume does not appear in the Location
field. When you try to create a quota, the quota is not successfully added for
the volume.
The problem is likely caused by the volume being locked. An encrypted volume is
automatically locked whenever the NSS is rebooted or is manually locked through
the configuration interface. As long as the volume is locked, you cannot use the
volume to create shares or quotas (you can however, set up the Home Directory).
Troubleshooting
Cannot Access the NSS through FTP
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 164
A
To resolve the problem:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Storage Volumes.
If the problem is due to the volume being locked, the Unlock button appears next
to the volume in the Action column.
STEP 2 Click Unlock.
STEP 3 Enter the password for the volume.
STEP 4 Click OK.
You can now be create a share or quota for the volume.
Cannot Access the NSS through FTP
Users attempt to log into the NSS through FTP but are unable to access their home
directory or shares on the NSS.
To resolve the problem, you need to configure these settings to enable
FTP access:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Shares FTP Setup.
STEP 2 Make sure that Enable FTP is selected. (You can go through the settings on this
page to ensure they are correctly defined.)
STEP 3 Close the FTP Setup page.
STEP 4 From the Manager Menu, click Shares Shares.
STEP 5 Click Edit for the applicable share.
STEP 6 Make sure the FTP protocol is selected, and then click Update.
STEP 7 From the Manager Menu, click Access Network.
STEP 8 Make sure there are no filters set up to drop or reject FTP access for the
applicable IP or MAC addresses.
Troubleshooting
Cannot Rename a Folder through FTP
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 165
A
Cannot Rename a Folder through FTP
Users attempt to log into the NSS through FTP but are unable to rename a folder.
Renaming of folders is not a supported FTP standard.
To rename a folder, users must log into the NSS through NFS or CIFS (provided that
these are supported protocols).
Configuration Page Does not Appear in Internet Explorer
If you click a configuration page and the page does not appear, this is a caching
problem with the Internet Explorer browser.
Follow these steps to resolve the problem (These steps only apply to Internet
Explorer version 6.0. The steps for other versions might vary slightly):
STEP 1 From the Internet Explorer browser window, click Tools Internet Options.
STEP 2 Click General, and then click Settings.
The Settings window appears.
STEP 3 Under the Check for newer versions of stored pages: section, click
Automatically.
STEP 4 Set the Amount of disk space to use to 1 MB.
STEP 5 Click OK.
Handling an Unexpected (Unclean) Shutdown
The best way to shut down the NSS is to use the Shut Down command from the
System Details page on the configuration interface or by using the Power button
on the front of the chassis.
If the power to the NSS is unexpectedly disrupted, causing the NSS to do an
unclean shutdown, the system settings (including time) might be altered. The
Administrator is notified of the unclean shutdown in three possible ways:
Troubleshooting
Boosting the Performance of NFS Transfers
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 166
A
• When the NSS powers up, an SNMP trap sends a notification.
• When the Administrator first logs into the configuration pages following the
shutdown, a message appears.
• An email is sent to the defined email address if the Administrator is set up to
receive an email for power loss. .
Following an unclean shutdown of the NSS:
STEP 1 Do one of the following:
• Review/Edit the System Settings Manually: Go through each setting,
including the time setting to make sure that nothing has been negatively
altered. If you make changes to the settings, we highly recommend that you
take a USB backup.
• Back up the System Settings from a USB Backup: If you have a valid
backup on a USB flash device, it might be easier to restore the system
settings from the backup (versus manually going through and checking
each system setting).
STEP 2 If you attempt either of the above unsuccessfully, restore the configuration
settings back to the factory defaults, and then either restore the configuration
settings from a USB flash device backup or manually edit the settings.
NOTE The factory default administrator password is "admin".
Boosting the Performance of NFS Transfers
You can substantially improve the NFS performance by increasing the size of read
and write buffers on the client. These buffers are sized at 4 KB by default but can
be changed at mount time.
For example: mount -v -t nfs 192.168.1.1:/mnt/RAIDA/vol1/share1 /mnt/client -o
nfsvers=3,rsize=32768,wsize=32768
where:
• 192.168.1.1 is the IP address of the NSS system
• /mnt/RAIDA/vol1/share1 is the path to the share
Troubleshooting
Rejoining the ADS Domain after a Failed to Join
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 167
A
• /mnt/client is the mount point on the client
• The size of the read and write buffers is 32 KB.
Rejoining the ADS Domain after a Failed to Join
To rejoin to the ADS domain after a failed to join:
STEP 1 From the Manager Menu, click Admin Time.
The NTP Configuration page appears. Enter the IP address of the ADS domain
(2000/2003/2008 server machine) into the NTP Server fields and then
click Update.
STEP 2 From the Manager Menu, click Network DNS/WINS.
The Network Name Resolution page appears.
STEP 3 Enter the ADS domain name into the Search Domain field and the IP address of the
ADS domain into the Primary DNS Server field and then click Update.
STEP 4 From the Manager Menu, click Network Identification.
The Network Identification page appears. Enter the Administrator password
and click Update to rejoin the ADS domain.
B
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 168
Specifications
This appendix lists the technical specifications for the NSS4000 and NSS6000
Network Storage Systems.
Technical Specifications
Device Dimensions 17.32 x 1.73” x 16.54 ” (440 x 44 x 420 mm)
Unit Weight NSS4000: 24.25 lb (11 kg):
NSS6000: 20.99 lb (9.52 kg)
Power 150W Power Supply
Operating Temperature 32 to 113°F (0° to 45°C)
Storage Temperature -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 10 to 90%, Relative humidity non-condensing
Storage Humidity 10 to 95%, Relative humidity non-condensing
C
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 169

Where to Go From Here
Cisco provides a wide range of resources to help you and your customer obtain
the full benefits of the Linksys Network Storage System.
Product Resources
Resource Location
Technical Documentation www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps9957/
tsd_products_support_series_home.html
Firmware Downloads www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps9957/index.html
Customer Support www.cisco.com/en/US/support/
tsd_cisco_small_business_support_center_contacts.html
Warranty and End User
License Agreement
www.cisco.com/go/warranty
Open Source
License Notices
www.cisco.com/go/osln
Regulatory Compliance
and Safety Information
www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps9957/
tsd_products_support_series_home.html
Cisco Partner Central site
for Small Business
www.cisco.com/web/partners/sell/smb
D
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 170
Glossary of Storage-related Terms
and Acronyms
A
ACL: Access Control List. Used within network security systems to allow selective
use of services. An Access Control List is used to control access to, and denial of,
services. It lists the services available with a corresponding list of the hosts
permitted to use the service.
Active Directory: A Microsoft directory service for use in Windows environments.
Administrators use Active Directory to assign enterprise wide policies, deploy
programs to many computers, and apply critical updates to an entire organization.
Active Directory functions much like an online phone book, storing information
about resources on the network while providing a means of centrally organizing,
managing, and controlling access to these resources.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): A block cipher adopted as an encryption
standard by the U.S. government.
Aggregation: The act of collecting something together. In Network Storage
Aggregation, you can put together pieces of networked storage into one, logical
storage unit.
B
Bonjour: Apple’s version of the Zeroconf. Used to automatically configure devices
and discover services on an IP network, Bonjour is the most widely used
implementation of Zeroconf. On the Mac, Bonjour lets Safari Web browser users
find the Zeroconf-enabled Web servers in the network. Web servers are widely
used not just for HTML pages, but function as control panels for a variety of
network devices such as routers and Webcams. There is also a Bonjour plug-in for
Internet Explorer which is used to discover Bonjour-enabled network printers and
devices. (It was originally named Rendezvous.)
Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 171
D
C
CIFS: Common Internet Filesystem. A protocol that evolved out of SMB (Server
Message Block). CIFS is an application-level network protocol mainly used to
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between
nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process
communication mechanism. It is mainly used by Microsoft Windows-equipped
computers.
Coldplug: Often taken to mean the opposite of hotplugging. In other words, the
inability of a computer system to add or remove hardware without powering the
system down.
D
DAS: Direct Attached Storage. Also referred as Server Attached Storage and
Captive Storage. The storage device (such as disk drive or RAID array) is directly
attached to a computer. The computer uses various adapters and standardized
protocols, such as SCSI and Fibre Channel, to access the storage device.
DFS: Distributed Filesystem. This system, developed by Microsoft, lets you build a
hierarchical view of multiple file servers and shares on the network.
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Software that dynamically assigns IP
addresses to devices on a TCP/IP network. DHCP software typically runs in
servers and is also found in network devices such as ISDN routers and modem
routers that allow multiple users access to the Internet. Newer DHCP servers
dynamically update the DNS servers after making assignments.
DiffServ (Differentiated Services): A scalable IP Layer 3 method for classifying,
managing network traffic, and providing QoS (Quality of Service) guarantees on an
IP network. DiffServ is often used to provide low-latency, guaranteed service to
time-sensitive network traffic like voice or video while concurrently providing
best-effort traffic guarantees to non-time sensitive Web traffic (such as email) or
file transfers.
Disk Quotas: For NAS devices, a limit set by a network administrator that restricts
certain aspects of filesystem usage. There are four types of disk quotas: 1) Usage
(or block) quota sets a limit on the amount of storage space (measured in MB or
GB) that connected users or groups can use, 2) File (or inode) quota sets a limit for
a specific number of directories or files that connected users or groups can use, 3)
Usage or File quotas are considered Hard quotas, 4) Soft quota is a way, set by the
administrator, to define a warning level that alerts users that they are nearing their
specified hard quota limit.
Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 172
D
Disk Tax/Disk Overhead: The limitation of hard disk drive (HDD) capacity when
specific RAID configurations that use mirroring or redundancy are applied to an
array.
DNS: Domain Name System (or Service or Server). An Internet service that
translates domain names into IP addresses. While domain names are alphabetic
and easier to remember, the Internet uses IP addresses. When you use a domain
name, a DNS service must translate the name into the corresponding IP address.
The DNS system is its own network. If one DNS server does not know how to
translate a particular domain name, it asks another one, and so on, until the correct
IP address is returned.
Domain: The name that identifies a computer connected to the Internet. For
example, www.google.com. The "www." refers to the connection to the World
Wide Web; the middle portion of a domain name is usually the name of the
company that owns the computer (in this case, Google). The final portion of a
domain name tells you what kind of site is served by this machine. In this case,
.com means this is a commercial site. Other categories include: .net, .org, .edu, .fr,
.uk, etc. All devices sharing a common part of the IP address share that domain.
dotted quad: This refers to the IP address number.The dotted quad is a unique
number format made up of four parts separated by dots. For example,
116.112.96.2.
E
ext2: Second extended filesystem. A native filesystem for the Linux kernel. It was
initially designed to replace the extended filesystem (ext). It is fast enough that it is
used as the benchmarking standard. Although ext2 is not a journaling filesystem,
its successor, ext3, provides journaling and is almost completely compatible with
ext2.
ext3: Third Extended Filesystem. A journalled filesystem that is commonly used by
the Linux operating system. Unlike its predecessor, ext2, the journaling support
alleviates lengthy filesystem checks (fsck) at bootup after a sudden system crash,
reset, or power loss. It is the default filesystem for many popular Linux
distributions.
Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 173
D
F
FAT32: File Allocation Table. Microsoft developed this partially patented
filesystem for MS-DOS. It is the primary filesystem for consumer versions of
Microsoft Windows up to and including Windows Me. Because it is considered
relatively simple, the FAT filesystem is supported by virtually all existing operating
systems for personal computers. This ubiquity makes it an ideal format for floppy
disks and solid-state memory cards, and a convenient way of sharing data
between disparate operating systems installed on the same computer (a dual
boot environment). The most common implementations have a serious drawback
in that when files are deleted and new files written to the media, their fragments
tend to become scattered over the entire media, making reading and writing a
slow process. Defragmentation is one solution to this, but is often a lengthy
process in itself and has to be repeated regularly to keep the FAT filesystem clean.
To overcome the volume size limit of FAT16, while still allowing DOS real-mode
code to handle the format without unnecessarily reducing the available
conventional memory, Microsoft decided to implement a newer generation of FAT,
known as FAT32, with cluster counts held in a 32-bit field, of which 28 bits are
currently used.
File Sharing Protocol: A high-level network protocol that provides the structure
and language for file requests between clients and servers, including the
commands for opening, reading, writing and closing files across the network. It
may also provide access to the directory services. It is sometimes referred to as a
"client/server protocol" and functions at the application layer (layer 7 of the OSI
model). In order for a client to have access to multiple servers running different
operating systems, either the client supports the file sharing protocol of each
operating system or the server supports the file sharing protocol of each client.
Software that adds this capability is very common and allows interoperability
between Windows, Macintosh, NetWare and Unix platforms. Examples of file
sharing protocols include: CIFS/SMB (Windows), and NFS (UNIX).
FTP: File Transfer Protocol. FTP is a standard Internet protocol that uses the
Internet’s TCP/IP protocols to exchange files between computers on the Internet.
FTP can be used to transfer, download, and upload files individually or in batch
form.
FTPS: File Transfer Protocol over SSL. FTPS is similar to the standard FTP but
because it operates over an encrypted link (SSL), it is a more secure way to
transfer files over the Internet. The NSS supports Explicit FTPS (versus Implicit
FTPS). Explicit FTPS is named for the command issued to indicate that TLS
security should be used. This is the preferred method according to the RFC
defining FTP over TLS. The client connects to the server port 21 and starts an
unencrypted FTP session as normal, but requests that TLS security be used and
performs the appropriate handshake before sending any sensitive data.
Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 174
D
G
Gigabit: Also Gbit or Gb. A unit of information or data storage equivalent to
1,000,000,000 (1 billion) bits.
Gigabtye (GB): A unit of information or data storage equivalent to 1,000,000,000 (1
billion) bytes.
H
High Availability: A term applied to a class of electronic devices where a system
design protocol has been applied and implemented to ensure a higher/improved
degree of operational continuity during a given measurement period.
Hotplug: The ability to add or remove hardware without first powering down the
system.
I
IEEE 802.1ad: Protocols that provide separate instances of MAC services to
multiple independent users on a bridged LAN (local area network) in a way that
does not require cooperation among the users, but does require a minimum of
cooperation between users and the MAC service provider.
IEEE 802.1p: An IEEE standard that provides quality of service (QoS) in 802-based
networks at the MAC level. 802.1p uses three bits (defined in 802.1q) to allow
switches to reorder packets based on priority level (traffic class expediting and
dynamic multicast filtering). It also defines the Generic Attributes Registration
Protocol (GARP) and the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP). GARP lets
client stations request membership in a multicast domain, and GVRP lets them
register into a VLAN. Eight different classes of service are available, expressed
through three extra bits on the Ethernet Frame. The way traffic is treated when
assigned to any particular class is undefined and left to the implementation. The
IEEE however has made some broad recommendations. 802.1p is used within the
IEEE 802.1D and IEEE 802.1Q standards.
IEEE 802.1Q: An Ethernet, Layer 2 standard for providing VLAN identification and
QoS (Quality of Service) levels for devices on a network. This is achieved by
adding four bytes to the Ethernet frame header of a data packet (three bits of
which assign up to eight priority or QoS levels and 12 bits identify up to 4096
VLANs).
Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 175
D
IEEE 802.1X: Standard for port-based network access control that authenticates
devices attached to a LAN port. This standard establishes connection to a
network and its connected resources if authentication is approved, and
conversely, prevents access to the network if authentication fails. An
authentication server resides in each Cisco Small Business NSS product.
J
JBOD: Just a Bunch of Disks. Multiple hard disk drives (HDDs) that are combined
into a single virtual drive. In a JBOD configured array, each drive can be a different
size or capacity (this storage method can be used to turn two or more odd-sized
hard drives into one useful drive). There is no redundancy provided with a JBOD
and the failure of one disk in the array usually results in the loss of the data stored
on the JBOD.
Journaling Filesystem: A fault-resilient filesystem that provides data integrity
because updates to directories and bitmaps are constantly written to a serial log
on disk before the original disk log is updated. If the system fails, a full journaling
filesystem restores the data on the disk to its pre-crash configuration. It also
recovers unsaved data and stores it in the location where it would have gone if the
computer had not crashed. This type of system is beneficial for mission-critical
systems. A physical journal logs verbatim copies of blocks that will be written later
(for example, ext3) as compared with a logical journal that logs metadata changes
in a special, more compact format. Logical journals can improve performance by
reducing the amount of data that needs to be read from and written to the journal
in large, metadata-heavy operations (for example, deleting a large directory tree).
XFS keeps a logical journal.
L
LCD: Stands for Liquid Crystal Display and is a display technology that uses liquid
crystals that flow like liquid and bend light. The LCD appears on the front of the
NSS3000 chassis and can be used to determine various status details about the
NSS3000.
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol): A protocol that lets users find
organizations, workgroups, other users, network resources (such as directories,
volumes, files) or peripheral devices (such as printers and NAS devices) on a local
network, in a intranet or on the Internet without knowing the specific domain where
they reside. A single LDAP directory can be mirrored on multiple servers that can
be periodically synchronized.
Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 176
D
Link Aggregation Group: (LAG) A computer networking term used to describe
using multiple Ethernet network cables/ports in parallel to increase the link speed
beyond the limits of any one single cable or port. Other terms for this also include
"ethernet trunk", "NIC teaming", "port teaming", "port trunking", "NIC bonding" and
"link aggregate group" (LAG), and is based on a networking standard known as
"IEEE 802.3ad".
M
MDFS (Microsoft Distributed Filesystem): see DFS.
Mirroring: For NAS devices, the automated process of simultaneously writing data
to two (or more) hard disk drives. Mirroring creates a redundant repository of data,
such that if one of the hard disk drives (HDD) fails, the redundant drive continues to
provide access to the stored data for connected users. Network administrators
can then replace the failed drive with a new drive that can be re-mirrored to the
good drive. RAID level 1 uses mirroring.
MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures): A measurement of hardware product
reliability typically indicated in thousands, tens of thousands, or hundreds of
thousands of operational hours between failures. It is most often defined as the
average time between failures. MTBF can be derived from extensive and time
intensive testing of the working product, calculated from actual product field
performance (depending on the product, its market, its usage, and the ability to
retrieve accurate usage data), or from a calculated prediction based on known
factors. Manufacturers provide MTBF as a reference of the product’s, or its
subcomponent’s reliability. Customers can use the MTBF to determine their
service needs to maintain or replace the product.
N
NAS (Network Attached Storage): A data storage device on a computer network
to provide a centralized repository of data that can be shared and accessed by
other end-users or workgroups on the network. The Cisco Small Business NSS
products are NAS devices.
NFS: Network Filesystem. A protocol suite developed and licensed by Sun
Microsystems that allows different makes of computers running different
operating systems to share files and disk storage.
NIS: Network Information Service (formerly known as Yellow Pages). A system by
which one machine (the master) holds the Ethernet addresses of other machines
(the servants). NIS is an insecure alternative to DNS.
Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 177
D
NTFS: New Technology Filesystem. Windows NT standard filesystem and its
descendants: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 and Windows
Vista. NTFS replaced Microsoft’s previous FAT filesystem, used in MS-DOS and
early versions of Windows, and offers improvements over FAT such as improved
support for metadata and the use of advanced data structures to improve
performance, reliability and disk space utilization plus additional extensions such
as security access control lists and filesystem journaling.
P
Parity: A way to attach additional binary digits to data blocks that lets a NAS
controller monitor if data has been lost or overwritten after it has been moved from
one place to another in a storage array or among networked computers.
PSU: Power Supply Unit. A device or system external to or within the NSS that
supplies electrical power to the device or group of devices.
R
RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service): An authentication,
authorization, and accounting protocol to access a network locally or remotely.
RADIUS uses a RADIUS server that resides in the local network or as an offsite,
leased resource/service to perform the authentication and authorization functions.
RAID: Redundant Array of Inexpensive or Independent Disks. In storage
environments, a RAID uses multiple physical disk drives to create a single logical
unit from which data can be shared or replicated between the drives. There are
various RAID levels (or ways to define how the disks work together). Each level
provides one or more of increased data integrity, fault-tolerance, and throughput or
capacity. The types of RAID levels and combinations of these levels is constantly
changing as new methods and technologies continue to improve. Currently, the
NSS offers the choice of five different RAID levels (including JBOD) with two
options for adding a hot spare to an existing RAID level.
Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 178
D
S
SAN (Storage Area Network): A network of storage and server devices typically
found in large, enterprise environments with high volume or high data traffic
requirements. SANs are architected to be scalable so that computer storage
devices (such as disk array controllers, tape libraries, and servers) can be added
and incorporated into the system. A SAN lets computers connect to hard disk
drives and tape drives on a network as though they were locally attached devices.
A SAN can contain a single NAS device or numerous NAS devices.
SAS (Serial Attached SCSI): A computer bus technology and serial communication
protocol to transfer data to and from hard disk drives and CD-ROMs. Used in large
enterprise environments to replace legacy, parallel, SCSI solutions, because SAS
attains much higher transfer speeds, and has backwards-compatibility with SATA.
SAS uses serial communication to establish connectivity to other SAS devices
and uses SCSI commands for file transfer.
SATA: Serial ATA. A computer bus technology that evolved from the Parallel ATA
physical storage interface. Like PATA, SATA is an IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics)
drive, designed for transfer of data to and from a hard disk. Serial ATA is a serial
link -- a single cable with a minimum of four wires creates a point-to-point
connection between devices. Transfer rates for Serial ATA begin at 150 MBps.
One of the main design advantages of Serial ATA is that the thinner serial cables
facilitate more efficient airflow inside a form factor and also allow for smaller
chassis designs. The IDE cables used in parallel ATA systems are bulkier than
Serial ATA cables and can only extend to 40cm long, while Serial ATA cables can
extend up to one meter.
SATA II: A followup set of specifications to the original SATA specifications. The
SATA II enhancements are delivered in increments. The first increment, called
SATA II: Extensions to SATA 1.0. was released in 2002 and focused on the
immediate needs for the server and network storage segments. Additional
increments of the specification will focus on enhanced cabling, fan-out and failover
capabilities and next generation signaling speeds. In spring 2003, two incremental
developments were announced: a SATA II Port Multiplier specification release
candidate and the completion and pending adoption of the SATA II Cables and
Connectors Volume 1 specification.
SFTP: Secure File Transfer Protocol. A network protocol designed by the IETF to
provide secure file transfer and manipulation facilities over the secure shell (SSH)
protocol. This protocol is NOT supported by the NSS. (It does support FTPS.)
Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 179
D
S.M.A.R.T. : Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology. This industry-
standard technology was developed by a number of major hard disk drive
manufacturers to try to increase the reliability of drives. Using this technology, the
NSS can predict the future failure of hard disk drives. The NSS uses the advanced
diagnostics within the S.M.A.R.T. system to monitor the internal operations of a
drive. It can then send an early warning for about 70% of all hard drive errors, such
as disk performance, faulty sectors, recalibration, CRC errors, drive spin-up time,
drive heads, distance between the heads and the disk platters, drive temperature,
and characteristics of the media, motor, and servomechanisms. This lets the
administrator repair or replace the drive before any data is lost or damaged.
SMB (Server Message Block): An application-level networking protocol that gives
shared access to files, serial ports, printers, and other data transfer between
nodes on a network. SMB can also be used to access different subnets over the
Internet. Computers on a network that don’t share their individual hard disk drives,
use SMB to gain access to shared drives, volumes, files, printers, or other devices
on a network. It is mainly used by Microsoft Windows-enabled computers.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol): The standard protocol for sending emails
over the Internet typically used in conjunction with POP or IMAP mail servers so
that end users can receive, save, and store email.
Snapshot: A copy of a set of files, volumes, or directories as they were at a
particular point in time. The Cisco NSS uses snapshots to back up the shares
located on a volume in such a way that end users can recover their own files
without having to ask the administrator to restore a backup. So for files that are on
a volume for which snapshots are set up, a snapshot folder is created for each
share on the volume. End users can revert to older versions of files by browsing the
snapshot folder and finding a version of the desired file. The snapshots can be set
for hourly, daily, and weekly intervals.
SSH (Secure Shell): A protocol and group of standards that provide confidentiality
and integrity of data as it is exchanged between two or more computers or from a
storage/server device to an accessing computer. SSH uses encryption and
authentication codes to establish a secure communication channel. It is most often
used to log into a remote computer or other device to execute commands.
SSL: Secure Sockets Layer. SSL is a protocol used to transmit files over the
Internet using a private key to encrypt the data. SSL was originally developed by
Netscape and is now an industry standard. The NSS supports FTPS which is FTP
over SSL.
Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 180
D
Striping: A method of concatenating multiple disk drives into one logical storage
unit. Striping involves partitioning each drive’s storage space into stripes which
may be as small as one sector (512 bytes) or as large as several megabytes.
These stripes are then interleaved round-robin, so that the combined space is
composed alternately of stripes from each drive. In effect, the storage space of
the drives is shuffled like a deck of cards. The type of application environment, I/O
or data intensive, determines whether large or small stripes should be used.
T
Terabyte (TB): For data storage capacity usage, terabyte is equal to 1024
gigabytes.
TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol): A simple file transfer protocol used to transfer
small files between hosts on a network. TFTP works like a very basic form of FTP.
TLS: Transport Layer Security. A security protocol from the IETF that is based on
the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) 3.0 protocol developed by Netscape. TLS uses
digital certificates to authenticate the user and the network. The TLS client uses
the public key from the server to encrypt a random number and send it back to the
server. The random number, combined with additional random numbers previously
sent to each other, is used to generate a secret session key to encrypt the
subsequent message exchange.
U
UPnP: Universal Plug and Play. A family of protocols from the UPnP Forum that
automatically configure devices, discovering services and providing peer-to-peer
data transfer over an IP network. Like Zeroconf, UPnP uses link-local addressing
for IP assignment and provides service discovery. Unlike Zeroconf, UPnP uses a
different protocol. If a device does not have an IP address and there is no DHCP
server in the network, UPnP employs link-local addressing to create an IP address.
Software such as Windows Media Connect uses UPnP to stream audio and video
over the network. Several UPnP standards are employed including the Simple
Service Discovery Protocol (SSDP) for finding devices and UPnP AV Architecture,
MediaServer and MediaRenderer for streaming. UPnP can open router ports to let
a device, external to the network, contact a network device.
UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply. A device that provides battery backup when
the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. Small UPS
systems provide power for a few minutes; enough to power down the computer in
an orderly manner, while larger systems have enough battery for several hours.
Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 181
D
V
Virtualization: The creation of a virtual (rather than actual) version of something,
such as an operating system, a server, a storage device or network resources. The
Cisco NSS refers to virtualization as a way of aggregating storage between
devices. Virtualized storage occurs when storage is exported to the network as a
disk drive or an array and is then imported by a master NSS. The master NSS then
uses the newly imported storage to create a single JBOD.
VLAN: Virtual Local Area Network (LAN). A logical group of user stations, servers,
and other network devices that appear to be on the same LAN, regardless of their
physical location. You can use the MAC addresses or IP addresses to interconnect
the workstations on the LAN. You can access and control the switches directly
from a console port or via the LAN using IP.
W
Well Known Ports: IANA assigns TCP and UDP port numbers to specific uses. The
port numbers are divided into three ranges: the Well Known Ports, the Registered
Ports, and the Dynamic and/or Private Ports.The Ports that are popular (well
known) are those in the range 0 to 1023.
WINS: Windows Internet Naming Service. This is part of the Microsoft Windows
NT Server. It manages the association of workstation names and locations with
Internet addresses. The user or an administrator does not have to be involved in
each configuration change.
X
XFS: A high-performance journaling filesystem created by Silicon Graphics for
their IRIX operating system. XFS has been merged into the mainline Linux 2.4 and
2.6 kernels, making it almost universally available on Linux systems. Installation
programs for the SuSE, Gentoo, Mandriva, Slackware, Zenwalk, Fedora, Ubuntu
and Debian Linux distributions all offer XFS as a choice of filesystem. FreeBSD
gained read-only support for XFS in December 2005 and in June 2006
experimental write support was introduced to FreeBSD-7.0-CURRENT.
Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms
Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 182
D
Z
Zeroconf: An IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) specification that lets IP
network devices automatically configure themselves and be discovered without
manual intervention. Zeroconf can also manually assign an IP address and
alternate host name to a device, as required. Once assigned, Zeroconf lets users
and applications readily discover the service it offers. Apple’s Bonjour is the major
implementation of Zeroconf.

© 2009 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

OL-17960-02

Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction
Benefits About This Guide Recommended Installation Sequence Using the Help
Audience About the NSS Configuration Interface Getting Help Refreshing the GUI Pages

1
1 2 2 3
3 3 4 4

Approved Vendor List for Drives

4

Chapter 2: Managing the System
System Alerts Storage Status Network Status Shares Status Backup and Snapshots Status Power Status System Status Viewing the Hardware Monitor Viewing and Managing the System Logs Viewing the Power Status Page NSS-Supported UPS Product Families

5
6 6 7 7 7 8 9 9 10 13 14

Chapter 3: Adding the NSS to your Network
Physical Interfaces
Virtual Interfaces

15
15
16

Viewing the Network Settings Configuring the Network Link IP Resetting the DHCP Lease on a Link

17 18 19

Linksys Business Series NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage System Administrator Guide

1

Contents Viewing VLANs Configured on the NSS Allowing a VLAN Access to the NSS Changing a VLAN Configuration Removing a VLAN’s Access to the NSS Configuring the NSS Network Identification Configuring DNS or WINS for Name Resolution Joining the NSS to a Network Information System (NIS) Domain Editing Access Control Lists (ACLs) from Windows Explorer: Restrictions Running Diagnostics of your Physical Links Configuring the Network Ports Setting up the Link Bonding & Advertising Modes 20 21 23 25 26 28 30 32 32 33 35 Chapter 4: Configuring your Storage Disk Status Table RAID Arrays Table Volumes Table USB Storage Status Managing RAID Arrays About the RAID Arrays Page 37 38 39 40 40 41 41 Choosing a RAID Array Level Creating a RAID Array Adding a Disk Drive to an Array Deleting an Array Migrating a RAID Array to another Storage Device Virtualizing Storage within your Network Exporting Storage to your Network Creating Virtualized Storage Unexporting Storage Volume Management 42 44 45 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Linksys Business Series NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage System Administrator Guide 2 .

Contents Creating a Volume Expanding a Volume Deleting a Volume Viewing the Snapshot Reserve Details Maintaining Active Snapshots 54 55 58 59 60 Creating a Snapshot for a Volume Taking a Manual Snapshot of a Volume Windows End Users: Accessing a Snapshot for a Share Volume Encryption Overview Locking an Encrypted Volume Unlocking a Locked Volume Changing the Password for an Encrypted Volume Storage Options 61 63 64 65 66 67 69 70 Chapter 5: Setting up End-User Access Managing your NSS Users Creating a User Profile Editing a User Profile Integrating Users from an ADS. or NIS Domain Logging into the NSS as a Local User 73 73 74 76 78 79 Deleting a User Profile Working with Groups Creating a Group Changing the Users Assigned to a Group Integrating Groups from an Active Directory. NTv4. or NIS Domain Deleting a Group Managing Volume Quotas Changing the User’s Primary Group About the Volume Quota Page 79 80 80 83 84 84 86 87 87 Linksys Business Series NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage System Administrator Guide 3 . NTv4.

Contents Creating Volume Quota for a User or Group Setting up the Grace Period for a Volume Quota Changing a Volume Quota for a User or Group Clearing a Quota Network Filters Overview Defining the Default Network Policy Creating a Network Filter Available Access Filters Deleting a Network Filter Configuring the User/Group Settings 88 90 91 92 93 94 96 97 99 99 Chapter 6: Managing the Shares Creating a Share Editing an Existing Share Adding a DFS Shared Folder Restrictions using Microsoft DFS from the NSS Setting up CIFS Access Setting up Network Filesystem (NFS) Access Configuring the NSS for FTP Access Configuring Passive Mode FTP Creating or Running a Backup of a Share 101 102 105 108 111 111 112 114 116 120 Creating a Scheduled Backup for a Share Initiating a Backup for a Share Deleting Backup Images 121 124 126 Chapter 7: Managing the NSS Rebooting or Shutting Down the NSS Upgrading the NSS Firmware Upgrading the NSS Firmware in a Virtualized Setup Restoring the Factory Default Configuration 127 127 129 131 131 Linksys Business Series NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage System Administrator Guide 4 .

Contents Managing the NSS Configuration Saving the Current Configuration Restoring a Configuration File Deleting a Configuration File Configuring the Timing Settings Configuring the Email Alerts for a Recipient Changing the Email Alerts for a Recipient Deleting an Email Alert Recipient Profile Configuring SNMP Alerts Changing the Administrator Password 133 134 137 139 140 142 144 145 145 147 Chapter 8: Accessing the Storage Logging into a Share Logging into the CIFS Shares with Administrator Privileges Windows Users: Accessing the Storage by using CIFS/SMB Windows Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP Mac Users: Accessing the Storage by using CIFS/SMB Mac Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP UNIX/Linux Users: Accessing the Storage by using NFS UNIX/Linux Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP 149 149 149 150 151 151 152 153 154 Chapter A: Troubleshooting NSS LEDs Power LED (Front Panel) System LED (Front Panel) Reset Button (Front Panel) LAN LED (Front Panel) 155 155 155 156 156 157 Hard Disk Drive LEDs USB LED (Front Panel) UPS LED (Back Panel) 157 158 158 Linksys Business Series NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage System Administrator Guide 5 .

Contents Repairing a Degraded Array Working with a Failed Array Drive Error LED Remains On Firmware Attempt is Unsuccessful Free Bound Virtualized Storage when the Master System Fails All CIFS Connections were Unexpectedly Ended Hotplugging the Ethernet Link doesn’t Reset IP or Link Rate Unable to Create a Share or Quota for a Volume Cannot Access the NSS through FTP Cannot Rename a Folder through FTP Configuration Page Does not Appear in Internet Explorer Handling an Unexpected (Unclean) Shutdown Boosting the Performance of NFS Transfers Rejoining the ADS Domain after a Failed to Join 158 160 161 161 162 163 163 163 164 165 165 165 166 167 Appendix B: Specifications Appendix C: Where to Go From Here Chapter D: Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms 168 169 170 Linksys Business Series NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage System Administrator Guide 6 .

Apple Macintosh. • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 1 . and FTP for file sharing. and Linux platforms. including Windows. The biggest benefit to your users is that they can now access data that might be stored across different physical platforms as simply as if it were on their own computers. ensuring the integrity. and accessibility of your data for a relatively low cost. The NSS provides a single repository that is completely dedicated to storage. redundant storage units or RAID arrays. CIFS. managed and made available to all of your users on the network. UNIX. Administering a network can be a difficult job. This also means better data security. Easy Installation and Administration: With a basic understanding of networking. The NSS lets you install up to four physical disk drives and virtualize your storage into one or more logical. Finding low-cost ways to simplify your data-management tasks means that you have more resources to dedicate elsewhere. Benefits The NSS offers these main advantages to your business: • • Cross-platform File Sharing: Share files easily and inexpensively across different platforms over a cost-effective Ethernet and IP network.1 Introduction Thank you for choosing the Linksys Business Series Network Storage System (NSS). The NSS uses the most common file-based protocols such as NFS. the NSS is easily configured. The NSS is a Network Attached Storage (NAS) unit that appears as a native file server for the various clients within your network. reliability. Data Consolidation: Centralize data to reduce management costs and maximize your investment in existing hardware.

If you are setting up your system for the first time. Skip this step if you have an NSS4100 or NSS6100 as they are already equipped with disk drives. and you want to virtualize your storage. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 2 . About This Guide Recommended Installation Sequence Installing the NSS system involves a series of steps. Connect the power. STEP 2 Configure the NSS: a. STEP 1 Set up the hardware: a. Configure the time setting (options include NTP or manual). If you have multiple NSS units (one of which is a NSS6000 series unit). You can choose to skip this step if you have an NSS4100 or NSS6100 as it is preconfigured with a RAID5 array. c. you must set the User and Group ID ranges must be set before you join the NSS to the domain.). b. e. Active Directory. Log into the Configuration Interface. NIS.Introduction About This Guide 1 The Linksys Business Series Network Storage System Administrator Guide describes the Administrative features that are available for you to configure and optimize your NSS. b. c. etc. f. Create the volume(s). d. Set up the users’ Home Directory Location (this enables you to set up local users). Certain activities must take place before others may be attempted (for example. refer to the Linksys Business Series Network Storage System Getting Started Guide. Configure the Network Domain Identification (NT4. from setting up the hardware to configuring the device. set the export/Import of the virtualized arrays. g. Configure RAID(s). Connect the Ethernet link(s). Install the disk drive. Set up the User and Group ID ranges (this enables the import of groups/users from Domain Controllers) h.

NFS. About the NSS Configuration Interface The NSS Configuration Interface contains some basic navigation features to help you as you configure the NSS. Topic Page: When you select a topic from the Manager Menu. set up email and SNMP alerts. STEP 4 Instruct your users how to access the NSS. Enable CIFS. d. • Manager Menu: The Manager Menu forms the left side of the configuration interface window. (Optional). and so on. Configure the share backups as required. For more detailed information. (Optional) b. For example. the configuration page for that topic appears in the right side of the window. Share. Go through the rest of the configuration options to set up quotas. When you click an option. and networking. Audience The information contained in these help pages is intended for use by network administrators. (Optional) c. (Optional) Create Shares. FTP access to specific shares. filesystems. It assumes a basic understanding of storage-related concepts.Introduction Using the Help 1 i. Network. Using the Help The NSS help file provides information about using the configuration interface to configure the NSS. Clicking a subtopic opens the associated topic in the Topic page in the right side of the window. including RAID. Storage. If you have an NSS6000 series unit. STEP 3 Add any locally defined groups or users. edit groups. System. a. configure the volume snapshots. It contains the menu options that represent the major configuration areas for the NSS. refer to the Online Help. Setup DFS access. and so forth. a sub-menu of related options appears. • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 3 .

Introduction Approved Vendor List for Drives 1 Getting Help There are two buttons on the NSS configuration interface window that you can click to access help: • From the Manager Menu click Help to display the full online Administrator Guide. A context-sensitive help button appears in the upper-right corner of the topic page. For example.cisco. to refresh the NTP Configuration page. click the Help button for information about the details that appear on the status page. from the Manager Menu. if the current configuration topic is about the status of your disk drives. • Refreshing the GUI Pages Although certain GUI pages automatically refresh at a preselected time interval. make sure that each of the disks used in the array have the same disk capacity. consider the type of RAID levels required to service your business needs. if you are creating a RAID (versus a JBOD). click Admin and then click Time. Do not use the Refresh button on the Web browser toolbar as this can cause data issues. Use the navigation tools within the help to find information for your chosen topic. Click it to display help on the specific configuration area. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 4 .com/support for a list of recommended disk drives. For example. When you select a disk drive. For example. see the Approved Vendor List at http://www. Approved Vendor List for Drives If you are purchasing disk drives to install in the NSS. The RAID is built using the capacity of the smallest disk in the array. The best way to manually refresh a GUI page is to reselect it through the options in the Manager Menu on the left side of the GUI window. some pages do not refresh until they are reselected.

For example. power. and so on. and system details. network. You can also view the current status of any of the following: storage. These sections provide a detailed explanation of the information that appears on the System Status page. you can view system alert messages if a disk drive is failing or has failed. The System Status page automatically refreshes on a regular interval and is helpful for monitoring the progress of certain processes such as building a RAID. shares. volume snapshots. if an array rebuild is complete. if a volume is approaching its full capacity. backups. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 5 .2 Managing the System The System Status page provides an overview of the current operating condition of the NSS.

They are color-coded red and require immediate action.Managing the System System Alerts 2 The System Alerts section shows any system messages issued since the last time they were cleared. The percentage is color-coded according to the current percentage used: - Green: 0 to 74% Orange: 75 to 89% Red: 90 to 100% Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 6 . For example. For example. There are three type of system alerts: System Alerts • Error: Indicates the most severe types of problems with the NSS. They are color-coded orange. They do not require action and are color-coded green. For example. if a disk drive or RAID array is in a failed condition. Notification: Shows the recent changes to the NSS. Percent Used: The total amount of the configured capacity used. • • Storage Status The Storage area displays these details about the configured storage on the NSS: • • • • • Drives: The number of physical disk drives installed. Warning: Indicates that there is a problem with the NSS that requires eventual action. Messages can range in severity from informational to immediate action required. Volumes: The number of configured volumes. the RAID rebuild is complete. Total Configured Capacity: The total aggregate size of all configured volumes. if the amount of storage used for a volume is over 90%. RAID Arrays: The number of configured RAID arrays.

- FTP: The FTP access state (enabled or disabled). Link 1 IP: The IP address of the first Ethernet link. NFS: The NFS access state (enabled or disabled). VLANs: The number of VLANs configured on the NSS.e.. Connected Users: The total number of user sessions currently connected to the NSS. the word “never” appears. Backup and Snapshots Status • • • The Backup and Snapshots area displays the following: Snapshots: The total number of volume snapshots configured. The status of the link can be up (color-coded green) or down (color-coded red).” Bonding Mode: Displays how the bonding mode for the physical links is configured on the Network Properties page. Last Backup: The date and time of the last backup run. the status appears as “down.” on page 35 for more information. If the link is not present.3ad”. If a backup has never been run on the system. If the bonding mode is set to “active backup” or “802. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 7 .Managing the System Network Status 2 The Network area displays the following: Network Status • Link 1 & 2: The current status of the physical links. • • • • Shares Status The Shares area displays the following: • • Shares: The number of configured shares. Link 2 IP: The IP address of the second Ethernet link (if installed). “Link 1+2 IP”). the two links appear as a single entity (i. See “Setting up the Link Bonding & Advertising Modes.

- No Connection: A UPS is not currently connected to the NSS. - No Connection: There is no RPSU installed. On Battery (%): The NSS is currently deriving its power from the UPS battery. Active: The RPSU is currently being used to provide backup power to the NSS. refer to the RPSU documentation. Ready: An RPSU is installed and is currently available as a backup power source. the RPSU is connected to the NSS but is powered off. Standby/Fault: An RPSU is installed but is in standby mode. The NSS is deriving power from the mains power. refer to the UPS documentation. For example. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 8 . - For more information about how the UPS functions. On Mains: A UPS is connected to the NSS but is not currently being used to power the unit. or. Unavailable: The RPSU is currently providing backup power to another device and is not available to provide backup power to the NSS.Managing the System Power Status 2 The Power area displays the following: Power Status • UPS: These options are available depending on the current operating condition of the UPS. - For more information about how the RPSU functions. • RPSU: These options are available depending on the current operating condition of the RPSU. the RPSU is installed and has a fault condition. The percentage of power still available is also listed and is color-coded according to the amount of battery remaining.

Viewing the Hardware Monitor The Hardware Monitor page displays these details about the physical conditions related to the NSS: Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 9 . Uptime: The number of days the NSS has been running since it was last rebooted.Managing the System System Status 2 The System area displays the following: System Status • • • • Serial Number: The serial number of the NSS. Firmware Version: The current version and date of the firmware installed on the NSS. Last Boot: The date when the NSS was last rebooted.

” If the temperature of the system or disks is over or under the ideal temperature. click System Logs. the logs are overwritten once the space is filled. the reading is color-coded red. the temperature is color-coded red. When the temperature is within the normal range the color-coding is green. The reading is color-coded depending on if the voltage level is within specification (green) or out of specification and in need of attention (red). You can store the logs locally or on a remote server on the network. Temperature readings are performed from these sensors as well as from any installed disks (if the disk has an internal temperature sensor). To work with the log files: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. Fans: The fan speed for each chassis fan. If the fan has stalled.Managing the System Viewing and Managing the System Logs 2 • Voltages: The current voltage reading for all voltage rails in the system. Since local space allocated for log files is limited. Temperatures: The NSS has temperature sensors located at various parts of the chassis. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 10 . • • Viewing and Managing the System Logs The NSS captures various types of information into log files. Normal fan operation is colorcoded green. such as user access details. the reading appears as “unavailable. If a disk does not have a temperature sensor. Each new event overwrites the oldest event recorded in the file.

STEP 2 You can view.2 The System Logs page appears. and user logouts. This information helps you detect unauthorized attempts to access the configuration interface. or delete these types of log files: • • Admin: A full list of time-stamped actions that were initiated through the NSS configuration interface. Web Access: This log displays IP addresses of the systems that accessed the NSS configuration interface and the date and time of the authentication requests. • • • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 11 . including user logins. file transfers. You can download and save this file. All Logs: A list of all the log files. FTP Access: A time-stamped log of FTP actions. CIFS Sharing: A time-stamped event log of events initiated by users accessing shares through CIFS. download.

• STEP 4 Click Update. the log file is sent to both servers. and then select the volume to which you want to store the logs from the options in the Store Logs to drop-down menu. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 12 .) Note that the remote server must be running a syslog server. select Forward Log Messages. and then enter the name or IP address of the server in one or both of the Remote Log Host fields. Remotely: To store the log files on a remote server.Managing the System Viewing and Managing the System Logs 2 This is an example of the Administrator Log: STEP 3 Choose where you want to store the log files: • Locally: To store the log files on the NSS. (If you set up two remote hosts. select Store Logs Locally.

NOTE When the UPS power goes to low battery. - No Connection: A UPS is not currently connected to the NSS. Make sure that the UPS has enough reserve power to sustain the NSS through the shutdown (approximately 5 minutes). Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 13 . It is also where you can configure an attached UPS.Managing the System Viewing the Power Status Page 2 Viewing the Power Status Page The Power Status page provides an overview of the current power condition of the NSS. refer to the UPS documentation. a signal is sent through the USB port on the NSS and a shutdown of the NSS is initiated. The percentage of power still available is also listed and is color-coded according to the amount of battery remaining. The Power area displays the following: • UPS: These options are available depending on the current operating condition of the UPS. On Battery (%): The NSS is currently deriving its power from the UPS battery. The NSS is deriving power from the main power. For more information about the functioning of the UPS. On Mains: A UPS is connected to the NSS but is not currently being used to power the unit.

• • For more information about the functioning of the RPSU. the RPSU is installed and has some sort of fault condition.Managing the System NSS-Supported UPS Product Families 2 No Connection: There is no RPSU installed. • Standby/Fault: An RPSU is installed but is in Standby mode. Active: The RPSU is currently being used to provide backup power to the NSS. or. Unavailable: The RPSU is currently providing backup power to another device and is not available to provide backup power to the NSS. the RPSU is connected to the NSS but is powered off. Ready: An RPSU is installed and is currently available as a backup power source. refer to the RPSU documentation. NSS-Supported UPS Product Families The NSS supports these UPS product families: • • • • • • APC Back-UPS Pro USB APC Back-UPS RS USB APC Back-UPS USB APC Back-UPS LS USB APC Back-UPS ES/CyberFort 350 APC Smart-UPS USB Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 14 . • RPSU: These options are available depending on the current operating condition of the RPSU. For example.

3 Adding the NSS to your Network The Network Device Status page displays the current status of the NSS physical and virtual network interfaces. Physical Interfaces The Network Device Status table displays the current status of the physical Ethernet links connected to the NSS. • Status: The status of the physical link. Options include: - Up: The link is up (color-coded green) and is operational. Down: The link is down (color-coded red) and not operational. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 15 .

Adding the NSS to your Network Physical Interfaces 3 • Link: The number that appears in this column identifies the link attached to the NSS. You can use the NSS cable diagnostic feature (see to assist you. Priority: The 802. in Mbps.” VLAN: The VLAN number. MTU: The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) in bytes defined for the link. • • • Virtual Interfaces The VLAN Status area of the Network Status page displays the current status and details about each configured VLAN. Tx Pkts: The total number of IP packets transmitted on the VLAN interface since the last boot. Rx Pkts: The total number of IP packets received since the last boot. Label: The text description defined for the VLAN. or computer) at the other end of the cable. Dropped Pkts: The total number of IP packets dropped on the VLAN interface since the last boot. MAC Address: The Ethernet MAC address for the link. 1000 Mbps. Options include: 10 Mbps. This is set either manually from the Network Properties page or via the DHCP server. the link appears as either “1” or “2. of the physical link. If there are two physical links. 100 Mbps. the number appears as “1+2. If a cable is connected to the Ethernet port.1p priority set for the VLAN. • Link: The number that appears in this column identifies the physical link on which the VLAN is configured. (see ”Running Diagnostics of your Physical Links” section on page 32) • • • Speed: The configured speed. Options include 0 through 7 (0 being best effort data and 7 being network critical data). Rx Pkts: The total number of IP packets received on the VLAN interface since the last boot. Tx Pkts: The total number of IP packets transmitted since the last boot. • • • • • • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 16 . router.” If the two links are bonded. check the cable integrity and the status of the device (switch. It can be either 1 or 2. Dropped Pkts: The total number of IP packets dropped since the last boot.

For physical interfaces. Assign Via: The method used to assign an IP configuration to the physical or virtual interface. Options include: DHCP: The IP configuration was assigned by a DHCP server. Instead the IP address was assigned by the AutoIP protocol. NOTE If you hotplug the Ethernet link after the initial installation of the NSS. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 17 . The Network Device Settings table displays the following: • • • • • • Link: “1+ 2” appears in this column. this column is blank. click Network IP. VLAN: The ID assigned to the virtual interface. Manual: A static IP configuration was manually entered through the NSS configuration interface. The NSS displays the correct new settings within 10 seconds.Adding the NSS to your Network Viewing the Network Settings 3 Viewing the Network Settings The Network Device Settings page displays information about the physical and virtual interfaces currently configured on the NSS. from the Manager Menu. AutoIP: The interface was configured to use DHCP for IP configuration but no DHCP server was found. make sure you that you wait 15 seconds between the time you unplug the cable and then plug it back in. To display the Network Device Settings page.

To set the IP address allocation method for an interface: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. make sure you that you wait 15 seconds between the time you unplug the cable and then plug it back in. NOTE If you hotplug the Ethernet link after the initial installation of the NSS. Netmask: The netmask for the physical or virtual interface. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 18 . click Network IP. The Network IP page appears listing each interface. Configuring the Network Link IP You need to configure the method for assigning an IP configuration to each interface connected to the NSS. The Network Link Configuration page appears. Gateway: The address of the gateway for the physical or virtual interface. STEP 2 Click Edit on the row of the interface you want to configure. The NSS displays the correct new settings within 10 seconds.Adding the NSS to your Network Configuring the Network Link IP 3 • • • IP Address: The IP address for the physical or virtual interface.

click Network IP. The Network Link Configuration page appears. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 19 . STEP 2 Click Edit on the row of the link IP that you want to reset. in dotted-quad notation. netmask. and gateway address for the interface. The Network IP page appears listing each physical and virtual interface. Click Update. Resetting the DHCP Lease on a Link You can force a renewal of the DHCP lease on a physical link or VLAN that is configured for DHCP: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu.Adding the NSS to your Network Resetting the DHCP Lease on a Link 3 STEP 3 Select one of the following: • • STEP 4 Obtain IP Address Automatically: Use a DHCP server to retrieve the IP address. Use the Following IP Address: Enter the IP configuration details manually. STEP 3 Click Update.

1p standard for the VLAN traffic. The status appears as “1+2. To configure a trunk-based VLAN. In this case.” VLAN: The ID of the VLAN. the currently configured VLANs appear. click Network The VLAN Configuration page appears. follow the steps provided next.Adding the NSS to your Network Viewing VLANs Configured on the NSS 3 Viewing VLANs Configured on the NSS When you first display the Network VLAN page. Priority: The quality of service (QoS) as defined in the IEEE 802. Configuring a VLAN to connect to the NSS depends if it is trunk-based or port-based. To view the VLANs currently configured on the NSS: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. The range of valid VLAN IDs is from 0 to 4095. VLAN. STEP 2 View the following details for each existing VLAN that appears in the VLAN Configuration table: • • Link: The link on which the VLAN is configured. VLAN Ethernet frames contain a three-bit priority tag ranging from 0 to 7 (where 0 is best effort and 7 is network-critical traffic). no NSS configuration changes are required. This is configured when the VLAN is added to the NSS and should match the ID of the VLAN as it is configured in your network. • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 20 . configure the switch to assign the port to which the NSS is connected to the desired VLAN. To configure a port-based VLAN.

” and so on). Allowing a VLAN Access to the NSS To set up a network VLAN to access the NSS: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. STEP 2 In the New VLAN area of the page. VLAN Ethernet frames contain a three-bit priority tag ranging from 0 to 7 (where 0 is best effort and 7 is network-critical traffic). Priority: Select the QoS priority for the VLAN traffic as it is defined for your network. Valid options range from 0 to 7 (as defined by the IEEE 802.1p standard). The range of valid VLAN IDs is from 0 to 4095. This description is used solely as a reference within the NSS interface and does not affect its operation. set up the following fields: • • • Link: Select the Ethernet link on which you want the VLAN to connect to the NSS.Adding the NSS to your Network Allowing a VLAN Access to the NSS 3 • Label: A text description for the VLAN (for example.” “Voice.” “Video. VLAN: Enter the ID of the VLAN as it is defined within your network. VLAN. click Network The VLAN Configuration page appears. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 21 . “Data. Available options depend on the configuration of your Ethernet link(s).

“Data”. etc. The Network Device Settings page appears. The newly added VLAN appears in the VLAN Configuration table. STEP 5 Click Edit for the VLAN you need to configure. The newly added VLAN appears in the list. STEP 4 Click OK. STEP 3 Click Add. “Voice”. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 22 . Note that this description is used solely as a reference within the NSS interface and does not affect its operation. A message appears to advise that the VLAN does not take effect until you configure the IP address. It can be made up of alphanumeric characters. “Video”.Adding the NSS to your Network Allowing a VLAN Access to the NSS 3 • Label: Enter a text description for the VLAN (for example.).

netmask address. To edit a VLAN configuration: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. Use the Following IP address: Enter the IP configuration details manually.Adding the NSS to your Network Changing a VLAN Configuration 3 The Network Configuration page appears. depending on how you want to assign the VLAN IP addressing: • • STEP 7 Obtain IP Address Automatically: Use a DHCP server to retrieve the IP address. and gateway address for the VLAN. click Network VLAN. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 23 . STEP 6 Click one of the following. Changing a VLAN Configuration After you set up a VLAN to access the NSS. you can change the VLAN configuration. Click Update.

STEP 3 STEP 4 Make changes to any of the VLAN configuration fields as required. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 24 . STEP 2 Click Edit for the VLAN you want to change.Adding the NSS to your Network Changing a VLAN Configuration 3 The VLAN Configuration page appears. Click Update. The Edit VLAN page appears.

STEP 2 From the VLAN Configuration table. click Network The VLAN Configuration page appears. Note that deleting the VLAN only affects the VLAN’s ability to access the NSS. It does not impact the VLANs operation within your network. click Delete for the VLAN that you want to remove. The VLAN disappears from the VLAN Configuration table and can no longer access the NSS. To disconnect a VLAN’s access to the NSS: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. You can delete the connection between a VLAN and the NSS. VLAN.Adding the NSS to your Network Removing a VLAN’s Access to the NSS 3 Removing a VLAN’s Access to the NSS All connected VLANs appear when you first display the VLAN Configuration page. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 25 .

From the Manager Menu. click Access Time. To configure the NSS network identity: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. From the Manager Menu. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 26 . The Network Identification page appears.Adding the NSS to your Network Configuring the NSS Network Identification 3 Configuring the NSS Network Identification The Network Identification page is where you configure the network identity of the NSS. including the hostname and domain membership.” on page 28.” on page 99. click Network Identification.” on page140. click Network DNS/WINS to configure the DNS sever information. This is used for both domain users and local users.T Set up the Home Directory Location on the User/Group Settings page. See “Configuring the User/Group Settings. do the following: • Configure the IP and DNS information. See “Configuring DNS or WINS for Name Resolution. • • Configure the NTP Server to synchronize with the ADS server. See “Configuring the Timing Settings. Before you join the NSS to an NTv4 or Active Directory Service (ADS) domain.

) - It can take up from 2 to 5 minutes to complete the domain join for large ADS domains. Note any special naming restrictions or conventions enforced by the domain(s) into which the NSS is being joined. In the Description field. select Assign automatically via DHCP. Select the type of network into which you are making the NSS a member from the following options: STEP 4 STEP 5 • • Workgroup: Make the NSS part of a peer-to-peer network. Password: Enter the password for the administrator account. When the NSS initially joins the domain. there might be a delay of several minutes until the domain users and groups appear in the graphical user interface (GUI). This delay only occurs after a successful join. any current CIFS connections to shares on the NSS are disconnected. Domain Controller: Enter the hostname or IP address of the domain controller. Any changes that you make to the users and groups on the domain controller (additions or deletions) can take up to 20 minutes to appear in the GUI Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 27 . ! CAUTION If you change the hostname. (This is the sum of the individual users and individual groups. If you select this option. Note: The username cannot contain the “%” character. set up the following fields: - NTv4 Domain: Enter the domain name. enter the name you want to use for the NSS. Username: Enter the username of an account that has administrator privileges for this domain. NTv4 Domain: Make the NSS a part of a pre-Windows 2000 domain. STEP 3 To assign the hostname for the NSS using the DHCP server. Enable Support for Large ADS Domains: Check this option to connect the NSS to an ADS domain that has more than 1000 users and groups. If the DHCP server is not available or if it is not configured to supply a hostname. enter the textual description for the NSS as you want it to appear in the file manager window for your users.Adding the NSS to your Network Configuring the NSS Network Identification 3 STEP 2 In the Hostname field. the NSS hostname is assigned using the information entered in the Hostname field.

you must then select the RAID array on which to store the system cache files associated with the ADS domain join. the hostname “myserver” might translate to 172. STEP 6 Click Update. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 28 . the domain join occurs.135. The NSS configuration interface displays the status of the domain join (successful or not successful). The RAID array that you choose must have at least 512 MB of available space. when you click Update. To configure the DNS or WINS server addresses for your network: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu.6. and then delete the RAID array. - System Volume Location: If you checked the Enable Support for Large ADS Domains field. Configuring how the NSS works with name resolution depends on what type of servers exist within your network. NOTE If you are joined to a domain and make changes to the fields on this page. make sure that you re-enter the domain password as the NSS automatically rejoins the domain when you click Update. Configuring DNS or WINS for Name Resolution Within a network. If you configured the NSS to join a domain.000 users for the NSS4000 and 16. click Network DNS/WINS.1. leave the domain by switching to workgroup mode.Adding the NSS to your Network Configuring DNS or WINS for Name Resolution 3 NOTE The NSS supports ADS domains of up to 8. If you delete the RAID array on which the system volume is located. DNS and WINS are used to translate hostnames into IP addresses. you might have problems making CIFS connections to the NSS. If you need to connect the NSS to a domain larger than this. For example.000 users for the NSS6000.

Alternate WINS server: If your network has a secondary WINS server. enter its address. If you are joined to a domain. Primary WINS server: If your network has a WINS server. This field is optional. This field is optional. Alternate DNS Server: Enter the IP address of a second DNS server to be used should the primary DNS server become unavailable. Primary DNS Server: Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server on your network. • • • • • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 29 . If the DHCP server cannot be found or times out. enter its address. the DNS server IP address is assigned the IP address manually entered in the Primary or Alternate DNS Server fields. enter the IP address into this field. Assign automatically via DHCP: Select this to assign the IP address for the DNS server using the DHCP server. This field is optional. If you are joined to a domain. STEP 2 Based on your network setup. enter the controller name into this field. configure the following fields: • Search Domain: Enter the address of the DNS search domain accessible by the NSS.Adding the NSS to your Network Configuring DNS or WINS for Name Resolution 3 The Network Name Resolution page appears.

click Network The NIS Configuration page appears. you need to configure and enable it. Joining the NSS to a Network Information System (NIS) Domain To join the NSS to a NIS domain. NIS. make sure that you set up or make changes to the NIS domain users and groups ID range on the User/Groups Settings page. STEP 3 Click Update. If the DHCP server cannot be found or times out. To configure the NSS for NIS: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 30 . NOTE Before you join a NIS domain. This minimizes the risk of collisions of user or group IDs within your network.Adding the NSS to your Network Joining the NSS to a Network Information System (NIS) Domain 3 • Assign automatically via DHCP: Select this to assign the IP address for the WINS server using the DHCP server. the DNS server IP address is assigned the IP address manually entered in the Primary or Alternate WINS Server fields.

Use the following NIS Servers: To manually identify the NIS server you want the NSS to use.Adding the NSS to your Network Joining the NSS to a Network Information System (NIS) Domain 3 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Select Enable NIS. click this option. Enter the NIS domain name in the NIS Domain Name field. and then enter the address of up to three different NIS servers. The Bind State field shows the current bind status of the NSS. Set the bind state by clicking one of the following: • • Broadcast for NIS Server: Click this option to have the NSS search until it finds the NIS server on the network. STEP 5 Click Update. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 31 .

click Network Diagnostics. You cannot set up a group ACL. You must manually initiate a test to update the results shown on the Network Diagnostics page.Adding the NSS to your Network Editing Access Control Lists (ACLs) from Windows Explorer: Restrictions 3 Editing Access Control Lists (ACLs) from Windows Explorer: Restrictions Access Control Lists (ACLs) are used to set user and group access privileges for specific files and folders stored on the NSS. To test the physical link: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. If you have two links installed. they do not appear in the Security tab in Windows Explorer. you take down the link for the duration of the test. NOTE When you initiate a test on an Ethernet link. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 32 . any connections through the untested link remain unaffected. Running Diagnostics of your Physical Links The NSS lets you test the physical network cables attached to Ethernet links 1 and 2 for certain fault conditions. When editing ACLs through Windows Explorer these restrictions apply • • Group versus User ACLs: You can only set up an ACL for individual users. NIS domain: You cannot create or edit ACLs for NIS domain users. Any current user connections on the link are dropped.

Adding the NSS to your Network
Configuring the Network Ports

3

The Network Diagnostics page appears.

STEP 2

Click Test for the cable you want to test. After the test completes, the test results appear in the Link Status area. The test results also appear on the System Status page. If the cable is in good working condition, the link is again accessible to your users.

Configuring the Network Ports
By default the NSS runs network services on their well known (IETF defined) port numbers. You can change the port on which any particular service runs. When you disable WAN access for a given service, only hosts on the same subnet as the NSS may connect to that service. This is a shortcut to manually defining an equivalent network filter. To set up the network services:
STEP 1

From the Manager Menu, click Network

Ports.

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide

33

Adding the NSS to your Network
Configuring the Network Ports

3

The Network Ports Configuration page appears.

STEP 2

Change the port assignment for any of the following service types:

• •

FTP/FTPS Port: The well-known port setting is 21. Select Disable WAN Access to disallow FTP and FTPS protocol access to the NSS from a WAN. Web Server Port: The well-known port setting is 80. To access the NSS configuration interface, you must have either the HTTP port or HTTPS port enabled. Select Disable WAN Access to disallow HTTP protocol access to the NSS from a WAN. SSL Web Server Port: The well-known port setting is 443. Select Disable WAN Access to disallow HTTPS protocol access to the NSS from a WAN.


STEP 3

Click Update.

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide

34

Adding the NSS to your Network
Setting up the Link Bonding & Advertising Modes

3

Setting up the Link Bonding & Advertising Modes
The Network Properties page is where you configure the bonding mode for the physical Ethernet link(s) attached to the NSS. It also lets you determine how you want to advertise the presence of the NSS within your network. To configure the network properties:
STEP 1

From the Manager Menu, click Network The Network Properties page appears.

Properties.

STEP 2

To set the bonding mode of your physical links, click one of the following:

802.3ad Link Aggregation (failover and load sharing): Select this option to aggregate the two Ethernet connections using the IEEE 802.3ad standard. This technology is also known as trunking or bonding. Active backup (failover): This is the default option when you first install the NSS or when you restore the factory default settings by resetting the NSS. Select this option to define one link as the active link and one link as the backup. Should the active link become unusable (either disconnected or significantly degraded), the backup link automatically becomes the active link.

STEP 3

Set the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU), in bytes, in the MTU field. This is the largest Ethernet frame that your network can handle. The default MTU size is 1500 bytes. MTU sizes greater than 1500 bytes are considered “jumbo frames.”

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide

35

Click Update. Based on your network requirements. In this case.Adding the NSS to your Network Setting up the Link Bonding & Advertising Modes 3 STEP 4 To assign the link MTU size automatically using the DHCP server. click Assign automatically via DHCP. the value entered in the MTU field is used as a backup if the DHCP server does not provide an MTU value or if the server cannot be reached. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 36 . Advertise using Zeroconf/Bonjour: The NSS is advertised within the network using Zeroconf/Bonjour. enable any of the following: STEP 5 • • STEP 6 Advertise using UPnP: The NSS is advertised within the network using UPnP.

You can also view the S. To display the Storage Status page. arrays.M.R. health report for each physical disk.T. and volumes currently installed or exported to the NSS. The Storage Status page automatically refreshes on a regular interval and is helpful for monitoring the progress of certain processes such as checking the condition of a drive. click Storage Status. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 37 .4 Configuring your Storage The Storage Status page shows the current state of the disk drives. from the Manager Menu.A.

T. Cancel Locate: There is a locate request set up for a disk drive. This lets you send a locate request for another disk drive.You can only send one locate request at a time. The table has these columns: • • • • Port: The port number on the NSS in which the disk is installed.A.M. test and is predicated to fail. Offline: The disk drive is failed. Locate: Send a locate request to the applicable disk drive.R.A. • Online: The disk drive is spun up.M.R. Standby: The disk drive is idle and is spun down. The white disk drive LED on the front of the NSS chassis blinks for the targeted disk drive. Action: There are available action buttons associated with each installed disk drive: - Get Details: View the current. Health: The system monitors each disk drive and reports the condition of the disk drive.Configuring your Storage Disk Status Table 4 Disk Status Table The Disk Status table lists each of the physical disks installed in the NSS. The red Error LED on the disk drive is blinking. report for the disk drive. Capacity: The size of the disk drive. Failing: The disk drive failed the S.T. Failed: The disk drive is not operational (has failed). The Error LED on the disk drive is off. • Passed: The disk drive passed the S.M. Disk drives are numbered from 1 to 4 from left to right on the chassis (when facing the chassis front panel) and correspond with the port number. Model: The model of the disk drive.A. test and is considered fully operational.T.R. Status: The state of use for the disk drive. detailed S. Click Cancel Locate to cancel the locate request. This information is read from the disk drive. The red Error LED on the disk drive is on solid. - Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 38 .

Configuring your Storage
RAID Arrays Table

4

RAID Arrays Table
The RAID Arrays table lists each array (either RAID or JBOD) currently configured. The table includes the following:

• • •

Label: The name assigned to the array. RAID Level: The configured RAID level. Size: The size allocated for the array. The amount of available storage for an array depends on the number of drives in the array, the size of the smallest drive, as well as the RAID level assigned. The calculation for an array, according to RAID level, is as follows (where “n” = the number of drives in the array and “s” = the size of the smallest drive in the array):

• -

JBOD = sum (size of each drive) RAID0 = n * s RAID1 = s RAID5 = (n-1) * s RAID10 = n * s /2

Status: The current condition of the RAID array. Clean: The array is in a normal state. This status is color-coded green. Degraded: For RAID arrays with redundancy (i.e., RAID levels 1, 5, 10), one or more of the redundant disk drives is removed from the system or is failed. In this state, the array is fully recoverable. This status is colorcoded orange. Failed: One or more disk drives were removed or are unrecoverable from a RAID0 or a JBOD array. For RAID levels 1, 5, 10, it indicates a loss of all the redundant disks in the array plus at least one more drive. In this state, the array is unrecoverable. Rebuilding: A RAID level with redundancy is being rebuilt. Note that during a rebuild, the RAID array is still fully usable. This status is colorcoded orange. During the rebuild, the disk drive LED slowly blinks green. Stopped: A RAID array has been stopped by the system (through degraded mode management) due to it being in degraded mode for the amount of time configured in the Storage Options page. Volumes associated with a stopped array are unmounted and unusable. To start the RAID array, click the Start button.

-

-

-

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide

39

Configuring your Storage
Volumes Table

4

Volumes Table
The Volumes table provides a list of the existing volumes. The table is made up of the following:

• • • • • • • •

Location: The name of the RAID array on which the volume is configured. Volume: The name assigned to the volume. Total Space: The amount of space configured for the volume. Used Space: The amount of space used on the volume. Avail. Space: The amount of unused space on the volume. % Used: The percentage of available space that is used. Encrypted: Whether the volume is encrypted or unencrypted. Locked: The encrypted volume is locked and is not accessible. To make the volume accessible, the volume must be unlocked.

USB Storage Status
If you mount a USB flash device by inserting it into the AUX-1 port on the front of the chassis, the USB Storage Status table appears. If there is no USB flash device mounted, the USB Storage Status table does not appear. You can use the USB flash device to save a backup of the configuration file (see ”Saving the Current Configuration” section on page134). When you finish using the USB flash device, click Unmount before you remove it from the AUX-1 port. (The AUX-1 LED on the front of the chassis must be off before you can safely remove the USB flash device.) If you remove the USB flash device in a mounted state, you risk corrupting the files or filesystem. The USB Storage Status table provides these details about the mounted USB flash device:

• • • •

Disk: The type of disk in this case is the USB flash. Total Space: The total amount of space (both used and available) on the USB flash device. Used Space: The amount of space taken up on the USB flash device. Available Space: The amount of unused space on the USB flash device.

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide

40

Configuring your Storage
Managing RAID Arrays

4
• •
%Used: The percentage of space used on the USB flash device. Action: The Unmount button unmounts the USB flash device so that it can be safely removed from the AUX-1 port.

Managing RAID Arrays
RAID is an acronym for Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks. In storage environments, a RAID array uses multiple physical disk drives to create a single logical unit from which data can be shared or replicated between the drives. A RAID array also simplifies the data management as the data appears in one logical unit. Choosing to store your data using a RAID array gives you the benefit of speed and performance; storage capacity; decreased downtime costs and increased availability; fault tolerance; and higher data security.

About the RAID Arrays Page
Use the RAID Arrays page to manage the local RAID and JBOD arrays. To display the RAID Arrays page, from the Manager Menu, click Storage RAID.

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide

41

A failure of any component disk in the array causes the entire array to fail. referred to as RAID levels. 5 and 10. If a disk fails in the array and is then replaced. Reads and writes to each disk occur in parallel. which is not technically a RAID level. some increase the reliability. RAID1: RAID1 writes the same data to each disk in the array. When an array contains a failed disk. it is said to be operating in degraded mode. and others do a mixture of both. These variables are used in formulas used to calculate the total capacity of each RAID level: • • m – capacity of the smallest disk in the array n – number of disks in the array RAID0: RAID0 stripes the data written to the array across the component disks. The component devices in a RAID array appear as a single logical storage device. the array must copy the entire contents of a good disk to the new disk. • • • • Minimum Number of Disks: 2 Total capacity: m x n Advantages: Increased read and write performance. The array can sustain the loss of all but one disk without any data loss. The NSS supports the following RAID levels: 0. The data is broken into chunks and each chunk is written to a different disk.Configuring your Storage Choosing a RAID Array Level 4 Choosing a RAID Array Level RAID (Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks) is a technology that enables multiple low-cost hard drives to be used together in a way that increases performance and/or reliability compared to that of a single drive.” During a resync. speeding up the total read and write performance of the array. Each mirror disk added to the array Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 42 . As long as one disk in the array is intact. Some RAID levels increase the performance of the array. The disks are referred to as “mirrors” because each one mirrors the data stored on the others. the array continues to be available for reads and writes. There are various types of RAID. • • • Minimum Number of Disks: 2 Total capacity: m Advantages: Increased reliability. all data can be read back from the array. This process is referred to as “resyncing. The NSS also supports JBOD (Just a Bunch of Disks). 1. Disadvantages: Decreased reliability. This reflects the decreased performance and reliability of the array when it is missing disks.

If the parity information in the array gets out of sync with the data in the array. except that. CPU intensive calculation of parity.Configuring your Storage Choosing a RAID Array Level 4 increases the reliability (for example. Decreased write performance. increased reliability. if a disk is missing from the array. the array continues to be available for reads and writes. especially during rebuild operation. usually as the result of an unexpected loss of power to the system. the array must regenerate and rewrite the parity information of the array. RAID5: RAID5 stripes data written to the array like RAID0. 2-disk RAID1 mirrors. During a rebuild. This parity information is used during the reconstruction of the lost data when a drive fails in the array. Like RAID1. a three-disk RAID1 is one-third as likely to fail. The RAID array can sustain the loss of any single disk without data loss. The RAID array can sustain the loss of any single disk without any data loss. Depending on which disks fail. unlike RAID0. This process is referred to as “rebuilding”. which are then used to build a RAID0 array. • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 43 . RAID10 can be thought of as “mirror then stripe”. RAID5 generates parity information that also gets striped across the array. and so on). the array can lose up to two disks without data loss. • • • Minimum Number of Disks: 4 Total capacity: 2 x m Advantages: Increased read and write performance. • • • • Minimum Number of Disks: 3 Total capacity: m x (n-1) Advantages: Increased reliability. a two-disk RAID1 is half as likely to fail. The NSS implements RAID10 as two. Increased read and write performance. When a failed disk is then replaced. RAID10: RAID10 is a combination of RAID1 and RAID0. I/O intensive when resyncing mirrors. the array must be rebuilt. I/O intensive during rebuild operation. the array is said to be operating in “degraded” mode. Disadvantages: Decreased aggregate storage capacity (you lose the equivalent capacity of a single disk). Increased read performance. Disadvantages: Decreased aggregate storage capacity (you lose half of the storage space). • Disadvantages: Decreased aggregate storage capacity (each mirror disk does not contribute to the total capacity of the array).

Depending on how you create volumes on the JBOD array. in the failure of the whole array. It has lower reliability than the component disks. is not guaranteed. click Storage The RAID page appears: RAID. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 44 . however. as the failure of a single disk results. it does not have the limitation of RAID0 where you lose some capacity when using mixed sized disks). especially when using mixed size disks. Disadvantages: Decreased reliability. Advantages: Maximal storage capacity. This. Creating a RAID Array To create an array: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. • • • • Minimum Number of Disks: 1 Total capacity: sum of capacities of component disks.Configuring your Storage Creating a RAID Array 4 JBOD: JBOD lets you combine multiple disks of mixed capacities into a single logical storage device. you may be able to recover data when one or more disks in the JBOD fail. JBOD offers no performance increase compared to the component disks. in general. The capacity of the JBOD array is the sum of the total capacities of the individual component disks (that is.

As long as the array is clean. click the RAID level of the RAID array you want to create. Select each disk that you want to include in the array. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 45 . Click Add. From the RAID Level drop-down menu. You can monitor the progress of the RAID build from the Storage Status page. The disks used in the array are no longer available for creating additional arrays. these disks then become spares. STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Adding a Disk Drive to an Array You can add additional disks to an existing RAID1 or RAID5.Configuring your Storage Adding a Disk Drive to an Array 4 STEP 2 The available disks appear in the New RAID Device table. When the build is finished. The RAID creation can take some time to complete (depending on the size of the disks and the selected RAID level). the array appears in the RAID Arrays table.

NOTE When adding disks to an array. insert the disk in the NSS. click Storage The RAID page appears. With the exception of a JBOD. the total capacity is 750 GB. RAIDs are configured to use the maximum of the smallest disk capacity in the array for each additional disk in the array. RAID.Configuring your Storage Adding a Disk Drive to an Array 4 of disk with the same capacity. if you install two. 250 GB disks and one 500 GB disk. For example. STEP 3 In the RAID Arrays table. click Edit for the applicable RAID array. The new disk must have at least the same capacity of the smallest disk currently in the array. From the Manager Menu. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 46 . we recommend that you use the same model To add a disk to an array: STEP 1 STEP 2 If not already installed in the chassis.

Note that deleting an array also deletes any existing data on the array (including the volumes. the disk drive becomes a hot spare. and quotas). STEP 4 Available disk drives appear in the listing. If you delete an array that you must assign a new volume as the Home Directory location. Deleting an Array You can remove an existing array and release the disks used in the array back into available storage. the array can still be used. To delete an existing array: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. click Storage RAID. If the disk drive is added to a functional array. After the rebuild process completes. While the rebuild continues. If the disk drive is added to a degraded array. shares. the RAID array is rebuilt. Click Add to add the disk drive to the array. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 47 . You can monitor the progress of the rebuild through the System Status page. the disk becomes part of the redundant storage.Configuring your Storage Deleting an Array 4 The RAID Configuration page appears.

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 48 . Remove each of the disk drives that make up the RAID array to be moved. Insert each of the disk drives in the RAID array into the new NSS. click OK. STEP 2 Click Delete in the row of the RAID array that you want to delete. The deleted array disappears from the list of existing arrays.Configuring your Storage Migrating a RAID Array to another Storage Device 4 The RAID page appears. make sure that you coldplug the RAID array (instead of hotplugging it) into the new system by following these steps: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Power down the NSS (from which you are removing the RAID array). STEP 3 To continue. The disks used in the array are released back into available storage and appear in the New RAID Device table. Migrating a RAID Array to another Storage Device If you are migrating a RAID array from the NSS to another network NSS. Power down the NSS to which you are migrating the RAID array. A warning message appears.

STEP 5 When all the disk drives are installed. power up the NSS. NSS4000.Configuring your Storage Virtualizing Storage within your Network 4 NOTE You can install the drives into the new NSS in any order. You also cannot export storage from a device that uses imported storage. The supported RAID level for virtualized storage is JBOD (although the JBOD can consist of concatenated exported arrays). The recommended network configuration for using virtualization is to use an NSS6000 series to operate as the “master” storage device (the “slave” devices can either be NSS6000. or NSS2000 series devices). You do not need to install them in the same order or slots that they were installed in the original NSS. Virtualizing Storage within your Network The NSS virtualization feature lets you create storage physically located on other network NSS units into one logical storage unit. you cannot migrate the disks used for that RAID to another NSS. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 49 . NOTE After you configure a virtual RAID. NSS3000. This configuration setup means that you can export storage (must be an unused disk drive or configured array) from a slave NSS and then import the storage into the master NSS.

STEP 2 The Storage Virtualization page appears. click Storage Virtualization. Click Export. From the Manager Menu. The selected disk(s) disappear from the available list of arrays and appear in the Currently Exported Storage table at the top of the page. From the Link field. (see Creating Virtualized Storage. STEP 3 From the Export a device area. Follow the steps to create a JBOD from virtualized storage to use the exported storage. page 51) STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 50 . select each device that you want to export from the list of available devices. select the physical link that you want to use to export the storage.Configuring your Storage Exporting Storage to your Network 4 Exporting Storage to your Network To export storage to the network: STEP 1 Log into the configuration interface for the device from which you are exporting storage.

click the disks or arrays that you want to include in the JBOD. click Storage The RAID page appears. Click Add. From the Manager Menu. You can now create volumes from the virtualized JBOD. Select JBOD as the RAID level. The JBOD appears in the RAID Arrays listing. STEP 3 From the New RAID Device table. RAID. Exported disks from other NSS units in the network appear in the table.Configuring your Storage Creating Virtualized Storage 4 Creating Virtualized Storage To create a JBOD with exported disks: STEP 1 STEP 2 Log in to the configuration interface from the master unit. STEP 4 STEP 5 Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 51 .

delete any RAID arrays associated with the storage you want to unexport. (see Deleting an Array. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 52 . It now appears in the Export a device list and is again available for use. The disk drive(s) or array no longer appears in the Currently Exported Storage list. page 47) Display the Configuration Interface for the slave device that contains the storage you want to unexport. To unexport a piece of storage: STEP 1 From the Master device. Note that you can only unexport storage that has not yet been used. click Storage Virtualization.Configuring your Storage Unexporting Storage 4 Unexporting Storage You can choose to unexport pieces of the storage currently exported to the network. From the Manager Menu. STEP 2 STEP 3 The Storage Virtualization page appears. STEP 4 Click Unexport for the device you want to release from the network.

Configuring your Storage Volume Management 4 Volume Management A volume is a way to partition storage space available on an array. The Volumes table displays the following: • • • • • Volume: The name of the volume. Click Delete to remove the volume (and any saved data on the volume) from the array. The Storage Volumes page shows the following details about configured volumes or create additional volumes. that is currently used. as a percentage. • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 53 . % Used: The amount of space. Note that file transfer performance to encrypted volumes is generally lower than to nonencrypted volumes. you can either click Unlock to unlock it and make it usable. or click Lock to manually lock it. Action: Click Edit to make changes to the current volume. If the volume is encrypted. Total Space: The amount of space allocated for the volume (in MB or GB). Crypto: Whether the volume is encrypted or not. Location: The array on which the volume is located.

The final size of the shared volume is less than the size you enter in this field due to filesystem overhead. The volume name must consist of at least one alphanumeric character. Name: Enter the name you want to give the volume.Configuring your Storage Creating a Volume 4 Creating a Volume After you define at least one RAID array. groups. must begin with a letter. Volumes. • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 54 . The minimum volume size is 32 MB. STEP 2 From the New Volume area. To create a volume: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. and then select the unit from the drop-down menu. Volume sizes are rounded down to the nearest 32 MB increment. you can create a volume. but cannot contain any spaces. set up these fields: • • Array: Click the drop-down menu to select the array on which you want to create the volume. click Storage The Storage Volumes page appears. You need to create at least one volume before you can create users. or shares. Size (in MB): Enter the size for the volume.

you can increase its size. if the volume was manually locked through the NSS configuration interface. upper-case character. See Restoring a Configuration File. If you want to grow such a volume. There is no way to unlock the volume without the password. provided there is available space on the array.Configuring your Storage Expanding a Volume 4 NOTE Once the volume is created. you can expand the volume but you cannot reduce its size. After a volume is created. number (0-9). Expanding a Volume After a volume is created. shutdown. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 55 . If you forget the password. select Encrypted. To create an unencrypted volume. NOTE You can encrypt the volume only when the volume is first created. the only way to retrieve is if the password was saved in a configuration file. The password must be entered to unlock an encrypted volume when the NSS is started up following a power interruption. The password must consist of at least three of the following: lowercase character. STEP 4 Enter a password in the Password field using a minimum of eight alphanumeric characters. STEP 5 STEP 6 Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field. page 137. keep a secure backup of the password to ensure that it is accessible when required. Note: You cannot grow a volume if it is the target of a snapshot. you cannot change whether it is encrypted or unencrypted. ! CAUTION Because you need the password to decrypt a locked volume. or rebooted. delete the snapshots first and then expand the volume. or. go to Step 6. STEP 3 To encrypt the volume. File transfer performance to encrypted volumes is generally lower than to non-encrypted volumes. Click Add. or a special character (such as #@*&^).

Configuring your Storage Expanding a Volume 4 Volumes. click Storage The Volumes page appears. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 56 . To increase the size of a volume: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. STEP 2 Click Edit for the volume you want to expand.

then enter 224 in the Size field and set the unit field to MB. For example. If you selected Grow By. Resulting Size: Select this option to resize the volume to the space entered in the Size field. • STEP 4 Depending on your choice in the previous step. select Grow By. STEP 3 In the Resize by field. enter the new number in the Size field and then select the unit from the drop-down menu. if the volume currently has 224 MB of space and you want to add another 224 MB.Configuring your Storage Expanding a Volume 4 The Grow File System page appears for the selected volume. the new number becomes the total size for the volume. STEP 5 Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 57 . If you selected Resulting Size. The system rounds up the total space to the nearest 32 MB boundary. if the volume currently has 224 MB of space and you want it to have 928 MB. Click OK. select Resulting Size and then enter 928 in the Size field. select one of the following: • Grow By: Select this option to add the space allocated in the Size field to the existing space for the volume. The system rounds up the total space to the nearest 32 MB boundary. the new number is added to the existing volume size. For example.

you must reassign the Home Directory Location to another volume To delete a volume: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. ! CAUTION Deleting the volume removes any shares or data currently saved to that volume. Volumes.Configuring your Storage Deleting a Volume 4 Deleting a Volume You can choose to delete a volume at any time. If the volume was assigned as the users’ Home Directory Location. click Storage The Storage Volumes page appears. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 58 . click Delete for the volume you want to delete. STEP 2 From the Volumes area.

The recommended amount of a reserve is generally between 10 to 20% of the total volume size.Configuring your Storage Viewing the Snapshot Reserve Details 4 Viewing the Snapshot Reserve Details You can configure the NSS6000 series NAS to take snapshots of the data on an existing volume. set a higher reserve. The advantage of a snapshot over a backup is that a snapshot is user-accessible and can be used for quick file recovery resulting from end-user error (such as an accidentally deleted file). Each time a snapshot is taken. Note that if the period of time between snapshots is greater. the amount of the reserve should be greater. To ensure data integrity. and one for bi-weekly snapshots. You cannot grow a volume if it is the target of a snapshot. this space is not available for other storage use. the volume has three separate snapshot sequences. For example. Restoring data from a backup is generally a task that is scheduled with the IT administration staff. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 59 . The snapshot reserve is the amount of space that you want to allocate to the snapshot on the associated array. You can also configure multiple snapshot sequences for the same volume. you might want to capture a snapshot sequence for each hour. a separate sequence for weekly snapshots. during the creation of the snapshot (the duration is approximately a few seconds). if there is a heavy amount of activity on the volume. Each snapshot is overwritten when the next snapshot of the same frequency is taken. Snapshots can be taken at various time intervals (such as hourly. If you want to grow such a volume. In this case. a backup of each of the shares on the volume is created and is available within the system’s file directory to which end users of those shares have access. daily. Or. and so on). This is due to the snapshot reserve being used to store the changes to the volume contents since the last time the snapshot was taken. delete the snapshots first and then expand the volume. no writes can occur to the share. the previous snapshot is overwritten. When you create a snapshot. Backups are usually used to restore the system from a major system failure. Once set. NOTE This feature is only available on the NSS6000. This is typically done to have snapshots occur at different time intervals. A backup is only accessible to the administrator through the NSS configuration interface.

The Currently Active Snapshots area lists each snapshot set up for all the volumes on your NSS6000. it is also listed. or hour. These column headings provide details about the snapshot: • • Volume: The name of the volume for which the snapshot is set up. • • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 60 .Configuring your Storage Viewing the Snapshot Reserve Details 4 Maintaining Active Snapshots You can view the list of configured snapshots by displaying the Storage Snapshots page. If the time interval is set up to occur at a certain time of the week. Size: The size of the snapshot reserve. daily @ 10:30 means that the snapshot occurs each day at 10:30 a. For example. Current Usage: The percent of the space allocated for the snapshot currently taken up by the snapshot. Frequency: The time interval of the snapshot. day.m.

The recommended amount of a reserve is generally between 10 to 20% of the total volume size. To create a snapshot for a volume: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. and a daily snapshot. Or. the end user can access it by logging into the NSS with their username and password. The snapshot reserve is the amount of space that you want to allocate on the array to the snapshot. you can configure the NSS6000 to capture snapshots of the data stored on a volume. NOTE This feature is only available on NSS6000 series NAS units. weekly. snapshot is replaced by the 11:00 a. Each snapshot appears as a copy of the share accessible by the end user. When you create a snapshot. this space is not available for other storage use. click Storage Snapshots. daily. You can define a snapshot to occur at various frequencies (such as hourly.m. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 61 . if there is a heavy amount of activity on the volume. snapshot (and so on). For example. If the period of time between snapshots is greater. You can also configure multiple snapshots for the same volume. the amount of the reserve should be greater. Each of these three snapshots is maintained separately and is only overwritten by the subsequent snapshot of its own frequency type.Configuring your Storage Creating a Snapshot for a Volume 4 Creating a Snapshot for a Volume As part of your backup strategy. set a higher reserve. another snapshot to occur every four hours. the 10:00 a. Individual snapshots are overwritten by the subsequent snapshot for the same interval.m. you might set up an hourly snapshot. The snapshot(s) reside in the reserve area allocated for each snapshot. and so on). if you set up an hourly snapshot. For example. Once set.

and then click the snapshot frequency (hours or days). click the volume for which you are creating the snapshot.” and the second part to “Days” to take a snapshot once every week. set the first part of the field to “7. use the 24-hour clock.Configuring your Storage Creating a Snapshot for a Volume 4 The Storage Snapshots page appears. Use the At: fields to set up the timing for the snapshot. should be entered as 15:00.m. For example. For example. use the first part of the Every field to enter a unit of time. You must enter a minimum of 32 MB in this field. you can only edit the minutes part of the At: field. enter the amount of space that you want to allocate to the snapshot. When the frequency is set to Hours. if the frequency is set to Days. 3 p. Depending on the frequency. For example. set the hour and minute of the day at which you want the snapshot to be taken. This space becomes unavailable for any other storage on the array. STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 62 . When entering the hour. STEP 2 From the New Snapshot table. Tab to the second part of the Every field. In the Reserve Size field.

The snapshot details appear in the Currently Active Snapshots area at the top of the page. NOTE This feature is only available on NSS6000 series NAS units. The Volume column currently shows the amount of space left on the array on which the volume is located. When you take a snapshot of a volume using the resnap function. For example. refer to the applicable volume size listed on the Volume page. a new snapshot is built that overwrites the existing hourly snapshot. Clicking Add saves the first snapshot. Each subsequent snapshot occurs based on the defined schedule. if you have a snapshot set up to occur hourly and then click Resnap. To calculate the reserve size. click Storage Snapshots. the new snapshot overwrites the previously existing one for the specified interval. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 63 . STEP 6 Click Add to save the snapshot.Configuring your Storage Taking a Manual Snapshot of a Volume 4 NOTE The snapshot is built at the array level. To take a manual snapshot: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. Taking a Manual Snapshot of a Volume There might be times when you want to take a snapshot of a volume that falls outside of the regularly scheduled snapshot times.

a file folder appears in the end user’s file directory for each share to which the end user has access. To access a snapshot for a share: Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 64 . The snapshot takes seconds to complete. Windows End Users: Accessing a Snapshot for a Share After a snapshot is created for a volume. hourly.” Each file folder contains a subfolder for each snapshot interval (for example.Configuring your Storage Windows End Users: Accessing a Snapshot for a Share 4 The Storage Snapshots page appears. and so on). STEP 2 Click Resnap next to the volume for which you want to take a snapshot. daily. To ensure data integrity. no writes can occur to the share until the snapshot is complete. Snapshots are saved with the name of the share followed by an underscore and then the term “snap.

take a copy of it. Map the NSS to a network drive. type \\<hostname> or IP address in the Address bar (where the <hostname> refers to your NSS hostname. and lock. STEP 1 There are a variety of ways to access the NSS: • • The Log In window appears. and then place the copy in a working directory. STEP 5 Volume Encryption Overview The Volumes page lists both the encrypted and unencrypted volumes and lets you create a volume. Browse for the NSS from the My Network Places window. NOTE File transfer performance to encrypted volumes is generally lower than non- encrypted volumes. \\NAS). The Windows Explorer window opens with a directory listing of the folders for the shares available on the user’s home directory Snapshots are read-only. locate it. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 65 . For example. To work with a snapshot. or change the password for encrypted volumes. STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Enter your user name and password. unlock.Configuring your Storage Volume Encryption Overview 4 • From the My Computer window. Click OK.

click Storage Volumes. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 66 . To lock a volume: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu.Configuring your Storage Locking an Encrypted Volume 4 Locking an Encrypted Volume You can manually lock an encrypted volume at any time. Locking a volume means that it becomes unmounted and is unusable (you cannot create or use shares stored on the locked volume). This provides an extra layer of security against the theft of data.

click Storage Volumes. To unlock a volume: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu.Configuring your Storage Unlocking a Locked Volume 4 The Volumes page appears. you must unlock it before it can be used for tasks such as creating shares or quotas. Unlocking a Locked Volume When an encrypted volume is locked. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 67 . STEP 2 Click Lock to lock the volume. The Crypto column displays whether the volume is encrypted (Yes) or not encrypted (No). either automatically as a result of the NSS being rebooted or manually locked through the configuration interface.

STEP 3 STEP 4 Enter the password for the volume in the Password field. The Unlock Volume page appears. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 68 . The volume is now unlocked. STEP 2 Click Unlock for the volume you want to unlock. The Volume Encryption page appears.Configuring your Storage Unlocking a Locked Volume 4 The Volumes page appears. Click OK.

click Storage The Volumes page appears. If you forget the password. Volumes.” on page 54). or. keep a backup of the password so that you can access it when required.” on page137. STEP 2 Click Edit for the volume you want to change. The password must be entered when the NSS is started up after a power interruption. the volume has been manually locked. After the volume is created. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 69 . There is no way to unlock the volume without the password. the only way to retrieve it is if the password was saved in a configuration file. you can change the password at any time.Configuring your Storage Changing the Password for an Encrypted Volume 4 Changing the Password for an Encrypted Volume A password must be set up when you create an encrypted volume (see “Creating a Volume. To change the password on an existing encrypted volume: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. ! CAUTION Because the password is required to de-crypt a locked volume. See “Restoring a Configuration File.

You can control how the system prioritizes the rebuild and allocates the system’s resources based on your system’s current workload and need for responsiveness.Configuring your Storage Storage Options 4 The Edit Volume page appears. the CPU switches between tasks to service all active tasks on the system. enter the password. (Select Never to ensure that the drives are never spun down. Re-enter the new password in the Confirm Password field. • • • • In Current Password field. enter the new password. Creating a RAID array or rebuilding an existing array can take up a significant amount of the available percentage of CPU processing power. Select the period of time that the disk drive must be idle before it is spun down. Click Update. In the New Password field. Storage Options The Storage Options page lets you define the following: • Idle Drive Spin Down: Configure the NSS to spin down the disk drives after a predefined time of inactivity. To set the • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 70 .) RAID Rebuild Priority: During normal operation.

Warning messages are sent out periodically while the RAID array is degraded. - Medium: This option gives a balance between the rebuild process and other system tasks. if you add a spare drive to RAID A. A system limited to local disks lets you only build up to two. If this option is disabled. if RAID A is a two-drive RAID1 that is not degraded and RAID B is a degraded two-drive RAID1. the NSS automatically gives the spare drive to RAID B to enable RAID B to resync. You can manually restart RAID arrays automatically stopped by using degraded mode management. two-disk RAID arrays. This option is only relevant when you use network disks (via storage virtualization). For example.Configuring your Storage Storage Options 4 RAID rebuild priority. spare drives added to one RAID array may be reallocated by the NSS to another RAID array. but have no spares. Enable Global Spares: Allow RAID arrays defined in the system to share spare drives. a RAID array can only use a spare that has been added to that particular array. File-sharing throughput is adversely affected during a RAID rebuild when this setting is chosen. • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 71 . This setting allows for the fastest possible RAID rebuild at the expense of other system tasks. - • Degraded Mode Grace Period: Set the period of time after which the system automatically shuts down degraded arrays. the CPU services the rebuild process well. If this option is enabled. Note that if you are repairing an array. if the workload on the system is low. choose one of the following from the RAID Rebuild Priority field: • High: The CPU focuses on the RAID rebuilding process. This results in a longer rebuild time on a busy system. this option leaves the array vulnerable until the rebuild is complete. The rebuild process takes longer than if it was set to High. However. Low: The CPU focuses on other tasks versus the RAID rebuild process.

click Update.Configuring your Storage Storage Options 4 If you make changes to any of the storage options. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 72 .

Managing your NSS Users You can create. This table lists each defined user whether the user was created locally through the NSS configuration interface or imported from an NTv4. and the share or path that the user is accessing. The Access Status page automatically refreshes on a regular interval and is helpful for monitoring the progress of certain processes such as the current end-user connections to the NSS. The page displays the username. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 73 . The Configured Users page displays the Configured Users table. view. Active Directory. the name of the host from which the user is currently connected.5 Setting up End-User Access The Access Status page shows the current end-user connections to the NSS. grouped by the file-sharing protocol used. and maintain the list of users who can access the NSS. or NIS domain.

Setting up End-User Access
Creating a User Profile

5

Users that are not created locally through the NSS are read-only. Once a user profile is created, you cannot rename the username. To rename an existing user profile, delete the user profile and then create a new one. User profiles are maintained by the administrator. Users cannot make changes to their passwords.

To limit the entries in the User list, perform a substring search by entering the desired search string in the User List Filter field, and then click Filter. (For example, enter "ea" to display any list items that contain "ea" such as "Sean" or "BillyJean".) To clear the filter, delete the contents of the User List Filter field, and then click Filter.

Creating a User Profile
Depending on your network setup, you might administer users and groups locally or through the domain controller. The NSS configuration interface gives you readonly access to users and groups provided by NTv4, Active Directory, or NIS domains. You can also create and manage local users from the NSS configuration interface. Before you can create a user profile, you must configure the volume you want to use as the home directory location for your users on the Access Options page (from the Manager Menu, click Access Options).

Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide

74

Setting up End-User Access
Creating a User Profile

5
Users.

To add a local user:
STEP 1

From the Manager Menu, click Access

The Configured Users page appears. Users created from the NSS configuration interface and provided by the ADS, NTv4, or NIS domain appear in the Configured Users table.
STEP 2

Click Add to create a user. The New User page appears.

STEP 3

In the Username field, type the username. The name must be made up of alphanumeric characters (that is, a-z, 0-9), any case, to a maximum of 32 characters. This field is required. Select the group you want to assign as the user’s primary group from the Primary Group field. If there are no groups configured, the only available choice is the default group “nasusers”. This field is required.

STEP 4

NOTE Although you can assign the user to multiple groups (through the Add Group or Edit

Group page), the primary group is the group against which quota charges for the user’s storage usage are made and is the group that defines the group ownership for all files created by the user. The primary group applies to users set up locally on the NSS. A domain user’s primary group is set up from the domain and is not derived from the Primary Group field in the NSS user profile

Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide

75

Setting up End-User Access
Editing a User Profile

5

STEP 5

Assign a password by entering any valid (ASCII table) characters in the Password field. The password is required. To verify the password, re-enter it in the Confirm Password field.

STEP 6

NOTE All password changes to end-user accounts set up through the NSS configuration

pages must be made by the administrator.
STEP 7

To record the user’s full name, enter it in the Real Name field. This field is optional. You cannot enter the “/” character in this field. To record the user’s email address, enter it in the Email Address field. This field is optional. Click OK to create the user and exit the New User page. Click Apply to create the user and then add another new user.

STEP 8

STEP 9

Editing a User Profile
You can change certain aspects of the user’s profile. Note that once you create a username, the only way to “rename” that user is to delete the existing user profile and then create a new one. If the user profile resides on an ADS, NTv4, or NIS domain, you need to edit the profile from the applicable domain manager. All password changes for end-user accounts set up directly through the NSS configuration pages must be done by the Administrator. To edit an existing user profile:
STEP 1

From the Manager Menu, click Access

Users.

Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide

76

STEP 2 Select the user from the list. and then click Edit. (For example. The existing users appear in the Configured Users table. perform a substring search by entering the desired search string in the User List Filter field.Setting up End-User Access Editing a User Profile 5 The Configured Users page appears. enter "ea" to display any list items that contain "ea" such as "Sean" or "BillyJean".) The end user’s profile appears in the Edit User page. To limit the entries in the User list. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 77 . and then clicking Filter.

or NIS domain. The naming conventions use the NetBIOS format with the domain name as a prefix of the username. NTv4. NTv4. or NIS Domain When the NSS is joined to an ADS. You can make changes to any of the other fields in the user’s profile. After you join the NSS to a domain. or NIS Domain 5 STEP 3 The username is read-only. NTv4 or NIS domain is taken from the user’s domain profile versus the Primary Group field in the NSS user profile. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 78 .Setting up End-User Access Integrating Users from an ADS. you should not make changes to the range as this might lead to an ID collision. The primary group for users set up within the ADS. You can view the entire user list from the Configured Users page but can only edit or delete locally created users (not domain users). NTv4. NTv4. STEP 4 Integrating Users from an ADS. or NIS domain. Click Update. a list of existing domain users is imported into the Configured Users list. NOTE Make sure that you set up your User and Group ID ranges before you join the NSS to an ADS.

the user’s home directory and any files or folders created by the user on the various shares are not deleted. To delete an existing user profile: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. Deleting a User Profile You can delete user profiles that were created through the NSS. Users who log in without the hostname prefix are automatically assumed to be domain users. if the NSS hostname is “NASadmin” and the local username is “bob”. Users. local users must prefix their username with the hostname of the NSS. When you delete a user profile.Setting up End-User Access Deleting a User Profile 5 Logging into the NSS as a Local User When the NSS is joined to an NTv4 or ADS domain. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 79 . click Access The Configured Users page appears. For example. As an administrator. the user would need to log in as “NASadmin\bob” in the login dialog. you can log into CIFS using the administrator account to delete the user’s data as required.

Setting up End-User Access Working with Groups 5 Shift-click: To select a contiguous group of users that you want to delete. enter "ea" to display any list items that contain "ea" such as "Sean" or "BillyJean". The storage usage is charged to their primary group for the purposes of volume quota accounting. hold down the Shift key. Click Delete to delete the highlighted users. delete the contents of the Group List Filter field. Creating a Group Groups let you specify the share access privileges for a set of users. you can define the group’s access privileges on a per-share basis. other than the primary group. When users create a file. Group membership. Users are assigned a primary group within their user profile.) To clear the filter. and then clicking Filter. After you create a group. the group ownership is automatically set to their primary group. and then click Filter. A group consists of one or more users. (For example. Ctrl-click: To select a non-contiguous group of users that you want to delete. then click the first user. is defined in either the Add Group or Edit Group page and is used only to control access to shares and files. perform a substring search by entering the desired search string in the Group List Filter field. Working with Groups Groups are an easy way to manage users with the same storage needs and privileges. and then click each user from the list. The user’s primary group (the group to which quota charges for storage usage are applied) is set up in the Primary Group field of the user’s profile. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 80 . and then the last user in the series. To delete multiple users. hold down the Ctrl key. This group is the default primary group when you create new users. A group called “nasusers” is automatically created when you first install the NSS. You can also add or remove users to and from the group at any time. use the following mouse-key combinations: • • The selected user(s) disappear from the list of available users. STEP 2 Click the username and then click Delete. To limit the entries in the Group list. Click Delete to delete the highlighted users. You can add or remove users from a group at any time.

STEP 2 Click Add. The Configured Groups page appears. click Access Groups.Setting up End-User Access Creating a Group 5 NOTE You cannot grant security privileges to a group for a CIFS share through an ACL. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 81 . To create a group: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu.

STEP 3 In the Group Name field.. type the name you want to assign to the group. and then clicking Filter.) STEP 4 STEP 5 Click OK to save the current group and display the Configured Groups page. perform a substring search by entering the desired search string in the User List Filter field. The double angled bracket “<<“ or “>>” moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 82 . Note that a user can be assigned to multiple groups. 09.) To limit the entries in the Users Available list. Move the users you want to assign to the group from the Users Available list to the Users in Group list. Click Apply to save the current group and remain in the New Group page to add another group.e. enter "ea" to display any list items that contain "ea" such as "Sean" or "BillyJean".Setting up End-User Access Creating a Group 5 The New Group page appears. a-z. (For example. _) to a maximum of 32 characters. (The single angled bracket “<“ or “>” moves the selection in the direction of the bracket. The name can only contain lower-case alphanumeric characters and underscores (i.

Setting up End-User Access Changing the Users Assigned to a Group 5 Changing the Users Assigned to a Group After you create a group. To change the group membership: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu.e. STEP 2 STEP 3 From the list of configured groups. NOTE When you delete an end user from a group. access to shares) until they log off/log on to their computer. click Access Groups. the end user must log out of their client machine before the change takes effect. you can delete or add to the list of users that belong to that group. The Configured Groups page appears. This means that users no longer assigned to a group maintain full group privileges (i. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 83 . select the group that you want to change.. Click Edit. The Edit Group page appears.

“DOMAINNAME\GroupName” NOTE Make sure that you set up your User and Group ID ranges before you join the NSS to an ADS. or NIS Domain When the NSS is joined to an Active Directory. the group is automatically removed from having access to any configured shares. or NIS Domain 5 STEP 4 Set up the Users in Group list as required. The double angled bracket “<<“ or “>>” moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket. STEP 5 Integrating Groups from an Active Directory. To delete a group: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 84 . domain groups are imported into the Configured Groups list. For example.Setting up End-User Access Integrating Groups from an Active Directory. NTv4.) Click Update. Group membership for imported domain groups are read-only. After you join the NSS to a domain. NTv4. (The single angled bracket “<“ or “>” moves the selection in the direction of the bracket. NTv4. or NIS domain. NTv4. Deleting a Group When you delete a group. you should not make changes to the range as this might lead to an ID collision. The naming conventions use the NetBIOS format with the domain name as a prefix of the group name. or NIS domain. click Access Groups.

Setting up End-User Access Deleting a Group 5 The Configured Groups page appears. and then the last group in the series. To delete multiple groups. hold down the Ctrl key. Click Delete to delete the highlighted groups. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 85 . and then click Edit. use the following key-mouse combination: - Shift-click: To select a contiguous list of groups that you want to delete. The Edit Groups page appears. and then click each group from the list. hold down the Shift key. Ctrl-click: To select a non-contiguous set of groups that you want to delete. you must remove any assigned users. STEP 2 STEP 3 Before you can delete a group. - • Edit Groups page: Select the group you want to edit. then click the first group. Click Delete to remove the group. and then click Delete. You can delete a group from two locations in the NSS configuration interface: • Groups page: Highlight the group you want to delete from the Configured Groups table. Click Delete to delete the highlighted groups.

make sure that the volume is unlocked. The user has the amount of time in the grace period to reduce the amount of space used to under the soft quota limit. Defining a user or group’s quota means that you can set a space limit (referred to as a soft quota) that. Users who do not reduce the space in the allotted grace period. note that there is a small delay before the usage is updated on the Quota page. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 86 . no longer have write access to the volume until they reduce their usage to under their soft quota limit. when reached. sends a warning to the administrator and initiates a countdown of the defined grace period. You also need to set up the Warn For time for each volume from the Volume Quota page. When a user creates. The Warn For time only affects individual quota that was created after the Warn For time was set.Setting up End-User Access Managing Volume Quotas 5 Managing Volume Quotas You can set up specific space limits for each user or group who has write access to a volume. This delay is due to the caching in the filesystem used to provide high performance NOTE Before you create or edit a quota located on an encrypted volume. or who reach their hard quota limit. modifies or deletes a file on a volume.

If the user’s primary group changes while the user is connected to the NSS. files created under the previous group continue to be charged against that group. the primary group defined is in the user profile from the domain. If the user’s primary group changes. About the Volume Quota Page Use the Volume Quota page to manage user and group quotas for each volume. The new primary group becomes the group charged only after the connection is reopened. To display the Volume Quota page.Setting up End-User Access Managing Volume Quotas 5 Changing the User’s Primary Group Quotas are charged to the group assigned as the user’s primary group at the time of file creation. not from the Primary Group field in the NSS user profile. NOTE If you create a user within a domain. click Access Quota. from the Manager Menu. the previous primary group continues to be the group charged until the user’s connection is closed. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 87 .

Setting up End-User Access Creating Volume Quota for a User or Group 5 Creating Volume Quota for a User or Group You can set up a quota on a volume for each user or group. You also need to set up the Warn For time for each volume from the Volume Quota page. STEP 2 Click Create Quota. do not create a quota for that user or group. click Access The Filesystem Quota page appears. To create a quota for a user or group: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 88 . The Warn For time only affects individual quota that was created after the Warn For time was set. To give certain users or groups assigned to a volume full access to the space on the volume. NOTE Before you can create quota on an encrypted volume. make sure that it is unlocked. This quota limits the user or group to the allocated amount of space within the volume. Quota.

In the Warning at field. enter "ea" to display any list items that contain "ea" such as "Sean" or "BillyJean". This is also referred to as a “soft quota. when exceeded. the user can no longer write data to the volume until they either reduce the amount of space used to under the limit by deleting files or have the quota increased. This is also referred to as a “hard quota. (For example. the grace period set up for the volume begins.) Select the user or group for which you are creating the quota from the For User/ Group drop-down list. To limit the entries in the User/Group list. When the threshold is exceeded. perform a substring search by entering the desired search string in the User/Group List Filter field. enter the amount of space that the user or group has available to use. STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 7 Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 89 . enter the threshold of space that. Click Update. and then clicking Filter. and then select the size unit from the drop-down menu. The user has the amount of time set in the grace period to reduce the amount of space used to under the space set in the Warning at field or they are not allowed to write further data to the volume. triggers a warning that the quota is close to being used up.” If the user reaches the space limit.Setting up End-User Access Creating Volume Quota for a User or Group 5 The New Filesystem Quota page appears.” In the Space Limit field. STEP 3 Select the volume on which you want to set the quota from the New Quota on drop-down list.

Users then have the amount of time set in the grace period to either reduce the amount of spaced used by deleting files. the user is automatically denied write access to the volume. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 90 . When the users reach their “soft quota. Quota. make sure that you set up the Warn For time for each volume from the Filesystem Quota page. To set up the grace period for a volume: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu.Setting up End-User Access Setting up the Grace Period for a Volume Quota 5 Setting up the Grace Period for a Volume Quota You can set up a limit on the amount of space available to your users or groups.” a warning is issued and the grace period begins. This limit can be set as a soft quota and hard quota. The Warn For time only affects individual quota that was created after the Warn For time was set. or have the quota increased. NOTE Before you create quotas for a user or group. click Access The Filesystem Quota page appears. If the amount of space is not reduced before the grace period expires or the user reaches the hard quota.

STEP 3 STEP 4 Click Update. Enter the number in the first part of the field. and the time unit in the second part of the field. the user or group is denied write access. When a user reaches their soft quota limit. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each applicable volume. enter “3” and then select “days”. Changing a Volume Quota for a User or Group After a quota is created. Quota. when the quota is under the limit. you can increase or decrease it. the amount listed on Filesystem Quota page turns red. enter the time period in the Warn for <time period> before denying access field. You can also change the limit at which the user or group receives a warning message and the grace period begins. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 91 .Setting up End-User Access Changing a Volume Quota for a User or Group 5 STEP 2 To set up the grace period. to warn the user or group that they have reached their soft limit and have three days to reduce it. Normally. it appears in black type. For example. To change the quota limit or warning limit: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. after which if the soft limit set for the user or group is still exceeded. click Access The Filesystem Quota page appears.

To clear a quota for a user or group: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. The Edit Quota page appears. click Access Quota. Clearing a quota means that the user or group no longer has a space limitation on their use of the associated volume (other than the actual unused storage space on the volume). Click Update.Setting up End-User Access Clearing a Quota 5 STEP 2 Click Edit for the user or group for which you want to change the quota. STEP 3 STEP 4 Make the required changes to the soft (warning) or hard quota (space limit) limits. Clearing a Quota After a quota has been set up. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 92 . you can clear it.

Setting up End-User Access Network Filters Overview 5 The Filesystem Quota page appears. To view the network filters: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. STEP 2 Click Clear for the user or group whose quota you want to remove. Defining network filters lets you specify which network hosts have access to the NSS through the various supported protocols. Quotas are displayed according to their associated volume. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 93 . click Access Network. Network Filters Overview In addition to providing storage for your data. the NSS provides a firewall that you can configure to protect that data.

(see “Creating a Network Filter.” on page 94) View or delete the existing filters defined for the NSS from the Active Network Access Filters table. (see “Defining the Default Network Policy.(see “Network Filters Overview. click Access Network. To define the default network policy: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. The default policy can be defined to either accept or reject such traffic.” on page 93) Create a new filter based on an IP or MAC address or a range of IP addresses.” on page 96) • • Defining the Default Network Policy The default network policy is the overarching policy that defines the gateway for communication to the NSS. STEP 2 You can do any of the following: • Set the default network policy to control what happens to traffic not explicitly covered by defined filters.Setting up End-User Access Defining the Default Network Policy 5 The Network Filters page appears. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 94 . It specifies how traffic that is not covered by defined filters is handled.

select those filters that “allow” certain types of connections. Drop Traffic: Disallow the NSS from communicating with any initiating systems. • NOTE If you set the default policy to Drop and you want to enable FTP connections. make sure that you set the FTP connection type on the host to active. and so on. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 95 . you might only want to allow FTP connections. When you set up your filters. click one of the following: • Accept Traffic: Allow the NSS to communicate with all initiating hosts. you might want to disallow CIFS connections but allow all other types.Setting up End-User Access Defining the Default Network Policy 5 The Network Filters page appears.. For example. (If you set the connection type to passive you can connect to the NSS but are not able to list. drop or reject) certain types of connections. Select this option if you have a limited number of systems that you want to disallow. When you set up your individual filters. select those filters that “disallow” (i.e. transfer the data. Select this option if you have a limited number of systems that you want to allow to communicate with the NSS.) STEP 3 Click Change Policy. STEP 2 From the Default Network Policy drop-down menu. For example.

Setting up End-User Access Creating a Network Filter 5 Creating a Network Filter The Active Network Access Filters table on the Network Filters page displays currently defined filters. click Access The Network Filters page appears. You can also enter addresses for the following: • IP Address Range: Type the range according to the following format: first address-last address. any existing connections that would normally be denied by this rule remain intact. and then the last IP address in the range. Each device in your network is assigned a fixed 48-bit MAC address and changeable 32-bit IP address. followed by a hyphen. These filters control if access to the NSS from specified hosts is granted or denied on a per-protocol basis. To add a network filter: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu.) Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 96 . Network. (Where the first IP address in the range is entered first. NOTE When you define a new filter. in the IP/MAC address field. STEP 2 From the New Network Access Filter table. These connections are denied during the next attempt to connect to the NSS. type the IP/MAC address to which you are applying the filter. it grants or denies access through the specified protocol from the specified IP/MAC address or range of IP addresses. When you define a filter.

Click Add. Any connections that apply to the new filter rule are affected by the rule during the next connection attempt.168. Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 97 .1.0/24 (where the digits following the slash represent the number of bits in the network portion of the IP address). • STEP 3 From the Filter drop-down menu. The format should appear as shown in the following example: 192. click the drop-down arrow next to the Filter field on the Network Filters page. STEP 4 Available Access Filters When you configure network filters. To display the list of available filters.Setting up End-User Access Available Access Filters 5 Subnet: Enter the subnet to set a filter for all the addresses within the subnet. select the type of filter you want to apply to the IP/MAC address. determine which protocols can or cannot access the NSS.

Drop CIFS: Do not allow CIFS filesharing access. Reject NFS: Do not allow NFS filesharing access. The NSS informs the system initiating the connection about the denial of service. Drop NFS: Do not allow NFS filesharing access. Allow NFS: Allow NFS access. The NSS does not inform the system initiating the connection about the denial of service. the NSS drops the traffic but no notice is sent to the initiating system. Reject FTP: Do not allow FTP or FTPS traffic. The NSS does not inform the system initiating the connection about the denial of service. It tells the NSS to accept traffic via all supported protocols. Allow FTP: Allow FTP and FTPS access. Allow HTTP: Allow access to the NSS configuration interface through a Web browser. Drop FTP: Do not allow FTP or FTPS traffic.Setting up End-User Access Available Access Filters 5 NOTE Rejecting versus Dropping Traffic: When incoming traffic matches a reject filter. • • • • • • • • Allow All: This is the default filter. The NSS does not inform the system initiating the connection about the denial of service. Drop HTTP: Do not allow access to the NSS configuration interface via a Web browser. Reject HTTP: Do not allow access to the NSS configuration interface via a Web browser. Reject CIFS: Do not allow CIFS filesharing access. • • • • • Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 98 . the NSS drops the traffic and then sends a notice to the initiating system of the denial of service. When incoming traffic matches a drop filter. The NSS does not inform the system initiating the connection about the denial of service. The NSS informs the system initiating the connection about the denial of service. Allow CIFS: Allow CIFS filesharing access. The NSS informs the system initiating the connection about the denial of service. The NSS informs the system initiating the connection about the denial of service.

To delete a filter. or ADS domain as you should not change the range after the domain has been joined.Setting up End-User Access Deleting a Network Filter 5 Deleting a Network Filter To delete a network filter: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. click Delete for the filter you want to remove. it is important to set up the ranges for the various types of users and groups (i. The filter is no longer active. The ID range should be set up before you create any local users or join a NIS.. click Access The Network Filters page appears. Network. In addition to setting the ID ranges. STEP 2 The Active Network Access Filters table lists the existing filters. NIS domain. To set up the ID ranges and home directory location: Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 99 . and Windows domain). you also need to define which volume you are using to store your users’ home directories. NTv4. local. The filter disappears from the list. Configuring the User/Group Settings To avoid conflicts between your user and group IDs.e.

When you create a user or group. Click Update. After you join the NTv4 or ADS domain.Setting up End-User Access Configuring the User/Group Settings 5 Options. the ID assigned is in this range. click Access The User/Group Settings page appears. STEP 2 Set up the following ID Ranges: • Local Users and Groups ID Range: This ID range applies to any users or groups created from the NSS configuration interface. • • STEP 3 Set the volume that you want to assign as the home directory location for your users through the Home Directory Location field. Users and groups from your NTv4 and ADS domain are mapped to local user or group IDs within this range. STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. Windows Domain Users and Groups ID Range: This ID range must be at least 10. It is important to set this range before you join the NTv4 or ADS domain.000 in size. the ID range should not change. Make sure the range you set does not conflict with the NIS or Windows domain ranges. NIS Domain Users and Groups ID Range: This ID range should match the range of IDs defined in your NIS domain and not conflict with the local or Windows ID range. Set this range before you join the NSS to the NIS domain. STEP 4 Lynksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 100 .

There is a limit of 21 users and groups (the combined total) that you can assign access privileges to a share. from the Manager Menu.6 Managing the Shares To display a list of your defined file shares. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 101 . You can add new shares by clicking the Create Share button. click Shares Shares. This page displays read-only details about the shares that are currently defined on the NSS. If you have a number of users that exceeds the limitation. assign the applicable users to a group or groups and then assign the group to the share. There is no limit to the number of users that you can assign to an individual group. The File Shares page appears.

Shares. Creating a Share NOTE You cannot create a share on a locked volume. To add a share: STEP 1 STEP 2 From the Manager Menu. If the volume is locked.Managing the Shares Creating a Share 6 After you define at least one volume. assign the applicable users to a group or groups and then assign the group to the share. There is no limit to the number of users that you can assign to an individual group. and unlock the volume. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 102 . go to the Volume page. If you have a number of users that exceeds the limitation. click Shares Click Create Share. you can create the shares that can be accessed by your users when they log into the NSS. There is a limit of 21 users and groups (the combined total) that you can assign access privileges to a share. The New Share page appears.

When you set this option.” on page108“to add shared folder links to the root. the CIFS Default File Creation Attributes and Protocol checkboxes are greyed out as they are not relevant. (These settings are optional. To make an NFS share world readable/writable. You cannot set it as a DFS root after it is created or revert a DFS root share to be a regular share. For example. • • STEP 7 Set the Allow users to delete or rename other users’ files and folders field as required. This field determines whether users who are assigned to a share can delete or rename files or folders within that share that they do not own. refer to the information stated in the Public field. and save the file. if this field is not selected and you gave a user write permissions to a file and that user tried to open. Not all applications work this way. users with write permissions can rename or delete files or folders within the assigned share even though they are not the owners of the files or folders. select the volume on which you want to configure the share. This comment appears when you browse the NSS from My Network Places (as the tooltip when you hover over the share. Users can access and view the share but cannot write to the share. From the Location field. and ensure the Read-Only checkbox is also selected.) STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 • Public: Enable all users to access the share. Read-Only: If the share is configured as a public share. Follow the steps in “Adding a DFS Shared Folder. Add a description or comment about the share in the Comment field. select this checkbox. or if you select the Details viewing mode). the save would fail due to the fact that Word sets up a temporary file and then attempts to delete it and replace it with the new version. Click the Share Attributes options to configure the share as public and if public. read-only. enter a name for the share.) DFS Root: Set the share to be a Microsoft DFS root. Always consider the applications used by your users to determine how you want to set this field.Managing the Shares Creating a Share 6 In the Share field. To make an NFS share world readable. select this checkbox. The share must be set as a DFS root when it is created. It is important to consider interoperability with applications such as MS Word 2007 and Photoshop. and ensure the Read-Only checkbox is also deselected. This field is optional. (For NFS shares. • Select this field: By selecting this field. edit. allow the users read-only access to the share. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 103 .

NFS: Enable NFS access to the share. it behaves as though this field is selected until this field is changed. the NSS must also be configured to allow FTP access. NOTE Any subfolders created through CIFS behave according to the current setting of the Allow users to delete or rename other users’ files or folders field. When creating files by using NFS. These subfolders then behave according to the current setting. the owner can manually set the group permissions when the file is created and can edit them at a later time. The group is assigned during file creation.Managing the Shares Creating a Share 6 • Deselect this field: Users cannot rename or delete a file or folder within the assigned share unless they are the owners of the file or folder. the owner can manually set the group permissions when the file is created and can edit them at a later time. This group cannot be edited at a later time. The group is assigned during file creation. • • • STEP 9 From the Protocol field. Everyone Readable: All authenticated users can view the file. This group cannot be edited at a later time. click the checkboxes to select the protocols that can be used to access the share: • • • CIFS: Enable CIFS access to the share. To allow NFS access to the share. STEP 8 Set up the defaults for how file permissions are set when a file is created using CIFS via the following CIFS File Creation Attributes checkboxes: • Group Readable: Members of the group assigned to the file have read permission. Group Writable: Members of the group assigned to the file have write permission. To allow FTP access to the share. For files created by using CIFS. the group is automatically assigned as the owner’s default group. FTP: Enable FTP access to the share. When creating files by using CIFS. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 104 . the group is automatically assigned as the owner’s default group. If a subfolder is created through NFS or FTP. Everyone Writable: All authenticated users have write permission to the file.When creating files by using NFS. the NSS must also be configured to allow NFS access.

Managing the Shares Editing an Existing Share 6 boxes.) • • Read-Only Groups: These groups have read-only access to the share. The double angled bracket "<<" or ">>" moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket.) STEP 10 To assign users access to the share. There is no limit to the number of users that you can assign to an individual group. STEP 12 Click OK. changing the share attributes. (The single angled bracket "<" or ">" moves the selection in the direction of the bracket. There is a limit of 21 users and groups (the combined total) that you can assign access privileges to a share. and adding a DFS shared folder for shares set up to be a DFS root. Read-Write Users: These users have full read-write access to the share. click Shares Shares. Editing an Existing Share After a share is created. The double angled bracket "<<" or ">>" moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket. STEP 11 To assign a group access to the share. move the users into one of the following boxes. Read-Write Groups: These groups have full read-write access to the share. If you have a number of users that exceeds the limitation. such as changing user or group permissions. Click Edit for the share you want to change. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 105 . • • Read-Only Users: These users have read-only access to the share. move the users into one of the following NOTE Setting individual user and group permissions on NFS shares only works when joined to an NIS domain. assign the applicable users to a group or groups and then assign the group to the share. To edit a share: STEP 1 STEP 2 From the Manager Menu. (The single angled bracket "<" or ">" moves the selection in the direction of the bracket. you can make changes to it.

This field determines whether users who are assigned to a share can delete or rename files or folders within that share that they do not own. and save the file. For example. the save would fail due to the fact that Word sets up a temporary file and then attempts to delete it and replace it with the new version. It is important to consider interoperability with applications such as MS Word 2007 and Photoshop. Change the setting for the Allow users to delete or rename other users’ files and folders field as required. STEP 3 You can change the comment from the Comment field as required. if this field is not selected and you gave a user write permissions to a file and that user tried to open. Always consider the applications used by your users to determine how you want to set this field. edit. STEP 4 • Select this field: By selecting this field. Deselect this field: Users cannot rename or delete a file or folder within the assigned share unless they are the owners of the file or folder. This comment appears when you browse the NSS from My Network Places (as the tooltip when you hover over the share. or if you select the Details viewing mode).Managing the Shares Editing an Existing Share 6 The Edit Share page appears. • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 106 . users with write permissions can rename or delete files or folders within the assigned share even though they are not the owners of the files or folders. Not all applications work this way.

The group is assigned during file creation. Read-Only: Users can view the share as read-only. • • • STEP 7 From the Protocol field. NFS: Enable NFS access the share. the NSS must also be configured to allow NFS access. To allow NFS access to the share. Group Writable: Members of the group assigned to the file have read-write permissions. the group is automatically assigned as the owner’s default group. the NSS must also be configured to allow NFS access. This group cannot be edited at a later time. Everyone Readable: All authenticated users can view the file. click the checkboxes to select the protocols that can be used to access the share: • • • CIFS: Enable CIFS access the share. the group is automatically assigned as the owner’s default group. the owner can manually set the group permissions when the file is created and can edit them at a later time. it behaves as though this field is selected until this field is changed. FTP: Enable FTP access to the share.Managing the Shares Editing an Existing Share 6 of the Allow users to delete or rename other users’ files or folders field. To allow FTP access to the share. For NFS files. This group cannot be edited at a later time. These subfolders then behave according to the current setting. For files created via CIFS. behave according to the current setting STEP 5 The Share attributes checkbox determines if the share is read-only or if users can write to the share: • • STEP 6 Public: All users can write to the share. Set up the defaults for how file permissions are set when the file is created in the following CIFS File Creation Attributes checkboxes: • Group Readable: Members of the group assigned to the file have read-only permissions. If a subfolder is created via NFS or FTP. Everyone Writable: All authenticated users have read-write permissions for the file. The group is assigned during file creation. the owner can edit the group ownership of a file. For CIFS files. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 107 . For NFS files. NOTE Any subfolders you create by using CIFS.

Managing the Shares Adding a DFS Shared Folder 6 STEP 8 Move any usernames that you want to have access to the share from the User list into one of the following boxes. click Shares Shares. The double angled bracket "<<" or ">>" moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket. note that the user must have privileges set up to access that share on the remote system. Use the last two tables in the window to set up your group permissions for the share. STEP 10 Click OK. Adding a DFS Shared Folder Microsoft DFS lets users within your network easily access data stored on multiple remote computers. When acting as a root. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 108 . Through DFS. The double angled bracket "<<" or ">>" moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket. The NSS can act as a DFS root or leaf. even when those resources are located on different servers. unified folder hierarchy. Read-Write Groups: Groups that appear in this list have full read-write access to the share. referred to as "DFS shared folders." When you create a DFS shared folder from a share. your users can view and access shares through a familiar. the user’s rights to the DFS shared folder are those assigned to the corresponding target share on the remote system.) • • STEP 9 Read-Only Users: Usernames that appear in this list have read-only access to the share. After the user accesses the DFS shared folder through the NSS DFS root share. the share on the NSS contains subfolders that link to the various shares on remote systems. Move any groups that you want to have access to the share from the left side of the page into one of the following. (The single angled bracket "<" or ">" moves the selection in the direction of the bracket.) • • Read-Only Groups: Groups that appear in this list have read-only access to the share. To add a DFS root directory to a share on the NSS: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. Read-Write Users: Usernames that appear in this list have read-write access to the share. (The single angled bracket "<" or ">" moves the selection in the direction of the bracket.

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 109 .Managing the Shares Adding a DFS Shared Folder 6 The File Shares page appears. The Edit Share page appears. STEP 2 Click Edit for the share to which you want to add a folder. STEP 3 Click Add Shared Folder.

If you are adding a folder to DFS. STEP 4 Select one of the following: • Add a Folder to DFS: Select this option to create a single DFS shared folder. Fill in the following fields from the Import Remote Server table: STEP 5 Server Name: Enter the name of the remote server. Share: Enter the name of the target share. Enter any name of up to 255 characters. click OK. click Import. If you are importing a remote server. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 110 . Server Name: Enter the name of the remote server on which the target share is located. Username: Enter the username of the account with access to the server. Fill in the following fields from the Add DFS Shared Folder table: - Link Name: This is the name of the link that appears as a folder within the share. When users click this link. Password: Enter the password for the above account.Managing the Shares Adding a DFS Shared Folder 6 The Add Folder page appears. • Import an Entire Remote Server: Select this option to automatically create links for all shares on the remote server. they are redirected to the target share on the remote server.

As a workaround in a non-domain (workgroup) environment.Managing the Shares Restrictions using Microsoft DFS from the NSS 6 NOTE Make sure you review the restrictions and recommendations for using Microsoft DFS from the NSS. pre-map a fileshare to each file server that needs special user credentials (other than the logged-in username and password). the user’s NSS username and password) are recognized by the remote server. Microsoft DFS (MSDFS) operates optimally if the PCuser’s login username and password are recognized as valid on all file servers being accessed. Windows Clients must be Restarted: After you set up a DFS root. When the user’s login is different on the DFS leaf than the DFS root. Setting up CIFS Access Although you cannot globally disable CIFS as you can for NFS and FTP. Restrictions using Microsoft DFS from the NSS To use DFS folders from the NSS. In this case. • • Windows Operating System Version: MSDFS is not supported by Windows 98 clients. When they then login to the root. To set up the idle disconnect time for a CIFS connection to the NSS: Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 111 . it is important to understand the limitations or restrictions involved and how to best configure your system: • User Credentials must be Recognized by the Remote Server: Redirection to a remote file-server is only successful if the current user credentials (i. they can pre-login to the leaf. Otherwise.. they can access the linked DFS share. The CIFS Networking Configuration page lets you specify the length of time CIFS connections to the NSS can be idle before being automatically disconnected. you can allow or disallow CIFS access on a per-share basis. the MSDFS redirect proceeds smoothly because the PC-client already has an established session with the target file-server. an authentication error occurs and the user may not be able to re-authenticate with different user credentials.e. any Windows clients that were connected must be restarted.

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 112 . select the amount of time that the CIFS connection can be idle. Click Update. click Shares The CIFS Networking Configuration page appears. NOTE The NSS only supports NFSv3. after which it is disconnected. STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. STEP 2 From the dropdown box.Managing the Shares Setting up Network Filesystem (NFS) Access 6 CIFS Setup. click Shares NFS Setup. You then need to enable it on a per-share basis. STEP 3 Setting up Network Filesystem (NFS) Access The first step to enable NFS access to the NSS is to enable it globally. To set up global NFS access to the NSS: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu.

To enable the optional asynchronous write option. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 113 . click Enable NFS support. STEP 2 To enable NFS support. the write requests are sent immediately. When disabled. Instead they continue immediately after committing the write. click Use Asynchronous Writes. This can improve performance if the NSS is heavily used. The benefit of enabling this feature is that it is more efficient. If asynchronous writes is enabled. STEP 5 Click Update.Managing the Shares Setting up Network Filesystem (NFS) Access 6 The NFS Setup page appears. NFS write requests are “bulked” and sent in a batch. STEP 3 STEP 4 • • When enabled. Asynchronous writes allow applications running on the NFS client to not block until write requests are complete on the NSS as they normally would. The downside of enabling this feature is that there is a potential for permanent data loss should the NSS suffer an unexpected power loss or if the NFS client crashes. This checkbox activates the other NFS configuration options on this page. you can enable aggregate write requests by selecting the Aggregate Write Requests checkbox.

After you globally enable FTP access. you can allow or disallow FTP access on a per-share basis. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 114 . The NSS does not support SFTP. To set up the FTP protocol: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. STEP 2 To enable FTP. click Shares The FTP Setup page appears.Managing the Shares Configuring the NSS for FTP Access 6 Configuring the NSS for FTP Access You can configure the NSS to allow the FTP protocol to be used for file transfers between the NSS over the Internet. NOTE FTP is disabled by default. The NSS supports both FTP (faster but not as secure) and FTPS (not as fast as FTP but more secure). FTP Setup. The NSS only supports Explicit FTPS (versus Implicit FTPS). You must enable FTP access before your users can access the NSS storage through FTP regardless of their per-share settings. click Enable FTP. This enables both FTP and FTPS access and activates the remaining FTP configuration settings on this page.

set the rate as 0. Group Writable: Members of the user who created the file or folder’s primary group have write permission. enter a message that appears when a user first connects to the NSS. b. STEP 7 STEP 8 STEP 9 STEP 10 Set up the defaults for how file permissions are set when a file is created using • • Group Readable: Members of the user who created the file or folder’s primary group have read permission. select the volume that you want to set as the anonymous root directory from the Anonymous Root Directory drop-down menu. To allow anonymous FTP access. enter the number in the Max Connections per IP Address field. For no maximum. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 115 . make sure that the Allow Download of Uploaded Files checkbox is selected. To allow only file transfers using FTPS (FTP over SSL). enter it in KB/s in the Maximum Anonymous Transfer Rate field. To set the maximum number of FTP connections that can be made from a single client IP address. To allow anonymous users to download files that have been uploaded by other anonymous users. To set a maximum transfer rate for anonymous users. d. To allow anonymous users to have write access to the NSS. If you allow anonymous access. FTP through the following Default File Creation Attributes checkboxes. Also make sure that the Allow Anonymous Access checkbox is deselected. c. STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 To disconnect the FTP connection after a period of time when the connection is idle. To disconnect an FTP connection after a certain length of time has passed during a file transfer. select the number of minutes in the Disconnect Idle Sessions drop-down menu. the FTP permissions are global to all files and folders created through FTP regardless of the share to which they are assigned. To leave this as an unlimited number of connections. leave this field blank. click Anonymous Upload. Unlike CIFS permissions which are set on a share-by-share basis.Managing the Shares Configuring the NSS for FTP Access 6 STEP 3 In the Banner Message box. click Allow Anonymous Access. a. click Allow only FTPS Connections. select the number of minutes in the Disconnect Stalled Transfers drop-down menu.

Not all applications work this way. STEP 11 If the NSS is located behind a firewall and/or router. Everyone Writable: All authenticated users have write permission to the file. Set the Allow users to delete or rename other users’ files and folders field as required. Configuring Passive Mode FTP Configuring Passive Mode FTP Passive Mode FTP is an alternative way of establishing FTP connections that is used for FTP clients or servers that are located behind a router/and or firewall (in this case. Passive Mode allows for a more secure form of data transfer and ensures that the intended network client establishes all connections and maintains session control for FTP server requests within local and external network environments. and save the file. this setting is global. continue to the next section. edit. users with write permissions can rename or delete files or folders within the assigned share even though they are not the owners of the files or folders. not per share. the save would fail due to the fact that Word sets up a temporary file and then attempts to delete it and replace it with the new version. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 116 . All files within folders created through FTP act according to this setting. if this field is not selected and you gave a user write permissions to a file and that user tried to open. regardless of the share they are created in. • Select this field: By selecting this field. Consider the applications used by your users to determine how you want to set this field such as interoperability with applications such as MS Word 2007 and Photoshop. This field determines if users who have write permission to a share can delete or rename files or folders within that share that they do not own.Managing the Shares Configuring the NSS for FTP Access 6 • • • Everyone Readable: All authenticated users can view the file. the NSS acts as an FTP server). For example. Deselect this field: Users cannot rename or delete a file or folder within the assigned share unless they are the owners of the file or folder • NOTE Unlike the setting on the Shares Setup page.

click Network Ports. The Network Port Configuration page appears. the FTP server sets the NSS IP address to passive mode.Managing the Shares Configuring the NSS for FTP Access 6 Select this option if the NSS is located behind a firewall and/or router. You must also specify this port number in your router configuration software. NOTE Passive Mode FTP through a router and/or firewall only works on a single interface. enter the new port number in the FTP/FTPS Server Port field (For example: 8028) and then click Update. STEP 2 Verify the FTP port number on the NSS (port number 21 is the default setting). follow these steps: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. you must choose which interface to access through FTP. If you have VLANs defined. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 117 . To configure Passive Mode FTP. To use a non-default port number. By default.

FTP Setup. click Shares The FTP Setup page appears.Managing the Shares Configuring the NSS for FTP Access 6 In this example. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 118 . port 8028 is specified in the FTP client program Filezilla: STEP 3 From the Manager Menu.

Managing the Shares Configuring the NSS for FTP Access 6 STEP 4 STEP 5 Enter the router's WAN IP address in the PASV IP address field. Set the port forwarding for the FTP port. Maximum port for passive mode (PASV) connections: Set the maximum port number for the port range. This is the same port number that you entered in the FTP/FTPS Server Port field in Step 2. You must also enter these ranges in your router configuration software as follows: a. The default is 4000. The default is 1025. enter the minimum and maximum port range for your router (such as 9031 to 9040). • If you are using a non-default port number. Enter the port number (For example: 8028) in both the External and Internal Port FTP fields and then click Save Settings. set the minimum port for the port range. The minimum port range can be as low as one (for each expected FTP connection). Enter the minimum and maximum port range for passive FTP port connections for each simultaneous FTP client connection that the NSS expects and then click Update. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 119 . • Minimum port for passive mode (PASV) connections: If your network has FTP connections that pass through a firewall.

Managing the Shares Configuring the NSS for FTP Access 6 b. It lets you schedule further backups or initiate a manual backup. Set the port forwarding ranges for passive FTP connections and then click Save Settings. These are the same minimum and maximum port ranges that you entered in Step 5. The Passive Mode FTP configuration is complete. Creating or Running a Backup of a Share The Scheduled Backup page displays any backups that have been configured. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 120 .

Managing the Shares Creating a Scheduled Backup for a Share 6 Creating a Scheduled Backup for a Share You can quickly configure a backup to run at a scheduled time interval for a share or group of shares. click Shares Click Schedule Backup. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 121 . Backup. To set up a scheduled backup: STEP 1 STEP 2 From the Manager Menu. The backup can be saved to a remote CIFS server or to another share on the NSS.

The double angled bracket "<<" or ">>" moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket.) Click one of the following to determine the destination for the backup: STEP 4 • Remote CIFS Filer: To save the backup on a remote CIFS server. STEP 3 Move the shares you want to include in the backup from the Available Shares list to the Shares to Backup list. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 122 . check Compress backup image. click this option and then configure the hostname of the remote server. (The single angled bracket "<" or ">" moves the selection in the direction of the bracket.Managing the Shares Creating a Scheduled Backup for a Share 6 The Scheduled Backups page appears. Local File System: Select the share on which you want to store the backup. STEP 6 Click Next. the remote share. • STEP 5 To create a compressed backup. NOTE Compressed backup images are smaller than non-compressed images but take longer to create. as well as the login credentials to that share.

When setting the hour. If you select the 29th. Weekly: Select the day of the week on which you want the backup to occur. To set up a backup that backs up just the changes made to the share since the last backup. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 123 . the backup does not run during months that do not contain that day. use the 24-hour clock. click Incremental Backups. set up the specific time (hour:minute) at which time the backup occurs. Monthly: Select the day of the month on which you want the backup to occur. STEP 9 STEP 10 Click OK. Make sure you select a day that is 28 or less.Managing the Shares Creating a Scheduled Backup for a Share 6 The Select Backup Schedule page appears. 30th or 31st day. STEP 7 Select the backup frequency as one of the following: • • • Daily: Select each day on which you want the backup to occur. STEP 8 In the Run Backup at field. Leave it unchecked to take a full backup of the share each time the backup is run.

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 124 . You can save the backup to a remote CIFS server or to another share on the NSS. To initiate a backup manually: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. click Shares Backup. STEP 2 Click Run Backup.Managing the Shares Initiating a Backup for a Share 6 Initiating a Backup for a Share You can initiate a backup on a share or group of shares at any time. The Scheduled Backups page appears.

Click OK to initiate the backup. (The single angled bracket "<" or ">" moves the selection in the direction of the bracket.Managing the Shares Initiating a Backup for a Share 6 The Run a Backup page appears.) Click one of the following to determine the destination for the backup: STEP 4 • Remote CIFS Filer: To save the backup on a remote CIFS server. STEP 3 Move the shares you want to include in the backup from the Available Shares list to the Shares to Backup list. Compressed backup images are smaller than non-compressed images but take longer to create. A message appears when the backup is complete. STEP 6 Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 125 . as well as the login information to that share. The double angled bracket "<<" or ">>" moves the entire list in the direction of the bracket. • STEP 5 To create a compressed backup. check Compress backup image. Local File System: Select the share on which you want to store the backup. click this option and then configure the hostname of the remote server. the remote share.

tar.gz files). Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 126 . the backup image is saved to the local share (if configured for backups). STEP 2 Go to the “backup” folder and delete the backup images as required (the images appear as . To remove these images. The share’s contents appear.Managing the Shares Deleting Backup Images 6 Each time the backup job runs for a CIFS share or group of CIFS shares. you must have administrator privileges. To delete a backup image from a local CIFS share: Deleting Backup Images STEP 1 Login to the share using the “admin” username together with the password configured for the administrator.

Rebooting or Shutting Down the NSS If you need to reboot or shut down the NSS. Upgrade the firmware. See “Upgrading the NSS Firmware. your system settings might become corrupted.” on page127.” on page129 Restore the configuration settings to the factory defaults. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 127 .7 Managing the NSS You can perform these maintenance tasks from the System Details page. • • • Reboot or Shut down the system. doing so disconnects all active user sessions. See “Rebooting or Shutting Down the NSS. See “Restoring the Factory Default Configuration. If the power to the NSS is interrupted unexpectedly (such as an unclean shutdown).” on page131.

hold down the Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 128 . If you refresh the configuration interface Web page during the reboot process. Make sure that you close the Web browser when the system is rebooting. You can also shut down the NSS to do the following: - Restore the network setting system defaults: You need to do this if the configuration interface becomes inaccessible. The LEDs on the front and back of the NSS chassis help you troubleshoot a variety of conditions on the NSS. the system initiates another reboot. the color and blink rate of the Power LED on the front of the chassis indicates the status of the currently selected process. shut down the NSS. The Reset button lets you restore the network defaults in situations where you can no longer log into the configuration interface. STEP 2 Click one of the following: • Reboot System: Power down and power up the system. See “Handling an Unexpected (Unclean) Shutdown.” on page165 for more information. power it off. Maintenance. To reset the network setting system defaults. To reboot or shut down the NSS: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. During a reboot or shutdown of the NSS. click Admin The System Details page appears. • Shut Down System: This does a “clean” shutdown of the NSS.Managing the NSS Rebooting or Shutting Down the NSS 7 We recommend that you use a UPS (and optionally an RPSU) to ensure that power to the NSS is never interrupted.

make sure you that you copy it to another location (such as onto a PC) before you attempt to upgrade it. The network settings are restored to factory defaults. When the shutdown is complete. You cannot install firmware that is saved to a disk on the NSS. The firmware must be newer than the version currently installed. note the following: • The firmware must be upgraded from an external source to the NSS. The system does not support downgrades.” on page131). Do not interrupt the power during the firmware upgrade. The firmware must be compatible with the NSS platform.Managing the NSS Upgrading the NSS Firmware 7 Reset button. the Power LED is off. release the Reset button. When the NSS is fully powered up. Upgrading the NSS Firmware Before you start the firmware upgrade. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 129 . • • • ! CAUTION When you upgrade the firmware. - Reset the box: Press and hold the Reset button while the system is running until the Power LED begins to blink green. It changes to indicate the current status of the process. When you see the Power LED blink yellow rapidly. The firmware must be installed in a specific order if upgrading within a virtualized setup (see “Upgrading the NSS Firmware in a Virtualized Setup. Release the button. and then power up the NSS. STEP 3 Click OK to continue. the Power LED is solid green. You can view the Power LED on the front of the chassis during the reboot or shutdown process. The system reboots after the firmware upgrade is completed. Wait until the Power LED goes back to solid green before you log in and use the configuration interface. If a copy of the firmware is saved to a disk on the NSS. avoid using a wireless connection to the NSS as wireless connections can be unreliable and cause image corruption. You need to unlock any encrypted volumes following any reboot or power up of the NSS. A warning message appears.

STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 7 After the firmware upgrade is complete. a message appears. we recommend that you clear your browser cache before you reconnect to the administrator interface. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 130 . When the firmware upgrade completes. either enter the location of the firmware file. click Admin The System Details page appears. Click Upgrade Firmware to initiate the upgrade process. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 In the Firmware image file: field. From the Manager Menu.Managing the NSS Upgrading the NSS Firmware 7 To upgrade the firmware: Back up the system configuration file on a USB flash device before you upgrade the firmware. During the upgrade. It is advisable to back up the configuration file daily. If the upgrade is not successful. see the “NSS LEDs. or click Browse to locate it.) For more information about the Power and System Error LEDs. the Power LED alternates from yellow to green. (The Power LED appears solid yellow until you click OK after which the system reboots with the current version of the firmware. Wait until the Power LED is solid green before you log back into the configuration interface. Download the latest image from the support website to your local computer. the system automatically reboots.” on page155. Maintenance.

or reset just the network settings so that you can log into the NSS configuration interface. share. All other configuration details are restored to factory defaults. Upgrade the firmware for the Master device. and quota configuration is maintained. To reset the NSS: STEP 1 STEP 2 From the Manager Menu. Upgrade the firmware for each slave (one-by-one or in parallel). choose one of the following ways to reset the configuration: • Delete the entire configuration with the exception of the storage details: When you reset the configuration through the configuration interface. ! CAUTION If you restore the full factory defaults to an NSS in a virtualized setup.Managing the NSS Upgrading the NSS Firmware in a Virtualized Setup 7 Upgrading the NSS Firmware in a Virtualized Setup To upgrade the firmware when you have virtualized storage: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Power down the Master device. volume. Power up the Master device. Restoring the Factory Default Configuration There are two ways to restore configuration settings when you run into a problem with the NSS: preserve the specific storage configuration but restore everything else to factory defaults. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 131 . Click Restore All Settings to Factory Defaults. Depending on the nature of the problem. click Admin Maintenance. the RAID. you will break any virtualized RAIDs.

Press and hold the recessed Reset button on the front panel of the chassis. To reset the network settings. Wait until you see the Power LED on the front of the chassis flash yellow rapidly.Managing the NSS Restoring the Factory Default Configuration 7 • Reset the Network Settings to Enable you to Access the Configuration Interface: If there is a problem with the NSS that results in your not being able to access the NSS configuration interface. This lets you access the interface and make the changes required to resolve the problem. and then release the Reset button. These settings are reset to their default: - Link Addressing: DHCP Link Bonding Mode: Active Backup NSS Hostname: nas<MAC address of primary link> For example. “nas0123456789ab” Network Ports: The network ports are reset to their default as described in “Configuring the Network Ports. and then apply power to the system. you might need to reset the network settings. Administrator Password: admin Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 132 . DNS: DNS settings are cleared.” on page 33. first shut down the system and power it off. VLANs: All configured VLANs are deleted. ADS Server: ADS server settings are cleared.

You can choose to save the configuration file to a volume on the NSS or you can save the file to a USB flash device that is inserted into the AUX-1 port on the front of the chassis. it is time and date stamped and becomes available in the list of available configuration files when you click the Restore button from the Configuration Manager page. make sure you unmount the USB flash device before you remove it. When you save the configuration file. display the Storage Status page and then click Unmount. check the settings after you restore the file to make sure that they were updated correctly. click Admin Configuration. To display the Configuration Manager page. from the Manager Menu. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 133 . (To unmount the USB flash device.Managing the NSS Managing the NSS Configuration 7 Network Filters: cleared Network Default Policy: Accept All MTU Size: 1500 Managing the NSS Configuration You can save the current configuration settings within a configuration file that can be used to restore the settings at a later time. After you mount the USB flash device by inserting it into the AUX-1 port. NOTE f you restore a configuration file that was saved in an older version of the NSS firmware than the current version.

insert a USB flash device into the AUX-1 port on the NSS chassis. From the Manager Menu. To save the current configuration: STEP 1 If you are saving the configuration file to a USB flash device. You can save the current configuration settings to a specified volume on the NSS or you can save the file to a USB flash device inserted into the AUX-1 port. check the settings after you restore the file to ensure they were updated correctly.Managing the NSS Saving the Current Configuration 7 The Configuration Manager page appears. click Admin Configuration. it saves a date-stamped version of the current configuration settings to the specified volume on the NSS. When you save the configuration file. NOTE If you restore a configuration file that was saved in an older version of the NSS firmware than the current version. Saving the Current Configuration You can save a copy of the NSS configuration if you need to restore the settings at a later time. STEP 2 Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 134 .

If the configuration file does not successfully save to the specified volume.Managing the NSS Saving the Current Configuration 7 The Configuration Manager page appears. You can then copy the configuration file from the USB flash device to another location on your network. Click Save to save the configuration settings. display the Storage Status page. Click Update. select the AUX-1port as the location. If you saved the file to the USB flash device. STEP 3 Select the location where the backup is saved from the Stored Configuration Location drop-down menu. check the volume and make sure that it is not locked. To save the configuration file to a USB flash device. STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 135 .

Managing the NSS
Saving the Current Configuration

7

STEP 7

Click Unmount.

NOTE Removing the USB flash device in a mounted state can cause file or filesystem

corruption.
STEP 8

When the AUX-1 LED on the front of the chassis is off, you can safely remove the unmounted USB flash device from the AUX-1 port.

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide

136

Managing the NSS
Restoring a Configuration File

7

Restoring a Configuration File
You can easily overwrite the current configuration settings with the configuration settings in a saved configuration file.

NOTE If you restore a configuration file that was saved in an older version of the NSS

firmware than the current version, check the settings after you restore the file to ensure they were updated correctly. To restore a configuration file:
STEP 1

From the Manager Menu, click Admin

Configuration.

The Configuration Manager page appears.

STEP 2

If the configuration file is not located on a volume in the NSS, copy it onto a USB flash device and then insert the USB flash device into the AUX-1 port. From the Stored Configuration Location field, select the location of the saved configuration file. Click Update. Click Restore.

STEP 3

STEP 4 STEP 5

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide

137

Managing the NSS
Restoring a Configuration File

7
A list of saved configuration files appear. Each saved configuration file is named according to the time and date it was saved. The naming format is: HH.MM.SS.NN.DD.YY.tar.gz where HH = hour, MM=minute, SS=second, NN=month, DD=day, and YY=year.

STEP 6

Set Restore Volume Encryption Password depending on whether you want to include the encryption keys for the encrypted volumes in the restore. The NSS configuration backup includes a backup of the encryption header for all the encrypted volumes (the encryption header contains an encrypted version of the encryption key used to encrypt the volume data. Including it in the configuration backup does not decrease the security of the encryption because this same header would be available to any attacker with physical access to the system). You can choose to restore these keys or not, depending on the reason you are doing the restore. If the encryption header on an encrypted volume becomes corrupted, restoring the header may allow you to unlock the volume. Also, if you have forgotten the password, you can restore the encryption header. This lets you revert to the volume password as it was when the configuration file was saved.

STEP 7 STEP 8 STEP 9

Click Full Restore for the configuration file you want to restore. Close the Web browser. After a few minutes the system reboots. green when the reboot completes. See the “Power LED (Front Panel),” on page155 for more information.

STEP 10 Check the Power LED on the front of the chassis. The Power LED goes to a solid

STEP 11 Log back into the configuration interface. You need to unlock any encrypted

volumes to make them available for storage purposes.
STEP 12 If you saved the file to the USB flash device, display the Storage Status page.

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide

138

a copy of it is time and date stamped and saved to the specified location. To delete a configuration file: Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 139 . Deleting a Configuration File Each time you save a configuration file. You can choose to delete a configuration file. you can safely remove the unmounted USB flash device from the AUX-1 port. NOTE Removing the USB flash device in a mounted state can cause file or filesystem corruption.Managing the NSS Deleting a Configuration File 7 STEP 13 Click Unmount. STEP 14 When the AUX-1 LED on the front of the chassis is off.

ensure that the NSS has successfully synchronized the time with the NTP server. When the NSS is synchronizing with the NTP time server. click Admin STEP 2 If the configuration file is located in a location on your network. the “Synchronizing time with NTP server” message appears and the Update button is grayed out.Managing the NSS Configuring the Timing Settings 7 Configuration. you can manually refresh the page by reselecting the NTP Configuration page from the Manager Menu. install it onto a USB flash device and then insert the USB flash device into the AUX-1 port on the front of the NSS chassis. A list of saved configuration files appear. the NSS time is automatically set via the Linksys NTP server. Configuring the Timing Settings If you are installing the NSS within the Linksys One environment. After the synchronization is complete. The Configuration Manager page appears. When you first configure the NSS. STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. STEP 3 STEP 4 Click Delete for each configuration file you want to remove. Click Restore. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 140 .

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 141 . click Automatically (via NTP). NOTE If the NSS joins to the ADS domain. you must enter the IP address of the domain controller into the NTP server field and uncheck Assign automatically via DHCP. If the synchronization failed. the NSS will not join the domain. the following occurs: To configure the time settings for the NSS: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. Otherwise.Managing the NSS Configuring the Timing Settings 7 • • • An error message stating “Could not synchronize with NTP server(s)” appears in the NTP Configuration page. To assign the time manually. an SNMP trap message is sent. STEP 2 To use an NTP server to maintain the NSS time. click Admin Time. skip to step 4. The NTP Configuration page appears. The system alert message “Could not synchronize with NTP server(s)” appears in the System Status page. If the SNMP traps are configured.

To configure the NSS for email alerts: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. In the NTP Server fields. Changes can include configuration changes (such as the addition of a volume). Click Manually. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 142 . If not. Select your time zone from the Time Zone drop-down menu. Click Update. select Assign automatically via DHCP. enter the IP address or hostname for the NTP servers you wish to synchronize. You can customize the user’s email profile to suit the user’s specific need-to-know requirements. and changes of state (such as a loss of power). manually configure the NTP settings.Managing the NSS Configuring the Email Alerts for a Recipient 7 STEP 3 If your DHCP server is configured to provide NTP settings. Skip to step 6. physical changes (such as the removal or insertion of a disk). click Admin Email Alerts. The NTP servers can be located on your network or can be public NTP servers located on the Internet. The settings in these fields are also used as a fallback if you chose to get NTP settings from your DHCP server. STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 7 Configuring the Email Alerts for a Recipient You can create a list of users that will receive email alerts when changes occur to the NSS. Enter the date and time in the Date and Time fields.

RAID: Check this option to notify the user when a change occurs to a RAID array. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 143 . To add a new email account. define the following fields in the Alert Recipients & Types area: • • • • • • STEP 5 Email Address: Enter the user’s email address. Click Test All to send a test notification for all checked options to the defined recipients.Managing the NSS Configuring the Email Alerts for a Recipient 7 The Email Alerts page appears. STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Enter the SMTP server IP address or name in the SMTP Server field. Disk: Check this option to notify the user when a change occurs to the disks that are installed in the NSS. Quota: Check this option to notify the user when a change occurs to a quota. Power: Check this option to notify the user when there is a change of state of the UPS or RPSU. Click Add. Click Update. Backup: Check this option to notify the user when a backup is run.

Recreate the email recipient. click Admin The Email Alerts page appears. To edit the email alerts: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu.Managing the NSS Changing the Email Alerts for a Recipient 7 Changing the Email Alerts for a Recipient After you define a recipient to receive email alerts. Click Test All to send a test notification for all checked options to the defined recipients. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 144 . Email Alerts. STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Click Delete for the applicable email recipient. Click Add. you can only edit the alert profile by first deleting the existing profile and then recreating it.

you get a more human readable version of alerts displayed on your SNMP management station. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 145 . you can delete the profile at any time. STEP 2 Click Delete for the applicable email recipient. To define SNMP Trapsinks: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. click Admin SNMP.Managing the NSS Deleting an Email Alert Recipient Profile 7 Deleting an Email Alert Recipient Profile To stop sending all email alerts to a user. Email Alerts. To delete the email alerts: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. If you download and install the NSS SNMP MIB. Configuring SNMP Alerts The NSS can send SNMP traps to alert you of various system events. This is also one of the steps you must take if you want to make changes to the types of email alerts the user receives. click Admin The Email Alerts page appears.

UPS: When any of the following occurs: 1) the UPS goes online. 2) a RAID is in a degraded state and will be deactivated (the alert advises the time at which the RAID will be deactivated). refer to the management station documentation. 3) a RAID goes into a failed state. 6) a RAID is created. 3) a volume is more than 90% full. 3) the battery is low. You can set up an alert for any of the following: STEP 4 STEP 5 • • Disk: When the following occurs: 1) a drive is predicted to fail by S.T.A. 2) a drive is above temperature threshold. Enter the IP address or hostname for the management station to which you want to send the alerts. Backup: When a backup job completes.Managing the NSS Configuring SNMP Alerts 7 The SNMP Trapsinks page appears. RAID: When any of the following occurs: 1) a RAID goes into a degraded state. Quota: When a user or group is over their quota. 5) a RAID is rebuilt. Select the checkbox for each type of trap sink for which you want to send alerts to the SNMP server. 2) the UPS goes on battery. STEP 2 STEP 3 To install the NSS MIB on your management station.R. Save and install the MIB to your management station. 4) the NSS establishes contact with • • • • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 146 . For more information on installing and integrating the NSS MIB into your management station. Snapshot: When a snapshot reserve is more than 90% full. click Download. 4) a RAID is deactivated.M..

click Delete.Managing the NSS Changing the Administrator Password 7 the UPS. click Admin Password. To send a test alert for each of the selected conditions to all configured trapsinks.” To set up the administrator password: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. If you forget the administrator password. The default password is “admin. STEP 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each SNMP server address to which you want to send alerts. The Admin Password Configuration page appears. you can only reset it by pressing the Reset button on the NSS chassis and restoring the factory defaults. To delete an existing SNMP Trapsink. STEP 8 Changing the Administrator Password You should change the administrator password from the default to ensure that only authorized individuals can access the NSS configuration interface. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 147 . The management station appears in the Existing SNMP Trapsinks list. 7) the UPS battery needs to be replaced. 5) the NSS loses contact with the UPS (after communication was successfully established). STEP 6 Click Add. click Test All. 8) the NSS cannot talk to the UPS. 6) the UPS is about to shut down the system.

Managing the NSS Changing the Administrator Password 7 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Enter the current password in the Current Password field. Re-enter the new password in the Confirm Password field. The next configuration interface page that you access prompts you for the new password. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 148 . The new password takes effect immediately. Click Update. Enter the new password in the New Password field.

The NSS supports three file-sharing protocols: CIFS. write. (Where the <hostname> refers to your NSS hostname and <IP address > refers to the IP address of your NSS. type the NSS \\<hostname> or <IP address > in the Address bar. NFS. To access the hidden storage folder. As the administrator.168.1. Map the NSS to a network drive. make sure that you add "\storage" to the address. For example. • • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 149 . make sure that you change the default administrator password. As the administrator. For this reason. make sure that you add "\storage" to the address.) To access the hidden storage folder. type the hostname or IP address followed by "\storage". For example. or Mac computer can easily access the NSS storage. "\\NAS0123456789ab" or "\\192. Linux. "\\NAS0123456789ab\storage". or FTP as well as the end user’s operating system.8 Accessing the Storage Logging into a Share End users. you can read. Logging into the CIFS Shares with Administrator Privileges To log into CIFS shares with administrator privileges: STEP 1 There are a variety of ways to access the CIFS shares on the NSS. the shares to which the end user has read or read-write privileges appear. Once the end user logs into the NSS using their username and password. • From the My Computer window. UNIX. This share gives access to all data on the system (including user home directories). and delete all files and folders regardless of who owns them. The steps to access the NSS storage depend on which file-sharing protocol the end user chooses to use: CIFS. To access the hidden storage folder. and FTP. you also have read-write access to a hidden share called "storage". NFS. using a Windows. Browse for the NSS from the My Network Places window.2".

(Where the <hostname> refers to your NSS hostname and <IP address> refers to your NSS IP address. For example.2". in the User name field. STEP 3 STEP 4 Depending on your share privileges. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 150 .) Click OK.) Browse for the NSS from the My Network Places window. STEP 2 If your user profile is set up locally (that is.1. • From the My Computer window. enter the following: <NSS hostname>\<username>. The Windows Explorer window opens with a directory listing of the available shares. Click OK. STEP 3 Windows Users: Accessing the Storage by using CIFS/SMB Windows users who have a user profile set up can access any shares to which they have privileges on the NSS storage using CIFS/SMB.168. (Just enter your user name and then your password. If your user profile is set up through the domain or the NSS is not joined to a domain. To access the NSS storage using CIFS/SMB: STEP 1 Choose one of these options to access the NSS. Map the NSS to a network drive. enter the user name "admin" and then enter your administrator password. • • The Login window appears. type \\<hostname> or \\<IP address> in the Address bar. you do not need to enter the NSS hostname before your user name. through the NSS configuration interface) and the NSS is part of a Windows domain. you can begin using the NSS storage.Accessing the Storage Windows Users: Accessing the Storage by using CIFS/SMB 8 STEP 2 From the Login window. "\\NAS0123456789ab or \\192.

a list of accessible shares appears as individual directories. the NSS must have FTP access enabled and the individual share must be set up to allow FTP access. users cannot rename folders. Enter your username and password when prompted by your FTP client. use CIFS or NFS if enabled on the share. To rename a folder. For more information about using your FTP client application. Do not type the brackets. refer to its documentation. Enter the IP address or hostname of the NSS. Mac Users: Accessing the Storage by using CIFS/SMB Mac users who have a user profile can access any shares to which they have privileges on the NSS storage using CIFS/SMB. STEP 2 STEP 3 Depending on your share privileges. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 151 . you can begin using the NSS storage. Note that when using FTP to access the NSS storage. When your FTP client has logged in. To access the NSS storage through CIFS/SMB: STEP 1 STEP 2 From the Finder’s Go menu.Accessing the Storage Windows Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP 8 Windows Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP Windows users who have a user profile set up can access any shares to which they have privileges on the NSS storage using CIFS/SMB or FTP. connect to the NSS. To access the NSS storage using FTP: STEP 1 From your FTP client application. (Where the information in the brackets is meant to be replaced with the applicable information.) Click the "+" sign to save the NSS address to the Favorite Servers list so that the next time you log in you just need to select the address from the list. click Connect to Server. NOTE Before your end users can access the shares on the NSS using FTP. Enter "smb://<hostname or IP address of the NSS>/<sharename>.

they cannot rename folders when using FTP to access the NSS storage. STEP 5 Mac Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP Mac users who have a user profile can access any shares to which they have privileges on the NSS storage using FTP. Enter your username and password when prompted by your FTP client. STEP 4 STEP 5 Depending on your share privileges. However. you can begin using the NSS storage. To rename a folder. through the NSS configuration interface and not through the ADS or NTv4 domain) and the NSS is joined to a domain.Accessing the Storage Mac Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP 8 STEP 3 STEP 4 Click Connect. refer to its documentation. If the NSS is not joined to a domain. Enter the IP address or hostname of the NSS. Depending on your share privileges. connect to the NSS. To access the NSS storage using FTP: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Open your FTP client application. you need to enter the following: <NSS hostname>\<user name>. the NSS must have FTP access enabled and the individual share must be set up to allow FTP access. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 152 . When the Login window appears. Click Connect. When your FTP client has logged in. NOTE Before your end users can access the shares on the NSS using FTP. For more information about using your FTP client application. If your user profile is set up locally (that is. use CIFS or NFS if it is enabled on the share. just enter the username. a list of accessible shares appears as individual directories. enter your username and password. you can begin using the NSS storage. From your FTP client application.

To access the NSS storage through FTP: STEP 1 STEP 2 Log into the client system as root. Create a mount point directory for the mount if you do not already have one (e. You have the share privileges as are defined for the NSS.rsize=32768. STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 153 .wsize=32768 <IP address/hostname>:<mount point path on NSS> <mount point path on client>".g. Log into the user account on the client system. You can now access the share though the mount point directory on your client. NFS must be enabled on the NSS and the individual share set up to allow NFS access.. Before an end user can access the shares on the NSS through NFS. NOTE You must have root privileges to your client system to create an NFS mount. Log out of the root account. you must have the NSS joined to an NIS domain. Mount the NFS share by typing "mount -v -t nfs -o nfsvers=3. mkdir /mnt/nas_share1).Accessing the Storage UNIX/Linux Users: Accessing the Storage by using NFS 8 UNIX/Linux Users: Accessing the Storage by using NFS UNIX and Linux users can access shares on the NSS through NFS. Due to the way that the NSS implements NFS file access privileges. only NFSv3 is supported. In order for NFS access privileges to work correctly. The mount point path on the NSS appears in the Shares page.

Accessing the Storage UNIX/Linux Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP 8 UNIX/Linux Users: Accessing the Storage by using FTP UNIX and Linux users who have a user profile set up can access any shares to which they have privileges on the NSS storage using NFS or FTP. To access the NSS storage using FTP: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Open your FTP client application. you can begin using the NSS storage. STEP 4 STEP 5 Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 154 . Note that when using FTP to access the NSS storage. refer to the FTP client documentation. Enter your username and password when prompted by the FTP client. Depending on your share privileges. NOTE Before your end users can access the shares on the NSS using FTP. Enter the NSS hostname/IP address. the NSS network filters must be set up to allow FTP access. Enter any other required settings. If using FTPS. To rename a folder. use CIFS or NFS if enabled on the share. ensure that the client is set to use Explicit FTPS. users cannot rename folders. For more help using the FTP client. The individual share must be also be set up to allow FTP access.

This condition also occurs if the firmware upgarde fails (although in this case. hold down the Reset button until you see the Power LED flash yellow rapidly. alerts. Off: The NSS is either disconnected from a power source or has finished the shutdown process and can be safely disconnected from a power source.A Troubleshooting NSS LEDs The LEDs on the front and the back of the NSS chassis help you troubleshoot a variety of conditions on the NSS. The boot loader runs for approximately 10 seconds when the NSS first starts up. and then the LED blinks green. When resetting the network defaults. • Blinking Yellow: The network configuration factory defaults are being reset. Blinking Green: The NSS is either booting up or shutting down. from normal operating conditions. Solid Green: The NSS is powered up and finished booting. After the user clicks OK. • • • • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 155 . These are the LED colors and their meanings: • Solid Yellow: The NSS is powered on and the boot loader is currently running. Alternating Yellow & Green: The firmware update is currently in progress. the system reboots using the current version of the firmware. Power LED (Front Panel) The Power LED shows whether the NSS is receiving power and is functioning properly. the LED remains in a solid yellow condition until the user clicks OK from the System Details page following an unsuccessful upload. The Reset button lets you restore the network defaults in situations where you can no longer log into the configuration interface. to serious error conditions.

Release the Reset button. Solid Red: Indicates a critical system failure. A voltage rail is above or below specification. When you see the Power LED blink yellow rapidly. The temperature of a disk drive is above the maximum threshold. Off: There are no system-related problems Reset Button (Front Panel) The Reset button lets you restore the network setting system defaults or reset the box. A disk drive has failed or is about to fail. The NSS is running on UPS due to a mains power failure. power it off.Troubleshooting NSS LEDs A System LED (Front Panel) The System (SYS) LED indicates that a system error has occurred on the NSS. A fan has stalled. • To restore the network setting system defaults: You need to do this if the configuration interface becomes inaccessible. To reset the box: Press and hold the Reset button while the system is running until the Power LED begins to blink green. The system could not boot due to a corrupted firmware image. release the Reset button. The system temperature is above the maximum threshold. • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 156 . • • A volume is more than 90% full. To reset the network setting system defaults. shut down the NSS. You can view the error through the NSS configuration interface. hold down the Reset button. and then power up the NSS. The network settings are restored to factory defaults. These are the LED colors and their meanings: • Solid Yellow: Indicates one of these error conditions.

Hard Disk Drive LEDs These LEDs shows the disk-drive activity. and locate statte of the . Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 157 . Flickering Green: The disk drive is configured. but is currently idle. The red LED means that the drive is in an error condition.T. and not rebuilding. The LED flickers off with activity.A. Flickering Yellow: The LAN link is up and running at 10/100 link speed and is currently active. the error conditions. Flickering Green: The LAN link is up and running at 1000 link speed and is currently active. Blinking Green: The disk drive is configured and a RAID array is currently rebuilding to the disk drive. Off: No LAN link is detected. These are the LED colors and their meanings. These are the LED colors and their meanings • • Solid Red: The drive is in a failed state.R. • • • • Solid Green: The disk drive is configured but is currently idle. The LED flickers off with activity. Solid Yellow: The LAN link is up and running at 10/100 link speed. These are the LED colors and their meanings: • • • • • Solid Green: The LAN link is up and running at 1000 link speed. Off: The disk drive is not configured (not part of a RAID or JBOD array and not exported).M. Blinking Red: The drive is predicated to fail (via S. Flickers off with activity. but is currently idle.installed disk drives. active. We recommend that you replace the drive to avoid the loss of data.Troubleshooting Hard Disk Drive LEDs A LAN LED (Front Panel) The LAN LED shows the status of the Ethernet link. The green LED indicates drive activity.).

Repairing a Degraded Array If a RAID level 1. a redundant disk drive has failed).) If an array with no redundancy has a failed disk drive. or 10 is in a degraded state (that is. you must rebuild the JBOD after you replace the disk. (You might be able to use some of the data on a JBOD if there are volumes that do not span across the failed disk. UPS LED (Back Panel) • • Off: There is either no UPS attached to the NSS or the UPS function has been disabled in the System Power page in the configuration interface. replace the disk drive. On: A UPS is attached to the NSS and the UPS function is enabled in the System Power page in the configuration interface. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 158 . There can only be one locate request set for a disk drive at one time. • USB LED (Front Panel) • • • Solid Green: The USB hard/flash drive is connected and is not safe to remove. and then recreate the array. Off: There is either no USB hard/flash drive connected to the NSS. 5. For more information about the UPS. Off: The disk drive is not marked by a locate request.Troubleshooting Repairing a Degraded Array A • • Off: The drive is OK. if connected. Blinking Green: The USB hard/flash drive is connected and is being mounted or unmounted. the USB hard/flash drive is safe to remove. refer to the UPS documentation. or. The white LED means that that there is a locate request currently on the disk drive: Blinking White: There is a locate request currently on the disk drive (see “Storage Status. Otherwise. you must delete the array.” on page 6 page on the configuration interface). you can replace the failed disk drive(s).

With the exception of a JBOD. click Storage The RAID page appears. The new disk must have at least the same capacity of the smallest disk currently in the array. STEP 2 STEP 3 In the RAID Arrays table. 250 GB disks and one 500 GB disk. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 159 . remove the failed drive from the NSS and install the replacement disk. if you install two. the total capacity is 750 GB. RAIDs are configured to use the maximum of the smallest disk capacity in the array for each additional disk in the array. click Edit for the applicable RAID array. To add a disk to a degraded array: NOTE When adding disks to an array.Troubleshooting Repairing a Degraded Array A the same capacity. we recommend you use the same model of disk with STEP 1 If you are replacing a disk. For example. From the Manager Menu. RAID.

See ”Rebooting or Shutting Down the NSS” on page 127.) Reboot the NSS. replace the disk drive.Troubleshooting Working with a Failed Array A The RAID Configuration page appears. You can monitor the progress of the rebuild through the System Status page. The RAID array is rebuilt for the added or changed redundant disk drive. To create an array when an array fails: STEP 1 Remove the failed drive from the NSS and install the replacement disk. and then configure a new array. Working with a Failed Array If a RAID is in a failed state. Click Add to add the disk drive to the array. the data on the array is not recoverable. After the rebuild process completes. the disk becomes part of the redundant storage. When the system reboots. You need to delete the array. log back into the configuration interface. (This step can be done out of order as long as it is installed before you configure the new array. Make sure that you do a safe reboot using the Reboot function. STEP 4 Available disk drives appear in the listing. While the rebuild continues. the array can still be used. STEP 2 STEP 3 Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 160 .

To resolve the problem: STEP 1 Remove the drive from the chassis. make sure that you copied it to another location (such as onto a PC). Drive Error LED Remains On If a drive that is part of a RAID array is accidentally removed and is then subsequently reinserted into the chassis. and then reinsert it. STEP 2 If the array did not fail as a result of the original removal of the drive. check the following: • If a copy of the firmware is saved to a disk on the NSS. you can set up the volumes.Troubleshooting Drive Error LED Remains On A From the Manager Menu. the drive Error LED might will become lit. This means that the drive was rejected from the array. The system does not support downgrades. Verify that the firmware is compatible with the NSS platform. The RAID page appears. add the drive back into the array. If the array failed. click Storage RAID. shares. follow the steps to recreate the failed array. Firmware Attempt is Unsuccessful If a problem occurs when updating the firmware. The Error LED for that drive clears. STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 Create a new array as required. Click Delete. Verify that the firmware is newer than the version that is currently installed. If the failed array contained the volume used as the Home Directory Location. • • Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 161 . set the location to the volume you want to use. The failed array appears with a status of "Stopped". You cannot install firmware that is saved to a disk on the NSS. and quotas for the array. Once built. The disk drives used in the failed array become part of the available storage.

Follow these steps to recreate the problem: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Export storage from System A. Re-export the storage system.Troubleshooting Free Bound Virtualized Storage when the Master System Fails A • If you are upgrading within a virtualized setup. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 162 . The storage system is now available to be used by another system. System B crashes and cannot be recovered. STEP 2 Go through the steps to upgrade the firmware. Free Bound Virtualized Storage when the Master System Fails A storage system is bound to a failed storage system and rejects any bind requests from other systems. The Power LED blinks green and then goes solid green when the reboot completes. make sure that you installed the firmware in the order described in ”Upgrading the NSS Firmware” on page 129. To update the firmware after a failed attempt: STEP 1 Click OK when the message appears from the System Details page that the firmware upgrade was not successful. System A is "bound" to System B and rejects any new bind requests from other systems. Import storage from System A to System B. The system automatically reboots using the current firmware version. To resolve the problem: STEP 1 STEP 2 Unexport the bound storage system (in our example. System A).

Reconnect the link. change the name back to the original hostname. Unable to Create a Share or Quota for a Volume When you attempt to create a share. To resolve the problem: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Unplug the Ethernet link. the quota is not successfully added for the volume. the IP address and link rate does not reset. You can view the status from the System Status page on the configuration interface. To resolve the problem. The problem is likely caused by the volume being locked. check to see if the the hostname the Network Identification page was changed. Wait 10 seconds. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 163 . For example. if you unplug a cable from the NSS to a 100 Mbps switch and then reconnect the NSS to a 1 Gps switch. As long as the volume is locked. the link is not restored. Hotplugging the Ethernet Link doesn’t Reset IP or Link Rate When you disconnect the Ethernet link and reconnect it. Wait at least 15 seconds.Troubleshooting All CIFS Connections were Unexpectedly Ended A All CIFS Connections were Unexpectedly Ended If all current CIFS connections to the NSS were unexpectedly severed. the volume does not appear in the Location field. The link is re-established. When you try to create a quota. you cannot use the volume to create shares or quotas (you can however. set up the Home Directory). Changing the hostname severs any current CIFS connections to the NSS. An encrypted volume is automatically locked whenever the NSS is rebooted or is manually locked through the configuration interface.

Shares. and then click Update. click Access Network. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 164 . To resolve the problem: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. You can now be create a share or quota for the volume. Enter the password for the volume. STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 7 STEP 8 Make sure there are no filters set up to drop or reject FTP access for the applicable IP or MAC addresses. From the Manager Menu. From the Manager Menu. Click OK. Make sure that Enable FTP is selected. click Storage If the problem is due to the volume being locked. you need to configure these settings to enable FTP access: STEP 1 STEP 2 From the Manager Menu. click Shares FTP Setup.) Close the FTP Setup page. Cannot Access the NSS through FTP Users attempt to log into the NSS through FTP but are unable to access their home directory or shares on the NSS. the Unlock button appears next to the volume in the Action column. click Shares Click Edit for the applicable share. To resolve the problem.Troubleshooting Cannot Access the NSS through FTP A Volumes. STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Click Unlock. Make sure the FTP protocol is selected. (You can go through the settings on this page to ensure they are correctly defined.

the system settings (including time) might be altered. The steps for other versions might vary slightly): STEP 1 STEP 2 From the Internet Explorer browser window. users must log into the NSS through NFS or CIFS (provided that these are supported protocols).Troubleshooting Cannot Rename a Folder through FTP A Cannot Rename a Folder through FTP Users attempt to log into the NSS through FTP but are unable to rename a folder. Configuration Page Does not Appear in Internet Explorer If you click a configuration page and the page does not appear. click Automatically. Click OK. Renaming of folders is not a supported FTP standard. Internet Options. Follow these steps to resolve the problem (These steps only apply to Internet Explorer version 6. To rename a folder. this is a caching problem with the Internet Explorer browser. causing the NSS to do an unclean shutdown. The Administrator is notified of the unclean shutdown in three possible ways: Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 165 . click Tools Click General. STEP 4 STEP 5 Handling an Unexpected (Unclean) Shutdown The best way to shut down the NSS is to use the Shut Down command from the System Details page on the configuration interface or by using the Power button on the front of the chassis. STEP 3 Under the Check for newer versions of stored pages: section. If the power to the NSS is unexpectedly disrupted. Set the Amount of disk space to use to 1 MB.0. The Settings window appears. and then click Settings.

• STEP 2 If you attempt either of the above unsuccessfully. we highly recommend that you take a USB backup. When the Administrator first logs into the configuration pages following the shutdown. and then either restore the configuration settings from a USB flash device backup or manually edit the settings. For example: mount -v -t nfs 192. .168. restore the configuration settings back to the factory defaults.Troubleshooting Boosting the Performance of NFS Transfers A • • • When the NSS powers up. including the time setting to make sure that nothing has been negatively altered.168. a message appears. Following an unclean shutdown of the NSS: STEP 1 Do one of the following: • Review/Edit the System Settings Manually: Go through each setting. An email is sent to the defined email address if the Administrator is set up to receive an email for power loss. Boosting the Performance of NFS Transfers You can substantially improve the NFS performance by increasing the size of read and write buffers on the client. it might be easier to restore the system settings from the backup (versus manually going through and checking each system setting). Back up the System Settings from a USB Backup: If you have a valid backup on a USB flash device. NOTE The factory default administrator password is "admin". If you make changes to the settings.1.1.1:/mnt/RAIDA/vol1/share1 /mnt/client -o nfsvers=3.wsize=32768 where: • • 192. an SNMP trap sends a notification. These buffers are sized at 4 KB by default but can be changed at mount time.1 is the IP address of the NSS system /mnt/RAIDA/vol1/share1 is the path to the share Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 166 .rsize=32768.

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 167 . Rejoining the ADS Domain after a Failed to Join To rejoin to the ADS domain after a failed to join: STEP 1 From the Manager Menu. STEP 2 From the Manager Menu. STEP 4 The Network Identification page appears. STEP 3 Enter the ADS domain name into the Search Domain field and the IP address of the ADS domain into the Primary DNS Server field and then click Update. Enter the IP address of the ADS domain (2000/2003/2008 server machine) into the NTP Server fields and then click Update. The NTP Configuration page appears. click Network Identification. click Network DNS/WINS.Troubleshooting Rejoining the ADS Domain after a Failed to Join A • • /mnt/client is the mount point on the client The size of the read and write buffers is 32 KB. click Admin Time. From the Manager Menu. The Network Name Resolution page appears. Enter the Administrator password and click Update to rejoin the ADS domain.

B Specifications This appendix lists the technical specifications for the NSS4000 and NSS6000 Network Storage Systems.73” x 16. Relative humidity non-condensing Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 168 .32 x 1.54 ” (440 x 44 x 420 mm) NSS4000: 24.52 kg) 150W Power Supply 32 to 113°F (0° to 45°C) -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C) 10 to 90%.99 lb (9. Relative humidity non-condensing 10 to 95%. Technical Specifications Device Dimensions Unit Weight Power Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Humidity 17.25 lb (11 kg): NSS6000: 20.

cisco.com/en/US/products/ps9957/ tsd_products_support_series_home. Product Resources Resource Technical Documentation Firmware Downloads Customer Support Warranty and End User License Agreement Open Source License Notices Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information Cisco Partner Central site for Small Business Location www.com/go/warranty www.C Where to Go From Here Cisco provides a wide range of resources to help you and your customer obtain the full benefits of the Linksys Network Storage System.com/en/US/support/ tsd_cisco_small_business_support_center_contacts.html www.cisco.html www.com/go/osln www.com/web/partners/sell/smb Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 169 .cisco.com/en/US/products/ps9957/ tsd_products_support_series_home.cisco.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps9957/index.html www.cisco.cisco.html www.

Web servers are widely used not just for HTML pages. and denial of. An Access Control List is used to control access to. you can put together pieces of networked storage into one. deploy programs to many computers. Active Directory functions much like an online phone book. B Bonjour: Apple’s version of the Zeroconf. On the Mac. storing information about resources on the network while providing a means of centrally organizing. government. In Network Storage Aggregation. Bonjour is the most widely used implementation of Zeroconf.S. Aggregation: The act of collecting something together. managing. (It was originally named Rendezvous. Active Directory: A Microsoft directory service for use in Windows environments. Used within network security systems to allow selective use of services.D Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms A ACL: Access Control List. and apply critical updates to an entire organization. logical storage unit. and controlling access to these resources. Used to automatically configure devices and discover services on an IP network. Administrators use Active Directory to assign enterprise wide policies. services. but function as control panels for a variety of network devices such as routers and Webcams. Bonjour lets Safari Web browser users find the Zeroconf-enabled Web servers in the network. There is also a Bonjour plug-in for Internet Explorer which is used to discover Bonjour-enabled network printers and devices. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): A block cipher adopted as an encryption standard by the U. It lists the services available with a corresponding list of the hosts permitted to use the service.) Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 170 .

DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. guaranteed service to time-sensitive network traffic like voice or video while concurrently providing best-effort traffic guarantees to non-time sensitive Web traffic (such as email) or file transfers. Newer DHCP servers dynamically update the DNS servers after making assignments. There are four types of disk quotas: 1) Usage (or block) quota sets a limit on the amount of storage space (measured in MB or GB) that connected users or groups can use. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication mechanism.Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms D C CIFS: Common Internet Filesystem. The storage device (such as disk drive or RAID array) is directly attached to a computer. Software that dynamically assigns IP addresses to devices on a TCP/IP network. printers. managing network traffic. A protocol that evolved out of SMB (Server Message Block). 3) Usage or File quotas are considered Hard quotas. such as SCSI and Fibre Channel. a limit set by a network administrator that restricts certain aspects of filesystem usage. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 171 . DFS: Distributed Filesystem. D DAS: Direct Attached Storage. the inability of a computer system to add or remove hardware without powering the system down. This system. In other words. to access the storage device. and providing QoS (Quality of Service) guarantees on an IP network. The computer uses various adapters and standardized protocols. CIFS is an application-level network protocol mainly used to share files. developed by Microsoft. lets you build a hierarchical view of multiple file servers and shares on the network. and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. 2) File (or inode) quota sets a limit for a specific number of directories or files that connected users or groups can use. DiffServ is often used to provide low-latency. DiffServ (Differentiated Services): A scalable IP Layer 3 method for classifying. Disk Quotas: For NAS devices. Also referred as Server Attached Storage and Captive Storage. DHCP software typically runs in servers and is also found in network devices such as ISDN routers and modem routers that allow multiple users access to the Internet. serial ports. It is mainly used by Microsoft Windows-equipped computers. 4) Soft quota is a way. Coldplug: Often taken to mean the opposite of hotplugging. to define a warning level that alerts users that they are nearing their specified hard quota limit. set by the administrator.

. It is the default filesystem for many popular Linux distributions. A native filesystem for the Linux kernel. Unlike its predecessor. . the journaling support alleviates lengthy filesystem checks (fsck) at bootup after a sudden system crash. It is fast enough that it is used as the benchmarking standard.edu.google. The final portion of a domain name tells you what kind of site is served by this machine. reset. . and so on.112.com. The "www. In this case. 116.2. . DNS: Domain Name System (or Service or Server).fr. a DNS service must translate the name into the corresponding IP address. . It was initially designed to replace the extended filesystem (ext). until the correct IP address is returned. While domain names are alphabetic and easier to remember. etc. If one DNS server does not know how to translate a particular domain name. An Internet service that translates domain names into IP addresses. Google). ext2. or power loss. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 172 . its successor.Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms D Disk Tax/Disk Overhead: The limitation of hard disk drive (HDD) capacity when specific RAID configurations that use mirroring or redundancy are applied to an array. Although ext2 is not a journaling filesystem. ext3: Third Extended Filesystem. E ext2: Second extended filesystem. dotted quad: This refers to the IP address number. When you use a domain name. the Internet uses IP addresses.96. www." refers to the connection to the World Wide Web. provides journaling and is almost completely compatible with ext2. it asks another one. All devices sharing a common part of the IP address share that domain. Domain: The name that identifies a computer connected to the Internet. For example.org.The dotted quad is a unique number format made up of four parts separated by dots. ext3. The DNS system is its own network.com means this is a commercial site.net. Other categories include: . A journalled filesystem that is commonly used by the Linux operating system. For example.uk. the middle portion of a domain name is usually the name of the company that owns the computer (in this case.

It may also provide access to the directory services. FTPS: File Transfer Protocol over SSL. but is often a lengthy process in itself and has to be repeated regularly to keep the FAT filesystem clean. with cluster counts held in a 32-bit field. of which 28 bits are currently used. Because it is considered relatively simple. Examples of file sharing protocols include: CIFS/SMB (Windows). Defragmentation is one solution to this. Macintosh. File Sharing Protocol: A high-level network protocol that provides the structure and language for file requests between clients and servers. and NFS (UNIX). Microsoft developed this partially patented filesystem for MS-DOS. FTP: File Transfer Protocol. It is sometimes referred to as a "client/server protocol" and functions at the application layer (layer 7 of the OSI model). known as FAT32. including the commands for opening. the FAT filesystem is supported by virtually all existing operating systems for personal computers. FTPS is similar to the standard FTP but because it operates over an encrypted link (SSL). making reading and writing a slow process. their fragments tend to become scattered over the entire media. The client connects to the server port 21 and starts an unencrypted FTP session as normal. Explicit FTPS is named for the command issued to indicate that TLS security should be used. NetWare and Unix platforms. It is the primary filesystem for consumer versions of Microsoft Windows up to and including Windows Me. This ubiquity makes it an ideal format for floppy disks and solid-state memory cards. FTP is a standard Internet protocol that uses the Internet’s TCP/IP protocols to exchange files between computers on the Internet. To overcome the volume size limit of FAT16. This is the preferred method according to the RFC defining FTP over TLS. Microsoft decided to implement a newer generation of FAT. download. Software that adds this capability is very common and allows interoperability between Windows. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 173 . either the client supports the file sharing protocol of each operating system or the server supports the file sharing protocol of each client. writing and closing files across the network. In order for a client to have access to multiple servers running different operating systems. and upload files individually or in batch form. The most common implementations have a serious drawback in that when files are deleted and new files written to the media. FTP can be used to transfer.Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms D F FAT32: File Allocation Table. but requests that TLS security be used and performs the appropriate handshake before sending any sensitive data. while still allowing DOS real-mode code to handle the format without unnecessarily reducing the available conventional memory. reading. and a convenient way of sharing data between disparate operating systems installed on the same computer (a dual boot environment). The NSS supports Explicit FTPS (versus Implicit FTPS). it is a more secure way to transfer files over the Internet.

1p: An IEEE standard that provides quality of service (QoS) in 802-based networks at the MAC level.1p uses three bits (defined in 802.000.1p is used within the IEEE 802.1D and IEEE 802. The IEEE however has made some broad recommendations. The way traffic is treated when assigned to any particular class is undefined and left to the implementation. Hotplug: The ability to add or remove hardware without first powering down the system. I IEEE 802. Gigabtye (GB): A unit of information or data storage equivalent to 1.000 (1 billion) bytes.000. GARP lets client stations request membership in a multicast domain.1q) to allow switches to reorder packets based on priority level (traffic class expediting and dynamic multicast filtering). Layer 2 standard for providing VLAN identification and QoS (Quality of Service) levels for devices on a network. and GVRP lets them register into a VLAN. A unit of information or data storage equivalent to 1.000.000 (1 billion) bits. IEEE 802. Eight different classes of service are available. This is achieved by adding four bytes to the Ethernet frame header of a data packet (three bits of which assign up to eight priority or QoS levels and 12 bits identify up to 4096 VLANs).Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms D G Gigabit: Also Gbit or Gb. but does require a minimum of cooperation between users and the MAC service provider.1Q: An Ethernet. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 174 .1ad: Protocols that provide separate instances of MAC services to multiple independent users on a bridged LAN (local area network) in a way that does not require cooperation among the users.1Q standards.000. 802. IEEE 802. expressed through three extra bits on the Ethernet Frame. 802. It also defines the Generic Attributes Registration Protocol (GARP) and the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP). H High Availability: A term applied to a class of electronic devices where a system design protocol has been applied and implemented to ensure a higher/improved degree of operational continuity during a given measurement period.

metadata-heavy operations (for example. XFS keeps a logical journal. If the system fails. This type of system is beneficial for mission-critical systems. J JBOD: Just a Bunch of Disks. There is no redundancy provided with a JBOD and the failure of one disk in the array usually results in the loss of the data stored on the JBOD. files) or peripheral devices (such as printers and NAS devices) on a local network. The LCD appears on the front of the NSS3000 chassis and can be used to determine various status details about the NSS3000. and conversely.1X: Standard for port-based network access control that authenticates devices attached to a LAN port. An authentication server resides in each Cisco Small Business NSS product. in a intranet or on the Internet without knowing the specific domain where they reside. L LCD: Stands for Liquid Crystal Display and is a display technology that uses liquid crystals that flow like liquid and bend light. network resources (such as directories. In a JBOD configured array. more compact format. Journaling Filesystem: A fault-resilient filesystem that provides data integrity because updates to directories and bitmaps are constantly written to a serial log on disk before the original disk log is updated. a full journaling filesystem restores the data on the disk to its pre-crash configuration. ext3) as compared with a logical journal that logs metadata changes in a special. LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol): A protocol that lets users find organizations. workgroups. other users. It also recovers unsaved data and stores it in the location where it would have gone if the computer had not crashed.Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms D IEEE 802. deleting a large directory tree). prevents access to the network if authentication fails. volumes. Multiple hard disk drives (HDDs) that are combined into a single virtual drive. each drive can be a different size or capacity (this storage method can be used to turn two or more odd-sized hard drives into one useful drive). This standard establishes connection to a network and its connected resources if authentication is approved. A single LDAP directory can be mirrored on multiple servers that can be periodically synchronized. A physical journal logs verbatim copies of blocks that will be written later (for example. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 175 . Logical journals can improve performance by reducing the amount of data that needs to be read from and written to the journal in large.

and the ability to retrieve accurate usage data). its market. such that if one of the hard disk drives (HDD) fails. Mirroring: For NAS devices. M MDFS (Microsoft Distributed Filesystem): see DFS. "NIC bonding" and "link aggregate group" (LAG). It is most often defined as the average time between failures.3ad". the redundant drive continues to provide access to the stored data for connected users. RAID level 1 uses mirroring. tens of thousands. Network administrators can then replace the failed drive with a new drive that can be re-mirrored to the good drive. or its subcomponent’s reliability. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 176 . NIS is an insecure alternative to DNS. Manufacturers provide MTBF as a reference of the product’s. A system by which one machine (the master) holds the Ethernet addresses of other machines (the servants). N NAS (Network Attached Storage): A data storage device on a computer network to provide a centralized repository of data that can be shared and accessed by other end-users or workgroups on the network.Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms D Link Aggregation Group: (LAG) A computer networking term used to describe using multiple Ethernet network cables/ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of any one single cable or port. NFS: Network Filesystem. or hundreds of thousands of operational hours between failures. "NIC teaming". A protocol suite developed and licensed by Sun Microsystems that allows different makes of computers running different operating systems to share files and disk storage. Mirroring creates a redundant repository of data. and is based on a networking standard known as "IEEE 802. "port trunking". its usage. Other terms for this also include "ethernet trunk". "port teaming". The Cisco Small Business NSS products are NAS devices. Customers can use the MTBF to determine their service needs to maintain or replace the product. NIS: Network Information Service (formerly known as Yellow Pages). the automated process of simultaneously writing data to two (or more) hard disk drives. MTBF can be derived from extensive and time intensive testing of the working product. MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures): A measurement of hardware product reliability typically indicated in thousands. calculated from actual product field performance (depending on the product. or from a calculated prediction based on known factors.

Windows Server 2003 and Windows Vista. R RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service): An authentication. Windows XP.Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms D NTFS: New Technology Filesystem. the NSS offers the choice of five different RAID levels (including JBOD) with two options for adding a hot spare to an existing RAID level. Currently. There are various RAID levels (or ways to define how the disks work together). RADIUS uses a RADIUS server that resides in the local network or as an offsite. The types of RAID levels and combinations of these levels is constantly changing as new methods and technologies continue to improve. authorization. reliability and disk space utilization plus additional extensions such as security access control lists and filesystem journaling. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 177 . and offers improvements over FAT such as improved support for metadata and the use of advanced data structures to improve performance. PSU: Power Supply Unit. Each level provides one or more of increased data integrity. a RAID uses multiple physical disk drives to create a single logical unit from which data can be shared or replicated between the drives. used in MS-DOS and early versions of Windows. Windows NT standard filesystem and its descendants: Windows 2000. and throughput or capacity. NTFS replaced Microsoft’s previous FAT filesystem. leased resource/service to perform the authentication and authorization functions. P Parity: A way to attach additional binary digits to data blocks that lets a NAS controller monitor if data has been lost or overwritten after it has been moved from one place to another in a storage array or among networked computers. A device or system external to or within the NSS that supplies electrical power to the device or group of devices. and accounting protocol to access a network locally or remotely. fault-tolerance. In storage environments. RAID: Redundant Array of Inexpensive or Independent Disks.

Like PATA. Transfer rates for Serial ATA begin at 150 MBps. two incremental developments were announced: a SATA II Port Multiplier specification release candidate and the completion and pending adoption of the SATA II Cables and Connectors Volume 1 specification. In spring 2003. tape libraries. A SAN can contain a single NAS device or numerous NAS devices. because SAS attains much higher transfer speeds. One of the main design advantages of Serial ATA is that the thinner serial cables facilitate more efficient airflow inside a form factor and also allow for smaller chassis designs. This protocol is NOT supported by the NSS. designed for transfer of data to and from a hard disk. (It does support FTPS. SAS uses serial communication to establish connectivity to other SAS devices and uses SCSI commands for file transfer. parallel. The first increment. Serial ATA is a serial link -. Additional increments of the specification will focus on enhanced cabling. A SAN lets computers connect to hard disk drives and tape drives on a network as though they were locally attached devices.) Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 178 . was released in 2002 and focused on the immediate needs for the server and network storage segments. SFTP: Secure File Transfer Protocol. SCSI solutions. SANs are architected to be scalable so that computer storage devices (such as disk array controllers. Used in large enterprise environments to replace legacy. A computer bus technology that evolved from the Parallel ATA physical storage interface.0. while Serial ATA cables can extend up to one meter. fan-out and failover capabilities and next generation signaling speeds. The SATA II enhancements are delivered in increments. A network protocol designed by the IETF to provide secure file transfer and manipulation facilities over the secure shell (SSH) protocol. enterprise environments with high volume or high data traffic requirements. called SATA II: Extensions to SATA 1. SATA II: A followup set of specifications to the original SATA specifications. and servers) can be added and incorporated into the system. The IDE cables used in parallel ATA systems are bulkier than Serial ATA cables and can only extend to 40cm long. SATA: Serial ATA.a single cable with a minimum of four wires creates a point-to-point connection between devices. SAS (Serial Attached SCSI): A computer bus technology and serial communication protocol to transfer data to and from hard disk drives and CD-ROMs. SATA is an IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) drive.Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms D S SAN (Storage Area Network): A network of storage and server devices typically found in large. and has backwards-compatibility with SATA.

SSH (Secure Shell): A protocol and group of standards that provide confidentiality and integrity of data as it is exchanged between two or more computers or from a storage/server device to an accessing computer. files. : Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology. printers. drive spin-up time. serial ports. So for files that are on a volume for which snapshots are set up.T. system to monitor the internal operations of a drive. It is most often used to log into a remote computer or other device to execute commands. distance between the heads and the disk platters. CRC errors. motor. The NSS supports FTPS which is FTP over SSL. It can then send an early warning for about 70% of all hard drive errors.Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms D S. drive temperature. or other devices on a network. faulty sectors. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 179 . volumes. It is mainly used by Microsoft Windows-enabled computers.A. save. use SMB to gain access to shared drives. SMB can also be used to access different subnets over the Internet. This lets the administrator repair or replace the drive before any data is lost or damaged. and characteristics of the media. and other data transfer between nodes on a network. SSL was originally developed by Netscape and is now an industry standard.R. and servomechanisms. and weekly intervals. such as disk performance. or directories as they were at a particular point in time.M. This industrystandard technology was developed by a number of major hard disk drive manufacturers to try to increase the reliability of drives. SMB (Server Message Block): An application-level networking protocol that gives shared access to files. a snapshot folder is created for each share on the volume. and store email.M. The snapshots can be set for hourly. Using this technology. drive heads. the NSS can predict the future failure of hard disk drives. SSL: Secure Sockets Layer. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol): The standard protocol for sending emails over the Internet typically used in conjunction with POP or IMAP mail servers so that end users can receive.A. printers.R. Snapshot: A copy of a set of files. SSH uses encryption and authentication codes to establish a secure communication channel. Computers on a network that don’t share their individual hard disk drives. volumes. The NSS uses the advanced diagnostics within the S. The Cisco NSS uses snapshots to back up the shares located on a volume in such a way that end users can recover their own files without having to ask the administrator to restore a backup. recalibration.T. daily. End users can revert to older versions of files by browsing the snapshot folder and finding a version of the desired file. SSL is a protocol used to transmit files over the Internet using a private key to encrypt the data.

Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms D Striping: A method of concatenating multiple disk drives into one logical storage unit. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 180 . TLS uses digital certificates to authenticate the user and the network. terabyte is equal to 1024 gigabytes. If a device does not have an IP address and there is no DHCP server in the network. Software such as Windows Media Connect uses UPnP to stream audio and video over the network. Several UPnP standards are employed including the Simple Service Discovery Protocol (SSDP) for finding devices and UPnP AV Architecture. UPnP employs link-local addressing to create an IP address. A security protocol from the IETF that is based on the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) 3. These stripes are then interleaved round-robin. combined with additional random numbers previously sent to each other. the storage space of the drives is shuffled like a deck of cards. Striping involves partitioning each drive’s storage space into stripes which may be as small as one sector (512 bytes) or as large as several megabytes. so that the combined space is composed alternately of stripes from each drive. UPnP can open router ports to let a device. contact a network device. is used to generate a secret session key to encrypt the subsequent message exchange. UPnP uses a different protocol. discovering services and providing peer-to-peer data transfer over an IP network. TFTP works like a very basic form of FTP. Like Zeroconf. The random number. external to the network. Small UPS systems provide power for a few minutes. U UPnP: Universal Plug and Play. UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply. TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol): A simple file transfer protocol used to transfer small files between hosts on a network. The type of application environment. In effect. enough to power down the computer in an orderly manner. The TLS client uses the public key from the server to encrypt a random number and send it back to the server. A family of protocols from the UPnP Forum that automatically configure devices.0 protocol developed by Netscape. I/O or data intensive. TLS: Transport Layer Security. MediaServer and MediaRenderer for streaming. Unlike Zeroconf. while larger systems have enough battery for several hours. T Terabyte (TB): For data storage capacity usage. determines whether large or small stripes should be used. A device that provides battery backup when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. UPnP uses link-local addressing for IP assignment and provides service discovery.

and the Dynamic and/or Private Ports. Slackware. the Registered Ports. A logical group of user stations.4 and 2. Virtualized storage occurs when storage is exported to the network as a disk drive or an array and is then imported by a master NSS. a storage device or network resources. Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 181 . WINS: Windows Internet Naming Service. Installation programs for the SuSE.6 kernels. Fedora. You can access and control the switches directly from a console port or via the LAN using IP. This is part of the Microsoft Windows NT Server. FreeBSD gained read-only support for XFS in December 2005 and in June 2006 experimental write support was introduced to FreeBSD-7. The user or an administrator does not have to be involved in each configuration change. regardless of their physical location. XFS has been merged into the mainline Linux 2. Ubuntu and Debian Linux distributions all offer XFS as a choice of filesystem. servers. a server. You can use the MAC addresses or IP addresses to interconnect the workstations on the LAN. It manages the association of workstation names and locations with Internet addresses. The Cisco NSS refers to virtualization as a way of aggregating storage between devices. and other network devices that appear to be on the same LAN. Gentoo. VLAN: Virtual Local Area Network (LAN).Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms D V Virtualization: The creation of a virtual (rather than actual) version of something. The master NSS then uses the newly imported storage to create a single JBOD. Mandriva. W Well Known Ports: IANA assigns TCP and UDP port numbers to specific uses. such as an operating system. X XFS: A high-performance journaling filesystem created by Silicon Graphics for their IRIX operating system. Zenwalk. The port numbers are divided into three ranges: the Well Known Ports. making it almost universally available on Linux systems.0-CURRENT.The Ports that are popular (well known) are those in the range 0 to 1023.

Linksys Small Business NSS4000 and NSS6000 Series Network Storage System Administration Guide 182 . Zeroconf lets users and applications readily discover the service it offers. Apple’s Bonjour is the major implementation of Zeroconf. Zeroconf can also manually assign an IP address and alternate host name to a device. as required. Once assigned.Glossary of Storage-related Terms and Acronyms D Z Zeroconf: An IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) specification that lets IP network devices automatically configure themselves and be discovered without manual intervention.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful